Home

Datacolor Match Textile User's Guide (Version 1.0)

1. ecipe m Fie Select View New Open fff Delete Quick Search Tice RGB color Recipe_ID Y Recipe Name Recipe_AuxiD Recipe loc LockedLeve Quality ID CombProcess_ID Affinity 1D A 129 2 Reef Beige 002 Theory m CoStch REA BEZ Coly 1293 Ret Beige 003 Theory CoStch REA BEZ Coly 129 4 Copy ofRef Beige Theory a 1 REA BEZ CO SPZ 129 5 Ret Beige 004 Theory e i REA BEZ CO SPZ __ 13 41 0001 Maninp 240401 Theory s 1 REA BEZ CO SPZ e Ref Grey Theory 3 REA BEZ CO Norm __ 1335 Dlive Green Laboratory s 3 DISP TER PES TEX EO cs Ref Red Laboratory s 3 REA BEZ CO Norm EI 135 2 Copy of Ref Red Laboratory e 9 REA BEZ CO Norm b a a _ Ret Green Laboratory e i REA BEZ CO SPZ LII a a Ref Green 001 Laboratory s 1 REAXY TAB CO SPZ E Ref Green 1904 1100 Laboratory s 1 REA BEZ CO SPZ _ E Ref Green 002 Theory e 3 REA BEZ CO Norm __ a 1424 NOOO11 HELLBEIGE NO1 00 Theory e 3 DISP 2 PES TEX 1 424 01 N00011 HELLBEIGE NO1 Theory 3 DISP 2 PES TEX v Find in Recipe ID Value query sorted on Recipe_ID Functions of the Select Menu Quick Search Default Query Opens a dialog box used to specify a search criteria for the recipes Selects all recipes Recipes with Quality List Adds a column with the query list Recipes with a Product in a Given Conc Range Opens a dialog box for setting a concentration range for search
2. R x Quality Style Creation Date 02 09 93 55PES 45CV Libero Automn Modification li ColorLab SubstrateDelivery New SSPES 45CV Libero Automn Normal Substr B Do you really want to save r Sample Old Fiber sample name Measure a ay e new measurement PES 45CV Libero Automn Normal Substr B VI You can now overwrite the measurement of the substrate delivery 5 32 Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data Datacolor F 5 Using Datacolor MATCH e Modifying and Deleting A Quality Style Action Result Notes 1 Open the Quality Style Property Refer to Quality Style Property Sheet on sheet page 7 22 for information about the parameters Modifying Select the quality style alter the data and click Save You can specify an additional sub strate using the Substrate Delivery button Deleting Select the quality style click Delete and confirm the dele tion Deletion of substrate delivery samples Note If you delete a substrate delivery from the quality you can also delete the reflec tance sample Check the corresponding check box If you delete a substrate delivery in the explorer view the sample is not deleted Remember that the substrate delivery can only be deleted if there is no link to other data February 2005 5 33 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHT
3. Description Il CieLab E CMC E Datacolor FMC2 E Pc7a Mse3 BF Cie 94 BI Din 39 Parameters Table Input values for minimum and maximum tolerances Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 7 48 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Tolerance Block Program Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor Tab Tolerance Block Program xj S Creation Date Modification User ID Datacolor Default ie 01 04 1999 DCI Description 11 CieLab BB CMC El Datacolor FMC2 JPc79 Ms89 F Cie 94 BI DIN 39 p Mue LCH Datacolor Block Training fs fo fo jo Block Manual Input m Sigma LCR _ _a Tolerance Values Parameters Datacolor Block Training Opens the Datacolor Tolerance Block dialog box Block Manual Input Opens the Manual Input of Tolerance Values dialog box Tolerance Values Opens the Tolerance Values Output dialog box used for information about tolerance values Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes FMC2 Tab LI 4 P tFMC 2 Creation Date 01 04 1999 Modification User ID DCI Description II CieLab BI CMC EI Datacolor FMC2 Jpc7a mses 58 Cie 94 E DIN 99 Parameters Table Input for tolerance value Refer t
4. lt Back Cancel Help This dialog is very important 3 You have to decide e wether the measurements should be compared to a reference sample e how many measurements should be taken in the horizontal direction mea surements per line maximum is 4 and e how many measurements per piece should be done in the vertical of a fabric The measurements in horizontal direction are called Tag 1 Tag 2 Tag 3 and Tag 4 For each tag you can give a name describing the position of the measur ing This name is stored together with the spectrum and is used to identify the position Note These names cannot be modified if a batch series exists using that script Refer to Diagram Measurement distribution on page 5 109 Up to four tags may be defined If you check Only one line the measurement program stops if the measurements defined in Measurements per line are done 4 Select the Pass Fail formula 5 Click Next to continue February 2005 5 107 5 108 Batch Serie Relation i xi Releation with standard O Left Standard LeftCenter Standard 1 0 RightCenter Standard 1 0 Chamndard Relation with previous batch LeftCenter LeftCenter RightCenter RightCenter 1 0 Right Right Relation with batch on same line Left LeftCenter O LettCenter RightCenter OD RightCenter Right af caca eo 6 Set the measurements you want
5. DCIMatch Y0002 ELEFANT O File Correct Tools Instrument Window Help 18 x EGS ee BE BES ci 9 we Standard 0002 ELEFANT Quality Style 100 00 Trevira 2000 Substrate factor Trevira 2000 990210 1 10 Formula CieLab Default D65 MMMM Pertormance Gatch Standard Original 01 0 7802 0 0078 0 0100 01 Standard with DBS Recipe with 4 For Help press F1 Selection of corrected recipes using different correction methods Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Version 1 0 Datacolor Correction Datacolor F 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Color inconstancy iew configuration A E xj Visible dat Md on Decimal places colorimetric 2 da a Decimal places concentration E dc a dH Correction table id m a IV Smartmatch IV Batch SeEnsSyIty J Total concentration IV Additiv IV Standard dE Average N Multiplicative M History M de 2 MV CMCCOND2 2 E dE 3 IV CMCCONO2 3 Iv Performance jm des Vv ICMCCONDZ 4 If empty boxes show the best correction Iv 2 illuminants banks effects and history Cancel Color inconstancy is the change in color of a single sample under different light sources The magnitude of color inconstancy can be defined by DE CMC or any other color dif ference formula of the sample between two light sources To activate the calculation of the color inconstancy open the context sensitive menu select the function View configuratio
6. Batch Property Type Use Filter vValue Use only batches from this folder a BAT_IMAGE ImageMaster Batch Image Ab OK libernehmer Hilte Parameters Sort Script Selection box with the currently used sort job Check boxes If you check want to use a Datacolor Tools Standard only Datacolor Tools standards are displayed to select from The batches linked to this standard are listed in the set of Batches tab They are already selected if Automatically include new batches is checked as well In this case it is not possible to remove batches from the list This is only possible if Automatically include new batches is not selected Standard Selection box with the selected standard If you do not select a standard the program calculates the average of all batches and uses this as the theoretical stan dard for the pass fail decision Measure Start button for the measurement Refer to Measurement on page 5 20 Table You can set filters to reduce the number of batches that are displayed for selection A fil ter might be a specific folder or any user defined field you have created either with Data color Tools or with Datacolor SORT Datacolor February 2005 7 161 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Set of Batches Tab New Sort Job Wizard Script and Filter Set of Batches Tapering Parameters View Options Output Options Set of Batches Select
7. UY Calibration Methods 065 10 Ganz Griesser D65 10 CIE whiteness C ISO Brightness ICOMI 19200 N 8 2 Mult 4 Tol CieLab F 1 00 DE 1 0 Time left 4 40 Action Result Notes 1 In the Measurement Main Window select the UV Calibration tab 2 Select specular Excl Set aperture LAV 4 Click Whiteness Parameters The Ganz Griesser Calibration dialog box appears 5 12 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics 5 Using Datacolor MATCH tile Ganz Griesser Calibration Instrument specific parameters determination Current UY 7 2953 Nominal mim Color Coord Cancel im oe Q w tw Action Result Notes 5 In the Ganz Griesser Calibration dialog box specify the Nominal Whiteness and click Measure 6 Repeat step 5 for all samples of your whiteness scale 7 Click Calculate The calibration results are displayed Calibration Resulta Whiteness nom 72 90 whiteness found 71 62 Whiteness nom 127 60 whiteness found 128 20 Whiteness nom 174 50 Whiteness found 176 45 Whiteness nom 225 60 whiteness found 224 42 dw d 4075 64 Accept Recalibrate to ha Datacolor February 2005 5 13 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Action Result Notes 8 Re calibrate until dW dS is The program optimizes the UV filter 4000 10 You must measure all positi
8. Specify a file name and click Save The Form maintenance dialog box appears Refer to Form Maintenance Dialog Box on page 7 136 The Save as dialog box appears Importing Print Forms Tools Menu Datacolor Action Result On the Tools menu select Import Print Form Select the print form export file pfe to be imported and click Open The Open dialog box appears The Save as dialog box appears February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration ASCII Output Option The ASCII output option supports writing data to an ASCII file when you can print data This option includes specifying modifying and deleting ASCII forms Specifying ASCII Forms Action Result 1 On submenu ASCII Forms of the The ASCII Output Definition dialog Tools menu select New box appears ASCII OUTPUT Definition E xj Template ldea e Select a template you want create LabDyelot XI an ASCII form from LabDyelot a Cancel Help 2 Select a template from the list and The Data dialog box appears click Next 4 20 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor ASCII Output Option 4 Configuration and Administration Data eee Records Fields CombProcess_ID a 3 CombProcess_Name Fiske Affinity_Name a ColorT ype_Name mat T Batch_Name Type text sai 3 DyedS ample_Name mt 7 Trial at T Weight at T
9. The altered recipe is saved Datacolor MATCH e tle Version 1 0 Datacolor Recipe Calculation Matching Datacolor 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Manual Recipe Modification Recipe Table The concentration calculated by Datacolor MATCH Textile may be modified in the recipe table Action Result Notes 1 In the recipe table select the requested recipe 2 In the Table or the context sensi tive menu select Modify 3 Change the concentrations of the The recipe is marked with an M dyestuffs It is possible to specify concen trations for dyestuffs that are not used for the recipe character to indicate that the rec ipe has been modified The values for color difference and metamerism are continually recalculated The recipe price is not re calculated Round the Dyestuff Concentration Recipe Table Another way to modify the concentrations is the Round function You can round the concentrations of all recipes corresponding to the setting in the Options dialog box Refer to Options Dialog Box on page 7 112 Action Result Notes 1 In the Table or the context sensi tive menu select Round The recipe is marked with an R character to indicate that the rec ipe has been rounded The values for color difference and metamerism are continually recalculated The recipe price is not re calculated February 2005 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide
10. i99Fo rase 2 gt ALL Mean values 2 24 ake lt lt C 274 pts O deleted 0 hidden 01179 pep Batch 15 C 45 0 83 E 12 ES EA eee es 01177 DEL Batch 15 C 45 0 36 0 35 20 85 13 50 2 04 3 85 1 41 1 16 0 925 4 392 1 293 Batch 17 dBat 15 Batch 17 dBat 15 Batch 18 C 51 The two points 205 and 192 have both the same or similar batch and the same or simi lar difference values You can delete one point because it makes no sense to have two points with almost the same information You should also delete points with the same concentrations C x comment Import Dialog Box x The import of Items may be a critical operation You should backup your database first Import Filename refine te Browse Parameters Import File Name Path and name of the file to be imported Use the Browse button for searching and selecting Browse button 7 134 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Displays the Windows standard Open dialog box Datacolor Export Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Export Dialog Box Datacolor Samples Datamatch EXP Samples Datacolor E nvision Colorite TX Samples Datacolor Match DCIMatch XML C Dyesets Datacolor Match DCIMatch XML Selected Samples FAJ All Data L 5 EZ PY ane Filename p atamatchS ample EXP Browse Cancel Help Parameters Radio buttons Selection of the sample forma
11. 2 Select Input Form The requested tab box or window appears 5 8 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics Specifying objects 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Action Result Notes Select a folder if necessary Switch to the input mode Specify the new object name or overwrite the existing name with the new one Specify the other data Click Insert The input mode icon appears Fields marked with a red are man datory Refer to the corresponding description in chapter Windows and Dialog Boxes on page 7 1 for more information about the parameters The new object is created Modifying and Deleting Objects Action Result Notes Select the object data to be modified or deleted Modifying In the requested fields change the object data and click Save Deleting Click Delete and confirm the deletion Refer to Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 The input mode icon appears The object is altered The object is deleted Note F An object cannot be deleted if it is linked to other objects If the system cannot delete an object all valid links are listed in the Delete Check info box Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Calibration and Measurement F Note For further details about your spectrometer refer to the manual supplied with your system It is not possible to
12. COM1 19200 N 8 2 Mult 4 Tol CieLab F 1 00 DE 1 0 Time left 7 42 Action Result Notes 1 In the Measurement Main Window select the General Options tab 2 In the left box click Correlation The Correlation setup box appears on the right 3 Select the master instrument All information about the master instru ment selected appears in the corre sponding fields 4 Click the button ON to enable the When enabled each measurement correlation feature resp the button made will be adjusted based on the cor OFF to disable it relation data in the file identified at the bottom of the window 5 Click Save options to save your settings Datacolor February 2005 5 17 Green Tile Test The green tile test checks the instrument after the calibration If the test fails the instru ment must be calibrated again Configure the green tile test Measurement Main Window a x Measurement conditions Tes Specular INCL Ee Aperture Normal 3 Flashes 100 4 UV 0 6 Cut off NONE GI Single EA Multiple BM Until Tol Calibrate y Instruments Setup General Options Options Single Measurement Green Tile Test EA Multiple Measurement Lai Until Tolerance A Instrument Calibration Performs diagnostic tile test after aways x Correlation N Green Tile Test Limit for diagnostic tile test instrument calibration Keeps the test results reflectance Treat failed diagnostic tile
13. Calibration dye Colorat set process gt Y Treatment Y i el ee Combined process Treatment A combined process is used to describe the entire dyeing process either for laboratory or production A treatment is generated for each calibration dye process type e g Exhaust Continuous linked to the combined process Treatment A treatment consists of one or more operations describing the dyeing process for labo ratory and or production Operation The operation specifies the sequence of actions to be done during the dyeing Actions may be parameters e g temperature volume or products e g chemicals etc Z Note If Datacolor PROCESS is not installed only one operation is possible for each treatment the operation supports XY tables decision tables and fixed parameter values only Datacolor February 2005 5 61 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide 5 62 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Modifying Deleting A Combined Process F F Note Refer to the Datacolor PROCESS documentation for more information Action Result Notes In the Overview window click The Combined Process List window Combined Process appears On the context sensitive or Basic The Combined Processes browse Data menu of the Combined Pro window appears Refer to Combined cess List window select Combined Processes Browse Window on page
14. In the task Options of the menu Batch Series you can select wether all pass fail decisions or only failed ones are to be printed Example of the default printouts 20 02 2001 datacolor mms Center Side QC Details Name M amp S Lot 173652 Description Here you can write down some notes Standard M amp S Blue 454 illuminant msTL84 10 Formula MS89 GE M amp s Mean Std Dev Center Standar 1 52 0 58 Center Center 0 75 0 68 Left Center 0 36 0 45 Center Right 0 36 0 45 Right Lett 0 37 0 45 Name Piece No 1 GL MES Mean Std Dev 0 09 0 30 0 05 0 21 0 00 0 20 0 00 0 20 0 00 0 20 dE M amp S di M amp S dC ME amp S dH M amp S Center Ce nter 0 00 0 00 Left Center 0 09 0 02 Center Right 0 11 0 07 Right Lett 0 11 0 01 Center Standan 1 91 0 57 0 00 0 00 0 08 0 03 0 03 0 08 0 02 0 11 0 65 1 70 GE M amp S di M amp S dC ME amp S JH MES Script M amp s CSQc Dyelot Tolerance MS89 dC MeS GH M amp S IT MES Mean Std Dev Mean StdDev Mean Std Dev 0 91 0 44 0 99 0 73 0 00 0 00 0 09 0 57 0 06 0 82 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 46 0 01 0 29 0 00 0 00 0 01 0 46 0 00 0 29 0 00 0 00 0 02 0 47 0 00 0 29 0 00 0 00 Decision Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Decision 5 114 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor TICKET Option 5 Using Datacolor MATCH tile Datacolor TICKET Option Datacolor TICKET has been designed for customers needing sof
15. Lam 680 Mean 35 BEZAKTIV Red V BT 0 00 BEZAKTIV Blue V R spec 0 00 BEZAKTIV Turquoise V G 50 liq 0 00 BEZAKTIV Green V 6B 0 00 Bezaktiv Green S 4B 0 00 BEZAKTIV Violet Y 5R 0 00 Bezaktiv Blue S GN 150 0 00 BEZAKTIV Navy S 2GL 0 00 BEZAKTIV Navy WBK 0 00 Reference Colorant Set Selection of the existing colorant set used for base of calcula tion Accept button Click Accept if the result is OK Substrate Selection of the new substrate Single Input button Used to select or specify a quality Best Product Selection of the dyestuff The best dyestuff is selected auto matically Sample button Used to measure or select the calibration samples Refer to Specifying Colorants and Calibration Samples on page 5 50 Plots on Graph of the results Table Results of the calculation 7 84 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Illuminant List Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes llluminant List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Illuminant Name Unique name of the Illuminant Observer Name Degree observer Values 10 or 2 Creation Date Date of creation Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on
16. Parameters of the SmartMatch points or groups All columns in the upper table can be ordered by simply clicking the column header Mean Values Displays the mean values of dE_K and dE_S dE_K CMC 2 1 color differences between the batch and the theoretical curve using the Kubelka Munk theory dE_S CMC 2 1 color differences between the batch and the theoretical curve using SmartMatch Note Z dE_S values should always be lower than the corresponding dE_K values Otherwise the population contains bad points that should be deleted L a b Coordinates of the batch representing the SmartMatch point dL da db CIELab color differences of theory K S and batch Dyestuff names Concentrations of the SmartMatch point dyes Datacolor February 2005 7 127 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Buttons lt lt 33 With these buttons you can change the radius of the color space color difference CIELab used to show the SmartMatch points Default value is 32 Selectable are 1 2 4 16 32 and 250 INS DEL This button toggles between DEL to delete and INS to insert the SmartMatch point The points are definitively deleted if you close the population Lab Co This button toggles between Lab and C Lab Lab color space and C concentration space OK The OK button is used to mark the SmartMatch point if it is checked This SM point is hidden in the SM table but is still dis played in t
17. Polyester SubstrateDelivery Dialog Eg Creation Date 2 9 00 Quality 017642 PES CO 70 30 Modification User ID DCI SubstrateDelivery New Jan 7642 PES CO 70 30 2 9 00 gt Sample Total Sample Measure Sae p al Substrate Fibers color ___________ Fiberhame Effect Measure 1 PES skeleton In the example above the total substrate is measured and stored with the substrate delivery and the polyester skeleton is stored together with the substrate delivery fiber Polyester These substrate delivery measurements are used for recipe calculations Note If it is possible to separate all fibers you can measure all The Measure buttons become inactive if the substrate delivery is linked to a rec ipe Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data Datacolor 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Substrate Delivery with Colorant Set Dependent Effects Substrate deliveries can be used with colorant dye set dependent effects Action Result Notes 1 In the Substrate Delivery dialog box click the Effect button 2 Select the colorant set s colorant set and click Insert 3 Type the requested effect into the Effect column 4 Click Close The Substrate Delivery Effect dialog box appears Refer to Substrate Deliv ery Effect Dialog Box The selected colorant set is added to the table The Substrate Delivery Effect dialog b
18. exhaust and continuous processes Stock solutions are only selectable if the Stock Solution is checked in the Options dialog box Action Result Notes 1 In the Stock Solution of the Prod uct Property sheet specify a name for the new stock solution Refer to Stock Solution Tab on page 7 41 for information about the parameters 2 Insert the values according to your needs 3 Click Insert The new stock solution is created Note Fields marked with a red are mandatory Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Dye Process Note F corresponding access rights The delete move copy and rename functions are only available for users having the The dye process contains dye class and process type Specifying A New Dye Process Result Notes Action 1 Open the Dye Process Property Sheet 2 Specify name and identification of the new dye process 3 Specify the parameters of the Dye Process and the Process Factor tabs 4 Click Insert Refer to Dye Process Property Sheet on page 7 29 for information about the parameters Refer to Specifying dye fiber groups on page 5 37 Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 and Specifying Modifying and Deleting Objects on page 5 8 The dye process is created Specifying dye fiber groups Actio
19. 132 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile SORT job Definition Options This function program is used to create or modify tolerances Refer to Specifying Modi fying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 Action Result Notes 1 Select either the option Sort Job The Sort Job Definition Options dialog Definition Options on the Datacol box appears or Sort menu or on the context sen Refer to Sample Property Dialog Box sitive menu on page 7 169 2 Modify the data and click OK Check the input pages you want to see when a new SORT job is defined The default settings for the sort job definition are Sort Job Definition Options x Check the input pages you want to see when a new job is defined or an existing job is maintained Invisible pages are filled with the values from the Sort Script Grouping Parameters IV Group Limits Tapering Parameters IV View Options IV Output Options Cancel Note Z If you want to be sure that a user works only with the predefined settings of the Sort Script you have to limit the access rights respectively Login as User DCI and run the option User Administration Menu Tools User Manager User Administration Datacolor February 2005 5 133 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Datacolor BLEND Option 5 134 Datacolor BLEND i
20. 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Correct or Approve Your Recipe Dialog Box Datacolor x Name Pant 14 1110 TC Boulder Tial ______ Productname Cones _ Unit Fiber CO 100 Levafix Yellow E 3RL 0 6478 gi R Levafix Brown E 2R 0 3468 gi Levafix Brilliant Blue E B 0 3063 gA Information on your last batches 50 400 500 600 70 Color difference is CMC Fier aten Owe ele elt dec aon Approve Cancel Parameters Name Trial Table Information table Buttons Pass Fail and Correction Approve Name of the selected recipe Selection of the trial to be corrected or approved List of products and concentrations used for the recipe Color differences of the batches Opens the Laboratory Correction dialog box used for labo ratory corrections Approves the selected recipe February 2005 7 95 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Laboratory Correction Dialog Box Lab Correction for Y0002 ELEFANT 040400 1105 Standard Dyeset Settings Save Laborat Dyeset Remazol SPB Silicate Part 100 Site R Remazol Yellow R Gran m Batch amp color difference for CieLab Default D65 fe All Data ia Reset batch Peer N0002 ELEFANT N Es dE 2 12 dL 2 04 dC 0 55 dH 0 20 da 0 05 db 0 59 Batch refused E heh I SM Analyse I Total batch
21. 7 112 The Options dialog box is used for defining views connecting dispensers enabling the use of stock solutions defining laboratory units and printing definitions for the recipe tables General button Close Closes the Options dialog box If data is altered the program requests the data be saved View Tab Options xl View Dispenser Stock Solution Unit Selection Print V ID MV AuslD V CombinedProcess IV Grid Column Titles in Bold J Small color background in spectral graphic Large color background in spectral graphic Rounding precision significant digits E IV Enhanced production correction Save Parameters Check boxes If checked the related data will be displayed Rounding precision significant digits The rounding function of recipe and the laboratory correction tables rounds to the number of the significant digits Small color background in spectral graphic The color spectrum is displayed to the bottom of the graph box Small color background in spectral graphic The color spectrum is displayed as background of the graph box Buttons Save Saves the current selection Default ID Aux ID Combined Process and Grid Column Titles in Bold are checked Note Grid Column Titles in Bold must be checked for the Chinese and Japanese versions of Datacolor MATCHI amp Xile Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Options Dialog Box Dispenser Tab 7
22. Custom Name dialog page box 4 Specify the custom name and click The table column title is altered OK 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to alter other table column titles 6 Click Save 7 Click Close to close the Browse Columns for Explorer dialog box Using the mouse you can change the sequence of the table columns by drag and drop You can alter the position of column titles by drag and drop _ PREPARATION_ID _ PRODNOTE si MIA ITS ALINA QUALITY_NAME Affinity AFFINIT _ QUALITY ID oe mee A em e Datacolor February 2005 4 7 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Browse Filters 4 Configuration and Administration It is possible to specify customized filters queries for selecting data from the database Customized filters can be ordered from Datacolor Please contact your Datacolor distributor for more information Note Z The integrated tool for customizing filters needs advanced know how of both the database and SQL Filters are language dependant They can only be specified and used with appli cations that have the same application language Using Browse Filters User definable filters Ea Prepare Filter Define Fiter Data Recipe Filter Recipes with two dyestuffs i Dyestuff 1 e7 Dyestuff 2 es Action 1 On the context sensitive menu of the requested list window click Filter 2 In the Prepare Filter tab select the filter type the id
23. Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor SmartMatch SmartMatch 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Introduction Datacolor The SmartMatch facility is used to improve first time matching and correction Standard color prediction uses the Kubelka Munk theory which assumes that dyes behave in the same way when used together or stand alone However this is not the case dyes inter act with one another The SmartMatch facility overcomes this problem by taking into account the performance of previous predictions e g learning by experience SmartMatch stores information about the concentrations used to dye a sample and the results of dyeing and uses this data to correct the first attempt made by Kubelka Munk calculations in future matching It stores information about previous predictions as SmartMatch points Once you set your system to SmartMatch it runs automatically However you can also examine the SmartMatch points the system is using and alter them to refine Smart Match performance For example if you suspect that one of the SmartMatch points being used is based on a bad dyeing you can remove this point This way it is no more used in the calculations The number of similar points is reduced by grouping them In addition to the automatic SmartMatch housekeeping a powerful graphical tool supports to check the SmartMatch population for SmartMatch points to be deleted or grouped All recipes calculated using the Match
24. Further use The recipes can be saved printed and or sent to a dispenser 5 68 Datacolor MATCH tile version 1 0 Datacolor Recipe Calculation Matching Datacolor Calculation of A New Recipe Series Ei F Preliminary Work Note 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The Save button is used to save a manually inserted recipe Refer to Selecting dyestuffs for matching on page 5 71 for a re dyeing If the parameter Fixed is used and the recipe is saved before the calculation the dyestuff concentrations are used as default values and can be altered A cor rection is possible If the parameter Fixed is used and the recipe is calculated without saving the specified dyestuff concentrations are constant values and cannot be changed A correction is restricted or impossible Action Result Notes Note 8 Open the Recipe List window On the Recipe or the context sen sitive menu select Calculate or press F5 Select the quality style and the com bined process If necessary select the substrate delivery Select the colorant set s Select the Standard to be matched If you have to re dye select the dyed substrate or re measure it The Match dialog box appears Refer to Match Dialog Box on page 7 116 for a parameter description Dye process and colorant set are dis played Refer to Specifying Modifying or Delet ing a Quality Style on page 5 26 and Speci
25. IV find with any leading text Modified yyyy mmedd hh mm before ESTE I after Search criteria You can type a complete name or a part of it If you are typing a part it is necessary to check one or both of the boxes for leading or trailing text Z Note Wildcards cannot be used Additionally you can select the time range of the last modification Buttons Search Starts the search Stop Stops the current search Clear removes all data from the input and list boxes Context sensitive menu in the Search Result table Display Displays a print preview of the selected object Print Prints data of the selected object ASCII Output Saves data of the selected object into a ASCII output 7 14 Datacolor MATCH amp tile version 1 0 Datacolor Measurement Main Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Measurement Main Window The Measurement dialog box is used for selection and setting up the instrument cali bration and measurement Refer to Calibration and Measurement on page 5 10 Single Tab Example Measurement Main Window Measurement conditions Iker Specular INCL Ze Aperture LAV 3 Flashes 2 4 uwz 79 6 Cutoff NONE cr 450 500 550 600 660 700 Com1 19200 N 8 2 Mult 4 Tol Cmc F 0 80 l 2 0 c 1 0 Time left 5 8 Refer to the manual of your spectrophotometer for instrument specific information Color tab Shows the color of the measured sa
26. P If there is no fiber in the database that matches the fiber of the colorant set click No Match A new fiber is then created Click OK to start the import 8 NoMatch VI r Fiber Creation wo Fiber ID few Fiber Name Baumwolle 4 14 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Importing Data Datacolor 4 Configuration and Administration Note The dye class is treated in the same way as the fiber If the dye class of the colorant set does not exist in the database a dialog opens where you can select an equivalent dye class from your database O This is to avoid creating the same dye classes in different languages e g Dis persion Disperse or Cationique and Basic etc If there is no dye class in the database that matches the dye class of the colorant set click No Match 8 A new dye class is then created You can modify the dye class ID and name before you start the import e Click OK to start the import Dyeclass of Dyeset CATIONIQUE Please select Dyeclass whichgfatches Dyeclass of Dyeset or click No Match Dyeclasses available o 1 2 metal compl Nomatch Acid Tale Basic Dyeclass creation Basici 1 5 Direct Dikelass ID CATI Dispers Disperse DyeclaX Name Reactive Vat ae e Selected ID BAS ERREI Dyeclass creation Dydelass ID Cat DyeNass Mame Cationic February 2005 4 15 Datacolor MATCH tle User s
27. Recipe with D65 Standard with D6S Standard with A Recipe with A 5 146 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor BLEND Option 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Calculation of the Theoretical Color Needed to Correct the Filer Lot Instead of calculating a recipe using a part of the existing lot it is possible to calculate the theoretical reflectance curve of the color that is necessary to correct the existing lot The theoretical reflectance curve is used in Datacolor MATCH l to calculate a recipe for dyeing a new fiber This new fiber is blended later with the existing lot Match N Standard ae Saas Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings __ Save Fiberset wool Felt Part 100 eres Batch and color difference oF a art Er za Stone Wool Efoseewor D dE 17 36 dL 15 81 dC 6 87 dH 2 05 da 5 25 db 4 88 5 Batch refused TS a E SI A s 400 500 600 700 Share 14 00 Max Of Share 48 72 gt R dE Mi theory to standard 17 36 17 49 Group dE Mi theory to batch system fei Delete III Selection Lain _Save on yest Concentration ASM __ ________ Shown selected 5 ______ Compul Fixed Min 100 Max 100 ___ Relation___ ae Action Result Notes 1 Click gt R to calculate the theoreti The Insert a theoretical sample dialog ca
28. Replace Dyestuffs in Recipes Dyestuffs can be replaced in all recipes recipe tables and trials but not in SmartMatch populations Concentrations can be modified using a factor 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The dyestuffs are replaced in all recipes but a selection is possible with filters The fil ters can limit the range of recipes the location of the approved recipes the recipe type the color type the affinity the quality Change one product in Recipes j x Old product New product m Type of product Dyestuff Chemical Cancel ABezaktiv Yellow S 3R 150 Strength 150 iA All Data T pezaktiv Yellow 8G Strength 1 Filter recipes and continue Factor Applied factor did Action Result Notes In the Recipe List window select the menu function Change Dyestuff in Recipes Select the old and the new product If necessary type your own factor to correct the strength Click Filter Recipes and Continue Refer to Recipe List Window on page 7 91 The Change One Product in Recipes dialog box appears The calculated factor for concentration is displayed in the field Applied Factor The final factor using the dyestuff strength and the user s factor is dis played in the field Applied Factor The Search Recipes with Filter using a filter dialog box appears Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Recipe
29. The upper partial button selects the values step by step in descending order previous the lower partial button in ascending order next Browse buttons 3 4 The upper browse button 3 opens the Directory dialog box used for folder selection The lower browse button 4 opens a list or search box to select data corresponding to the field February 2005 5 5 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Selection aids for fields and table column headers The following selection aids are implemented for input fields with a link to another object drop down combo boxes or fields with a browse button Typed characters are used for search criteria In front of the field they are displayed in red and into disappointed brackets The following wildcards are available percent _ underscore Examples Pr Replaces an undefined number of characters is set per default at the end of the search string Replaces any single character The characters or a range of characters between the square brackets are to be included in the data found or Displays only names that contain the characters o orr b h Displays only names that contain the characters of the range b to h The characters or a range of characters between the square brackets are not to be included in the data found If you scroll using search criteria only the corresponding objects are displayed Data
30. Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Action Result Notes 1 Select either the option Maintain Sort Job on the Datacolor Sort menu or on the context sensitive menu 2 Modify the data and click OK The Sort Job Maintenance dialog box appears Refer to Sort Job Maintenance Dialog Box on page 7 160 Note Z The data you can change depends on your access rights and the job itself Datacolor February 2005 5 125 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHIeXtile Specifying A New Sort Script Action Result Notes 1 Select either the option New Sort The New Sort Script wizard starts The Script on the Datacolor Sort menu sort job name may be modified and a or on the context sensitive menu description can be entered into the description field Refer also to Sort Script Maintenance Dialog Box on page 7 167 Script Name x welcome to the New Sort Script Wizard This wizard helps you create a new script for sorting and or tapering your samples The script defines the fundamental criteria according to which the batches will be sorted tapered This wizard is intended for experienced users only If you feel unsafe please press Cancel now Type a name for the new script AAAI Data eas New Script 25 09 2003 13 19 27 ass Note If you select an existing script from the database you can modify it with this wizard Description Grouping and Tapering C
31. Windows and Dialog Boxes View Dispenser Stock Solution Unit Selection Print Dispenser Settings AutoLab D Program FilesiDatacoloriDCIMatch L Vv C Add Remove Save Close Parameters Name Type File Disp Water Chemicals Used Here Buttons Add Remove Save Dispenser name Dispenser type Autolab creates an ASCII output file DS 5 creates an ASCII output file DS5 format AutoLab Database writes recipe data for AutoLab dispenser systems to the DCI_ALHB DB Sybase database Path to the dispenser folder and input of a file name If checked the dispenser dispenses water If checked the dispenser dispenses chemicals if checked the corresponding dispenser obtains the data of the recipes to be dispensed from the workstation Adds a new dispenser Removes the selected dispenser from the table Saves the current settings February 2005 7 113 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Stock Solution Tab options xt View Dispenser Stock Solution Unit Selection Print IV Use Stock Solutions here IV Check volume Default Stock Solution for Dyestuffs mm Ra Default Dyestuff E Default Stock Solution for Auxiliaries II L Default Auxilary ER Use Stock Solution here If checked the selected stock solutions are used for this workstation It is possible to specify different stock solutions for each workstatio
32. i 0 000 0 000 Measured w 100 000 g i mmm i 28 01 2002 14 56 26 28 01 2002 14 56 26 0 000 0 000 Measured 100 000 n ann OOOO eee nn nnn R vs wavelength K vs wavelength K vs concentration at maximum value log K vs concentration at maximum value Fix your wavelengths Show tables Show edit parameters KS relative strength KS absolute Strength c 20 0 9253 c 35 1 8116 K 370 0 0000 0 0983 02609 0 4979 0 9412 18274 4 7251 K 380 0 0000 0 1108 0 2734 0 5104 0 9536 1 8399 4 7376 K 390 0 0000 0 1214 0 2840 0 5210 0 9643 1 8505 4 7483 K 400 0 0000 0 1300 0 2926 0 5296 0 9729 1 8591 4 7568 K 410 0 0000 0 1487 0 3313 0 5971 1 1002 2 1212 5 5059 K K K c 50 4 7093 Add colorant Move colorant Delete colorant Compare with another colorant Use 2 graphs 420 0 0000 0 1619 0 3560 0 6420 1 1859 22975 5 9959 430 0 0000 0 1669 0 3651 0 6558 1 2113 2 3458 6 1050 440 0 0000 0 1636 0 3574 0 6413 1 1791 2 2746 5 9030 2 Nat GR PM A N ION Ge ce e dl IEEE nl EEE an disc 390 nm on disc 410 nm on disc 430 nm on disc 450 nm OORT EEN E ANL gran 160 Golden Yellow Remazol E Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor F Datacolor Using two graphs This option shows two graphs boxes with either graphical displays of two products or two different grap
33. or products e g chemicals etc Note If Datacolor Process is not installed only one operation is possible for each treatment the operation supports XY tables decision tables and fixed parameter values only Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Recipe Calculation Matching 2 Overview Recipe Calculation Matching Datacolor Selection Dyestuffs Operation Limits for parameters Concentration Combined process Multi color matching Match in the background Print Dispense Save Selection Quality style data of the substrate Combined process Substrate delivery only for deliveries with data different to the blank dyeing sub strate Dyed substrate over dyeing only Dyestuff group with dyes pre selected from the assigned colorant set The dye stuff group is used to optimize the recipe calculation Selection criteria e Dyes from the list e Parameter values e g fastness information e Concentration values e g min max conc Settings parameters for calculation control Standard Color to be matched Match The recipes are calculated according to the selections and the results are displayed February 2005 2 7 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 2 Overview SmartMatch Review The recipes can be reviewed according to the different crite ria various color difference values coordinates price etc Further use The recipes can be saved printed and or sent to
34. 0 650 700 7 400 450 500 550 60 nm 5 o Refer to Insert A Theoretical Sample Dialog Box on page 7 123 View configuration Opens the View Configuration dialog box Refer to View Configuration Dialog Box Laboratory Correction Table on page 7 100 Modify Used for changing recipe manually Round Rounds the results according to the specification in the View tab of the options dialog box Modify Graphical Opens the Manual Lab Correction dialog box Refer to Man ual Graphical Correction on page 5 101 February 2005 7 99 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes View Configuration Dialog Box Laboratory Correction Table 7 100 Used to configure the laboratory correction table view configuration gt Visible data dL dE2 IV CMCCOND2 2 dEg IV CMCCOND2 3 ded CMCCONO2 4 v 2illuminants banks x Decimal places colorimetric 2 Decimal places concentration oo Correction table IV Smartmatch MV Batch IV Additiv M Standard IV Multiplicative IV History IV Performance If empty boxes show the best correction effects and history Cancel Datacolor MATCHTEtile Version 1 0 Datacolor Production Correction Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Production Correction Dialog Box Production correction for Y0002 ELEFANT 040400 1105 Standard Trial Nu
35. 8 Same Horizontal Size Active if more than one field is selected 9 Same Vertical Size Active if more than one field is selected 10 Text Used to specify a text field 11 Rectangle Used to draw rectangles 12 Ellipse Used to draw ellipses 13 Bitmap Used to enter a picture e g a logo Supported formats 14 Date Time 15 Page Number 16 Form Name 17 Login User 18 Zoom bmp pcx jpg Used to enter a field with date and time Used to enter a page count field Used to enter a field for the form name Used to insert the Name of the logged in user Selection of predefined zoom values 7 138 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor MONITOR 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor MONITOR Batch Series Window Datacolor Refer to e Adding A Graph Panel on page 5 112 Printing A Batch Series on page 5 114 DCIMatch M amp S Lot 173652 5 x ZJ File Batch Serie Detail Tools Window Help l8 x Sete Ipod Nt Center Standard dE M amp S dE M amp S Script M amp S CSQC Navigation Left and right cursor keys Navigates from one measurement line orange vertical solid line to the next or previous Corresponding to their position the numeric values are displayed with yellow background color in the table above The pieces of fabric are separated in the graph panel by a dotted black vertical line Results shown in the table One section with the average o
36. 80 Remazol Red 38 Parameters General parameters Trial Number Standard Buttons Approve Save Laboratory Reset Batch Datacolor Tools Evaluate Cancel Evaluate Print ASCII Cancel 50 Remazol Briliant Blue BB gran 133 20 ColorTools Trial number of the selected recipe Measured color to be dyed target color Approves the selected recipe trial Saves manually entered modifications Opens the Recipe Correction dialog box Resets the batch data Opens the Datacolor Tools application for color quality con trol Standard and batch are transferred automatically from the Datacolor MATCHe tle database to the Datacolor Tools database Print Displays the colorimetric data in a print preview ASCII Creates a text file using a specified form Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Closes the dialog box without saving Data that not has been saved will be lost 7 96 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Laboratory Correction Dialog Box Datacolor 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Parameters of the Colorant Set tab Colorant set Batch and Information line SM Analysis Total batch Table Note Protected A Colorant set tab is displayed for each colorant set The colorant set name and the part of the corresponding fibre in are displayed on the top Selection of the measured sample dyed according to the rec ipe t
37. Continuous or Exhaust Dye class e g Disperse Delta E color difference sample theory and standard deviation dependent to the calibration method Unit used for the concentration Name of the dye process Date of creation Date of last modification Type of the dyeing process Name of the currently used substrate Liquor ratio or pickup value Name of the operation Graphical view of the calibration results Values and units of the axis are displayed according to the selected analysis Context sensitive menus Reset Change Color Change Printer Color With Origin Grid Fonts Points Log View More Visible Curves Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Resets the Zoom and With Origin settings Refer to Customizing Graphs on page 4 30 Refer to Customizing Graphs on page 4 30 If checked the current graph is displayed with the coordinate zero point If checked a grid is displayed Opens the Font dialog box used to define the font for the graph Useful for R and K S vs Wavelength graph If checked the measurement points are displayed The graph is based on logarithmic values Refer to Customizing Graphs on page 4 30 List of all curves The curves may be selected or the selection can be canceled using a mouse click Datacolor Colorant Set Window Clicking on a curve Select Hide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Selects a curve The measurement points are di
38. Datacolor Spectral Tab Sample Input 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Name S Demo Data Batches B Description ABAT12 J Pa E Data information Reflectance Transmission Input Specular Date Manual Included ETETETT C Instrumental Excluded Wed Mar 27 16 12 15 2002 Spectral Coordinates Data Input 1 Wavelength 400 Last Wavelength 700 Wavelength Interval Cs 10 20 Manual Data Entry SRA 50 Lambda nm oO o oO Oo m mn g Oo oa Oo o m g a pa o Save As Checksum 905 01 Delta R fo l ose Parameters Data Input First Wavelength Last Wavelength Wavelength Interval Spectral Data Length Graph Starting wavelength for data input Ending wavelength for data input Wavelength steps for data input Number of values Graphical view of the result Context sensitive Menu Reset Change Color With Origin Grid Fonts Points Log View Resets the last manual data entry Opens the Color window twice to define the colors of the graph The first definition is for the background the second for the lines If checked the current graph is displayed with the coordinate zero point If checked a grid is displayed Opens the Font dialog box used to define the font for the graph If checked the interval points are displayed Logarithmic view February 2005 7 73 Datacolor MATCH il
39. DyeSet dETluminant dE MetamerismText1 Metamerism1 MetamerismText2 Metamerism2 Reactive Exhaust dE D65 0 00 Metamerism A 0 07 Metamerism F11 0 30 ASCII Output of Basic Data Action Result 1 In the corresponding list window select the object that should be printed to an ASCII file 2 On the basic data menu click The file is saved to the place specified ASCII in the ASCII form Example ASCII output of an affinity ID Name FiberGroup SSPES 45CV WASH 55PES 45CV washed 70 C PES VI Fiber Part Polyester 55 00 Fiber Part Viscose 45 00 QualityID QualityName SSPES 45CV LICL 55PES 45CV Libero Classic fe e sf desk ID Name FiberGroup CO3 C04200 BASF gebl BW RENFORC CO Fiber Part Cotton 100 00 QualityID QualityName S4 C04200 BASF gebl BW RENFORC Datacolor February 2005 4 23 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration Calibrating the Monitors Using Datacolor SPYDER2 Note Sro This function is enabled if the Datacolor SPYDER2 is connected to the USB port This function is used to perform the monitor calibration for adjusting the color of the monitor After calibrating the monitor all color patches displayed on the screen are more similar to the color of the measured sample A calibrated monitor enables you to judge and compare colors more correctly before dyeing Action Re
40. Lab Note Prod Note SpecialComp SubstrateDelivery Substrate b Modify Specifying A New Quality Style It is recommended to specify the objects in the following sequence 1 Fiber 2 Fiber group 3 Affinity 4 Customer Caution When using the Affinity SmartMatch matching method it is imperative that only qualities with the same dye behavior are linked to an affinity Otherwise the results of matching will be unusable 5 Quality style 6 Substrate blank dyeing Action Result Notes Open the Quality Style Property Refer to Quality Style Property Sheet sheet on page 7 22 for information about the parameters 2 Select the Fiber tab 3 Specify the fiber group Refer to Browse and Selecting on page Open the fiber list using the browse 5 2 and Specifying Modifying and button If the list is not complete Deleting Objects on page 5 8 specify the additional fibers in the Fiber tab Refer to Fiber Group Tab on page 7 25 February 2005 5 27 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 28 F 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile 4 Affinity If there is more than one fiber in the fiber group specify the parts in the summary must be 100 of the single fibers 5 In the Affinity tab exclude colorant Refer to Excluding Including Colorant set s if requested Sets from into An Affinity on page 5 29 6 Specify the data of the Quality If requested refe
41. Only in the concentration space can you see the large differ ence between the points 17 4 and 57 1 Datacolor February 2005 7 131 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Example of Manually Checked SmartMatch Points The SmartMatch points 12 11 and 16 with a sphere on top have already been checked manually 7 132 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Current Datacolor Population Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Comments Used for SmartMatch Points Note Z Points with a comment should be checked Color N Date ds de_sn L a b ar Jaar a 2131 i91 pn 2 E De 00842 00 12 26 06 19 28 10138 00 12 26 06 44 53 10124 00 12 26 06 44 51 WES 00014 00 12 26 06 17 16 10126 00 12 26 06 44 51 mem 00027 00 12 26 06 17 18 00029 00 12 26 06 17 18 Mean values js O deleted O hidden q 3 E 0 031 0 026 E Batch 3 3 0 000 0 010 Batch 3 2 j 0 002 0 013 Batch 2 1 0 000 0 387 Batch 2 1 y i F 0 005 0 338 Automatic f i A 0 009 0 632 Automatic 1 E I i 0 009 g F ele al e ele e 3 Comments Explanation Automatic cix Batch x dBat x Points with this comment are grouped automatically The number of the group is written to the Grp column in the example it is Group 1 Points are grouped to reduce the number of similar
42. Refer Note to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 The delete and rename functions are only available to users with the corresponding access rights Rename Delete Move to Filter Reset Filter Is used to rename the selected object Deletes the selected object after confirmation Moves a selected object to another folder Refer to Browse Filters on page 4 8 Resets the selected filter Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Data in Folder Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Data in Folder Dialog Box Used to search for data types and the corresponding data records stored in the folder selected in the folder structure Data in rotaen lolx Folder Datamatch E attinity Data Color Type Affinity Name Affinity ID___ Fiber Group Na 2 Modification WP colorant Set Cotton bleached CO SPZ 1999 04 20 11 01 33 Combined Process Cotton knitted not mercerised CO Norm co 1999 04 20 11 01 33 Customer Cotton merc CO MERC CO 1999 04 20 11 01 33 Cotton Modal cO MO cOo MO 1999 04 20 11 01 33 amp e en Polyester textured PES TEX PES 1999 04 20 11 01 33 Fiber Group 017642 PES CO 70 30 PES CO CO_PES 1999 04 20 11 01 33 Polyester Micro PES MIC PES 1999 04 08 18 45 42 PES Blanc Dyeing PES Norm PES 1999 04 08 08 38 16 Cotton knitted blanc n mere CO KNIT co 1999 04 08 08 35 29 Cotton blea blanc dyeing Rem coi co 1999 04 08 08 35 16 Cotton blea blanc
43. Su2 lambda 450 500 550 600 650 The smaller the standard deviation of the scattering the better the correlated data Table The columns dE2 and dE Model2 are normally empty They are only filled in if the calibration series colorant set of the new substrate exists for the same colo rants as the ones to be correlated In this case you will be given information about the quality of the correlation Refer to Alternate Substrate Information Dia log Box on page 7 84 The dE1 is the mean CIELab color difference of the colorants in the source colo rant set The dE2 is the mean CIELab color difference of the colorants in the colorant set for the alternative substrate does not exist normally The dE Model2 represents the mean CIELab color difference and standard devi ation for the correlated data Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Completing An Imported Textile Printing Colorant Set Datacolor The extender used by Datamatch printing colorant sets is not transferred during data base conversion These colorant sets can be completed in Datacolor MATCHT le with the colorant set program if the extender should be used in recipe calculation The extender is a normal product with price etc It is printed in the laboratory recipe printout in the matching program Colorant calibration ColorantSet Values Type Continue Dye Class Acid dE Sigma 0 00 0 0 Unit gkg Creation Da
44. User add i Cl Scale back by 0 Min Add dH In this example it is recommended to use the Match Batch button because the batch was already dark and the color difference too large The correction tells you to dilute the tikk dye batch Standard RemBrillant Blue BE 133 Gran 1 0 Batch Rem Biillant Blue BB 133 Gran 2 0 Fibre Add new dyestuff s User selected X Best add Best positive add Reset Amount Effect Rel Remazol Briliant Blue BB gran 133 20 000 0 000 g 1 00 0 00 Diluent 10 000 10 017 Batch to drop 0 000 Liquor 10 New liquor 20 0167 Pickup 60 CMC Use as proposal Iuminant delE MI Hew dele sm delL ML deicmc delH MH Show 3 35 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 07 000 000 0 00 0 00 Print 0 79 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ASCII Export Evaluate Computer add User add S cale back by fj ee Min Add dH zi Close Datacolor February 2005 5 97 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Production Correction Access from Datacolor PROCESS Note Z If the production correction is accessed from Datacolor PROCESS the additions already done using Datacolor PROCESS can be taken into account for the batch The user can define what percentage of the previous adds should be taken Result if the previous adds are not taken in account Da ee IPEE TI EC Terasil Yellow 4G 65 781 Terasil Brill Blue BGE 200 i l 32 276 Terasil Violet BL 58
45. WeightUnit mi T Length m 7 LengthUnit O m T Affinity _ID On 3 3 6 Colorimetric2 710 BuledCallDit c J BulkedRemark Double click to select or deselect Field Properties Field not selected double click to select it a ae O Folder without selected fields Click the folder to open or to close it Folder with selected fields signed by red dots Click the folder to open or close it Non selectedfield with opened properties Double click the icon to select the field Click the icon to close the field properties Selected field with closed properties Double click the icon to deselect the field Click the icon to open the field properties 3 Select the fields to be written to the The corresponding field properties are ASCII file displayed The number of decimal digits can be altered for all fields of type double 4 Click Next The Options dialog box appears Datacolor February 2005 4 21 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration 4 22 A or File Field Delimiter Field Description Line le Aripa Record Delimiter Field Description Prefix C Overwrite String Delimiter I File name JASCIIfile El lt Back Cancel Help Field Delimiter If necessary change the field delimiter Record Delimiter If necessary change the record delimiter String Delimiter If necessary change the string delimiter Fiel
46. batch and Dif Formula On the left a graphical view of the differences is displayed If the differences are out of tolerance the message Batch refused appears and the traffic light is red Selection of dyes Refer to Preliminary Work on page 5 69 section Selecting dyestuffs for matching on page 5 71 7 180 Lab Graphic Tab Refer to Lab Graphic Tab on page 7 178 Settings Tab Refer to Settings Tab on page 7 120 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor BLEND Option Datacolor 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes BLEND Correction Recipe Dialog Box 352853 ag 061 ______ 12381 sels foo Tatal baichsze 500 vio Newbalchaire Delad Defau D65 _ Standard Batch px ca maaawa Measured fiber blending Measured sample produced according to the recipe to be corrected SmartMatch in Production Used to save a production SmartMatch point Total Batch First Dyeing Fibre tab Recipe table 1St column Dyestuff Recipe Amount Effect Rel Total Batch Size Check the box if the batch is measured with all fibres Check the box if it is the first correction of the recipe and a SmartMatch point should be saved This function is only enabled if checked Color display Names of the fibers Values of the original recipe Absolute amount of dye lot Values of the correction Effect factor for the recipe calculation performance
47. dye lot ID the dye lot name and 145 select the recipe 2 In the Machine Selection tab Refer to the Datacolor PROCESS help select the machine and type the Press F1 absolute amounts Liquor ratio or pickup are not con trolled by this program 3 Click Generate to calculate the dye lot Datacolor TICKET Administration In the Datacolor MATCHT tle Overview window click Administration to specify and maintain the other data of Datacolor PROCESS such as products qualities combined process etc Refer to the Datacolor PROCESS help Press F1 TTMProcess v2 2 2 2 1 19 31 122002 O Recipe Management i B Color type H B Quality H B CombProcess 5 6 Product and Dyes Management Product H B Dyestuft Delivery B Product supplier E Unit Licenced to G ROSENBERGER till 2002 Datacolor February 2005 5 117 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Datacolor SORT Option 5 118 Introduction Traditional 555 shade sorting is a system for sorting samples into a 3 dimensional array of blocks centered around the standard in order to subdivide the acceptable matches to the standard into smaller groups Each group is described using a three digit code Each digit varies from 1 9 and represents the distance to the standard for each color difference dimension The center block containing the standard is assigned a sort code of 555 Each member of a group is close enough to ot
48. option will use SmartMatch when SmartMatch is turned on and if relevant populations are available The number of SmartMatch points used in a recipe calculation are shown at the bottom of the dye concentration column in the recipe table Note You can still store SmartMatch points for later use if the SmartMatch facility is switched off February 2005 5 85 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Automatic SmartMatch Maintenance A regular housekeeping of the database is necessary to optimize the SmartMatch func tion SmartMatch points with a color difference that is too large must be removed This is possible using the Automatic SmartMatch Housekeeping function If you want to remove bad SmartMatch points manually refer to Reviewing SmartMatch Points on page 5 87 Action Result Notes 1 Select SmartMatch List on the The SmartMatch List window appears Basic Data or the context sensitive menu 2 On the Tools menu select Auto The tool removes all SmartMatch points matic SmartMatch Housekeeping with a an excessive color difference gt DE CieLAb 160 and groups similar SmartMatch points The Automatic Housekeeping box informs you about the current statement of the program run Automatic housekeeping Total initial size 22416 Progress Release groups Lear Abort Close Current population Dyestuff list 118 AST YELL 7GLL 100 H20 136 AST R
49. type lt drive ID gt setup lt drive ID gt is the identification of the CD ROM drive e g D in the Open field of the Run dia log box and click OK 2 Follow the advice of the installation program Note Z After installation the software runs in the demonstration mode and must be validated Refer to New Installations on page 3 4 3 2 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Updating Datacolor MATCHTextile 3 Installation Updating Datacolor MATCH te For the installation of an upgrade refer to the installation description of the update and to Installing Datacolor MATCH on page 3 2 Datacolor zi Caution Note The database is upgraded by the update program But it is strictly recom mended to back up the database before updating Otherwise for some ver sions of the program the database could be deleted and lost If an old DCIMatch SmartSort CentersideQC or Fibramix program is updated to one of the new Spectrum Textile software products the old software is removed during the installation of the new Spectrum Textile products like Datacolor MATCH Datacolor SORT If the software security key is not accepted after updating the software runs in the demonstration mode and must be validated Refer to Existing Installation on page 3 5 February 2005 3 3 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide 3 Installation Datacolor Security System A new Software Hardware securi
50. 09 13 04 06 INTSL BL 2001 IP 11621 01 G S 2966 1 F S 3609 64 8 21144 2 02441 1 34421 2001 10 02 10 26 22 INTSL BL 2001 LR 04259 07A G S 1543 20 F S 5083 16 8 32271 314930 1 38474 2001 06 06 12 12 01 INTSL BL 878716 B097 00 00 10 0647 2 50319 1 79492 2001 10 12 08 52 31 INTSL BL 2001 LR 03584 014 G S 1735 1 F S 173564 10 1112 2 52150 1 75831 2001 05 01 14 46 00 INTSL BL 2001 LR 05646 01A G S 2839 5 F S 4328 64 10 2818 1 85274 1 97557 2001 08 20 13 32 54 INTSL BL 054975 030R 00 00 10 9133 2 40511 1 75062 2001 06 26 13 26 48 INTSL BL 368316 966N 00 00 11 6803 1 68912 2 39008 2001 03 22 16 52 11 INTSL BL 2001 LR 04628 05A G S 1638 55 F S 0552 16 12 1297 3 18236 3 37655 2001 06 21 14 04 04 INTSL BL 097716 0459 00 00 13 5242 2 51857 2 59564 2001 09 04 14 17 22 INTSL BL 097716 145V 00 00 13 7869 2 62584 2 73612 2001 09 04 14 06 31 INTSL BL lt II For Help pressF1 D 0 o D o o D 0 0 D o o 0 0 0 0 0 o o o D D 0 0 0 o 0 o 0 0 0 Select the basic recipe and in the context sensitive menu Correct and Save Calculates a new recipe based on the selected recipe and saves it for the new standard or Save as new recipe Saves the selected recipe for the new standard 7 110 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Unit Dialog Box Unit Dialog Box Datacolor 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Name a ______________________ z 4 ID AuslD ProductUnit Iv
51. 5 36 for new stock solution tables Stock solutions can be specified for dyestuffs and auxiliaries for exhaust and continuous processes Stock solutions are only selectable if the Stock Solution is checked in the Options dialog box Action Result Notes Open the Product Property sheet Specify the parameters of a new dyestuff in the Dyestuff tab or the parameters for a new auxiliary in the Auxiliary tab The other tabs are used to specify new subordinate objects Click Insert Refer to Product Property Sheet on page 7 31 for information about the parameters Refer to Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 and Specifying Modifying and Deleting Objects on page 5 8 The new product is created Note F Fields marked with a red are mandatory Modifying and Deleting A Product Action Result Notes Open the Product Property sheet Modifying Select the product alter the data and click Save Deleting Select the product click Delete and confirm the deletion Refer to Product Property Sheet on page 7 31 for information about the parameters Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide F F 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying A Stock Solution Note The stock solution defines dilutions used to optimize pipetting in the laboratory Stock solutions can be specified for dyestuffs and auxiliaries for
52. 7 Process 58 and Quick Search Dialog Box on page 7 59 It is used to search com bined processes or open the Com bined Process dialog box for specifying a new combined process Refer to Data Handling on page 5 2 or Double click the corresponding table row to select a combined process for modifying or deletion The Combined Process window appears Refer to Combined Process Window on page 7 61 for information about the parameters New combined process 3 Note In the Combined Processes The Combined Process dialog box browse box click New for specifying appears The selected data is dis a new combined process played In the Combined Process window click the button In the New Combined Process selection box select the process type The calibration dye process es of the colorant set s set up the link s between combined process and colorant set s For a multiple fiber quality style you must select the dye processes representing the colorant sets used for matching The order of selection specifies the position of the color recipes in the combined process Refer to the Example of a new combined process on page 5 63 In the Dye Process selection box The treatment is generated select the dye process es Specify or modify data of the Treatment Recipe and Prod ucts tabs Click OK The Combined Process dialog box is closed and the data
53. 7 42 9 10 Datacolor MATCH tle Version 1 0 Datacolor 9 Index Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide illuminant list 7 85 recipe table Datacolor BLEND 7 179 import dialog box 7 134 recipe table 7 121 insert a theoretical sample dialog box 7 123 recipe window Datacolor TICKET 7 147 job result window Datacolor SORT 7 154 root recipe dialog box Datacolor TICKET 7 laboratory correction dialog box 7 96 149 laboratory correction table 7 98 sample input 7 72 manual input tolerance values dialog box 7 56 sample list 7 85 match dialog box 7 116 sample property dialog box Datacolor SORT measurement main window 7 15 7 169 new dye lot dialog box Datacolor TICKET 7 search and correct dialog box 7 109 152 search results dialog box 7 110 operation 7 67 select current illuminants dialog box Datacolor operation list 7 93 MONITOR 7 144 operations browse 7 65 SmartMatch list 7 94 options dialog box 7 112 sort job definition options dialog box Datacolor overview 7 2 SORT 7 171 Pager 7 137 sort job maintenance dialog box Datacolor parameter definition 7 57 SORT 7 160 parameter list 7 86 sort list Datacolor SORT 7 154 population dialog box 7 127 sort script maintenance dialog box Datacolor product list 7 90 SORT 7 167 product property sheet 7 31 substrate delivery dialog 7 27 production correction dialog box 7 101 substrate delivery effect dialog 7 28 production correction table 7 103 substrate delivery list 7 87 quality list 7 87 suppl
54. 86 Parameter Definition Dialog Box on page 7 57 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Product on page 5 34 Opens the Color Type List window Refer to Color Type List Window on page 7 85 Opens the Recipe application used for matching correc tion and printing recipes and displays the Recipe List win dow Refer to Matching on page 5 74 Correction on page 5 91 Displaying and Printing Existing Recipes on page 5 104 and Recipe List Window on page 7 91 Opens the Colorant Set application used for colorant set preparation and displays the Colorant Set List window Refer to Specifying Colorant Sets on page 5 47 and Colo rant Set List Window on page 7 76 Opens the Dyestuff List window Refer to Dyestuff List Win dow on page 7 89 Opens the Sample List window Refer to Sample List Win dow on page 7 85 February 2005 7 3 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Modules Options Fiber Blending Color Fiber Monitoring Sorting Production Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Refer to Datacolor BLEND Option on page 5 134 Refer to Datacolor BLEND Option on page 5 134 Refer to Datacolor MONITOR Option on page 5 106 Refer to Datacolor SORT Option on page 5 118 Buttons used for Datacolor TICKET Refer to Datacolor TICKET Option on page 5 115 Dye Lot Production Recipe Administration Status bar Display of messages General Menu Functions File Dataco
55. AuslD Bezema Exhaust Isotherme Method V LabOperation JV Prod operation Note User DCI created 14 04 1999 modified 31 03 2000 by DCI ID Unique identification of the operation AuxID Additional identification of the operation Name Unique name of the operation Lab operation If the box is checked the operation is used in the laboratory Prod Operation If the box is checked the operation is used for production Note Field for additional notes Note A context sensitive menu for each input field is used for changing data Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Operation Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Table Columns of the Control Line Tab E Operation Bezema Exhaust Isotherme Method REA BZ XH E zixi File Edit Volume lt Formula gt Dyeing Temperature ED C Al Manca Meropan 1 5 g l Biavin 109 0 3 g l AAS Sak ithe F pwr Common Salt lt Formula gt g l Waiting Time 10 min Reactive lt Formula gt Name Value Unit Waiting Time 10 min Soda 5 g l Waiting Time 10 min NaOH Caustic 38 Be lt Formula gt ml i Dyeing Time 55 min Acetic Acid 1 mil i Identification of the object Name of the object Numeric value The button opens the Formula Edit window Refer to Specifying Formulae on page 5 66 Unit belonging to the numeric value Note Z A context sensitive menu is used for specifying new control lines Refer to Specifying Modifying
56. Browse Window on page 7 58 and Specify ing Combined Processes on page 5 61 Operation Opens the Operations browse window Refer to Operations Browse Window on page 7 65 and Specifying Modifying Deleting An Operation on page 5 64 Sample Opens the Color Sample Calculator dialog box Refer to Sample Input Dialog Box on page 7 72 Browse Data Opens a submenu with the following functions Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 and Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 for information about the use of the list windows Illuminant List Opens the IIluminant List window Refer to Illuminant List Window on page 7 85 Sample List Opens the Sample List window Refer to Sample List Win dow on page 7 85 and Manual Input and Modification of Samples on page 5 24 Color Type List Opens the Color Type List window Refer to Color Type List Window on page 7 85 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Color Type on page 5 43 Tolerance List Opens the Tolerance List window Refer to Tolerance List Window on page 7 86 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 7 10 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Functions of the Basic Data Menu Datacolor Parameter List Fiber List Fiber Group List Substrate Delivery List Quality Style List Affinity List Dye Process List Dyestuff Class List Dyestuff List Auxiliary List Color Fiber List Supplier List Cu
57. Calculation Matching 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Datacolor Search recipes with filter E x Change product Bezaktiv Yellow S 3R 150 to Bezaktiv Yellow S 8G with factor 1 00 fea System Recipe Recipe range Ez ae Approved recipe r Recipe type lc No C Yes All C Exhaust Continuous All FA All Data Color Type EE re All Data Affinity A o de fea Datamatch rs Quaity Style c Combined Process Continue Cancel 5 Select the search conditions for Refer to Possible restrictive search recipes that have to be modified conditions 6 Click Continue The dyestuff is replaced in the selected recipes Note A log file is created with a list of all recipes where the product exchange was not possible The file is located in the Datacolor MATCH tle folder The file name is ErrorsChangeProducts log Possible restrictive search conditions Recipe Range Select all recipes that have to be modified in the browse box Approved Recipe Select the requested group Recipe Type Select the requested type Color Type In the browse box select the color type Affinity Select the affinity in the browse box Quality Style Select the quality style in the browse box Combined Process Select the combined process February 2005 5 83 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Printing Recipe Lists A print form with the most reas
58. Configuring and Enabling the Maestro Correlation Feature Z Notes P Master Instrument You must identify the master instrument This is the instru ment used to generate the master measurements for the reference tile set When you select Install in the Maestro correlation feature the information about the reference instrument will become available here If the instrument correlation is enabled all measurement data displayed and stored will be adjusted data P Instrument correlation can be enabled disabled using any Datacolor program The Measurement Main Window is accessed using either an Instrument menu or an instrument icon of the Datacolor program you are running 5 16 Datacolor MATCH tle Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics 5 Using Datacolor MATCH tile Measurement Main Window Measurement conditions ile Specular INCL ss Aperture LAY 3 Flashes 2 dai uv 100 0 6 Cut off NONE E Single amp Multiple BI Until Tol I Calibrate Instruments Setup 4 General Options Ja uy 4 gt Options i Single Measurement Correlation setup Multiple Measurement Q Until Tolerance E Instrument Calibration Master instrument ELLIE Mg Correlation Batac SSS R Green Tile Test Manufacturer Model SF500 228 d 8 Serial number Geometry Firmware version Soe Specular SCI amp SCE Aperture LAV UV UVINC Dieta hes C Program Files Datacolor Correlation Files
59. Customizing on page 4 6 Name Unique name of the tolerance definition Tolerance Id Unique identification of the tolerance definition Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Parameter List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Parameter Name Unique name of the parameter Parameter Id Unique identification of the parameter Param Unit Related Unit Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Fiber List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Fiber Name Unique name of the fiber Fiber Id Unique identification of the fiber Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 7 86 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Fiber Group List Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Fiber Group List Window Table co
60. D65 423 am 439 Color Inconstancy3 0 9363 0 9856 0 8794 Dispersal Scarlet C2R Recipe with D65 Standard with DBS Standard with A Recipe with A 0 0825 0 0817 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Recipe Information 1 1021 0 9244 0 8223 0 7542 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Information about dyestuff concentrations used the recipes Color Display for Datacolor Recipe Calculation Matching 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The following help functions for review are implemented Table menu and context sensitive menu Evaluate Print ASCII Prints colorimetric details using a predefined form Theoretical reflectance Opens the Insert a Theoretical Sample dialog box used for saving theoretical reflectance values E g for Datacolor Envision Datacolor TOOLS can send this data to a user with a Datacolor Envision system to check the color for example Refer to Specifying The oretical Reflectance Values on page 5 96 View Configuration Opens the View Configurations dialog box used to define the display of the calculated values and the number of decimal places for colorimetric and concen tration data Reset Sort Order Resets the sort order of the recipes Add Trial Up to five recipes can be marked After closing the table the selected recipes are saved for further use Remove Last Trial Removes the last trial mark Hide recipes not selected
61. Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration Import and Export F Datacolor MATCHT tile supports the import export of samples and colorant sets with different file formats Sample Import Export with Datamatch format EXP EXQ files Sample Import Export with Datacolor Envision or Datacolor Tools QTX files Sample Import Export with Datacolor MATCH te XML files Colorant Set Import Export with Datacolor MATCHTEXtile XML files The XML files may become very big a file with 120 samples is about 370KB You can compress them drastically 24 KB using WinZip Note Internet Explorer Version 5 01 Sp2 or higher must be installed to run the Import Export of XML files Exporting Data Export function for color samples Action Result 1 On the Tools menu select Export The Export dialog box appears Refer to Export Dialog Box on page 7 135 2 Select the data type and the format Attention Datamatch Datacolor Tools or Datacolor Envision cannot import XML files 3 Specify path and file name of the export file or use the browse func tion and click Export Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Importing Data Importing Data Datacolor F 4 Configuration and Administration Action Result On the Tools menu select Import The Import dialog box appears 2 Specify path and file name of the Refer
62. Dialog Box on page 7 27 Substrate Delivery Example on page 5 30 and Overwriting Measurements of Substrate Deliveries on page 5 32 Possible Used Colorant Dye Set Tolerance Dyed Substrate Multi Color Matching In the Possible Colorant Set s table the selection of possi ble colorant sets is displayed A mouse double click moves it to the Used Colorant Set table You can modify the percent age of the fibers the process factor and the substrate effect If a tolerance formula is used it is displayed above the Stan dard selection only if a tolerance is assigned to the color type Used to calculate a re dye A dye substrate can be selected or re measured If checked different recipes using different dye processes are calculated simultaneously Used to calculate recipes with different standards for each fiber of a blended quality style February 2005 7 117 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Colorant Set Tab Standard Process Data for matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Calculate Dyeset Disperse Terasil Part 100 _Caleulate Group Eee Dee E save Selection Concentration Parameters Colorant Set Protected Currently selected colorant set Part Used for multiple color matching The buttons are used to switch between the colorant sets Group Selection or definition of dyestuff groups or fiber product groups for Datacolor BLEND The Sa
63. Dispersol Yellow C5G E Initial size 2 m Operation on population Deleted by dE 0 Grouped 0 Points with comment 2 m Show population After analyse 3D in Conc M Max points displayed 2 Affinity Quality Style Substrate Process Machine Colorant Set These specifications are used to select all SmartMatch points of the same dyestuff combination You can search for other SmartMatch points by altering the values and clicking Evaluate Colorimetric Evaluate Cancel Location Products Colorimetric values of the selected SmartMatch point batch Size dE represents the space used for SmartMatch points to be evaluated Evaluates SmartMatch points for a selected set combination Closes the dialog box without saving Data that not has been saved will be lost Selection of the type of the SmartMatch point List of used dyestuffs Datacolor February 2005 7 125 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 126 Sro 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Operation on Population The program checks the SmartMatch points and indicates Caution how many points will be forced to be deleted or merged because they are similar to each other Grouped Number of points grouped automatically by the program Points with Comments Number of points with comments to the detail screen Points with comments should be checked Quick After Analyses 3D in Conc Max Points
64. Export Print Form ASCII forms Backup Calibrate Monitor Refer to Automatic SmartMatch Maintenance on page 5 86 Opens the Options dialog box Refer to Options on page 4 11 Opens the Import dialog box for sample import Refer to Import and Export on page 4 12 Opens the Export dialog box for sample export Refer to Exporting Data on page 4 12 Imports print forms without using the Page View Designer Refer to Importing Print Forms on page 4 29 Exports print forms without using the Page View Designer Refer to Exporting Print Forms on page 4 29 New Opens the ASCII Output Definition dialog box Change Opens the ASCII Output Definition dialog box Delete Opens the Delete ASCII Form dialog box Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Opens the Backup dialog box Refer to Backing Up Using Sybase Utilities on page 4 17 Function for calibrating monitors using Datacolor SPYDER2 Refer to Calibrating the Monitors Using Datacolor SPYDER2 on page 4 24 February 2005 7 5 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide F Instrument Calibrate Instrument Instrument Setup Measurement Setup Diagnostic Instrument UV Calibration Ganz Griesser Calibration 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Opens the Calibration Conditions dialog box Refer to Cali brate Tab on page 7 18 and Calibration and Measurement on page 5 10 Opens the Instrument Setup tab of the Measurement Main
65. Folder Dialog Box on page 7 14 February 2005 7 9 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Functions of the Basic Data Menu Product Opens the Product Property Sheet Refer to Product Prop erty Sheet on page 7 31 and Specifying Modifying or Delet ing a Product on page 5 34 Quality Style Opens the Quality Style Property Sheet Refer to Quality Style Property Sheet on page 7 22 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Quality Style on page 5 26 Dye Process Opens the Dye Process Property Sheet Refer to Dye Pro cess Property Sheet on page 7 29 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Dye Process on page 5 37 Customer Opens the Customer Property Sheet Refer to Customer Property Sheet on page 7 43 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting Customers on page 5 39 Color Type Opens the Color Type Property Sheet Refer to Color Type Property Sheet on page 7 45 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Color Type on page 5 43 Parameter Definition Opens the Parameter Definition dialog box Refer to Parameter Definition Dialog Box on page 7 57 and Specify ing Modifying or Deleting Parameters on page 5 40 Tolerance Opens the Tolerance Block Program dialog box Refer to Tolerance Block Program Dialog Box on page 7 46 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 Combined Process Opens the Combined Processes window Refer to Com bined Processes
66. Guide 4 Configuration and Administration Importing and Exporting Samples as QTX Files F ot x C Samples Datamatch EXP Samples Datacolor Envision Colorite OT C Samples Datacolor Match DCIMatch ML C Dyesets Datacolor Match DCIMatch XML Selected Standard pe All Data 5 EI J i 200204 88310104 002 Selected Batches pe All Data a a i 200204 88310104 003 Filename EnvisionS ample TX B ae OK Cancel Help Datacolor MATCHTe ile can export import samples to from QTX files A file always con tains a standard and its batch es It is not possible to select more than one standard In this case you must specify multiple export files Note If you select only batches the dialog box closes when you click OK No samples are then exported Backing Up Using Datacolor MATCH exe The backup function saves the database to the selected target drive and folder Action Result 1 On the Tools menu select The Backup dialog box appears Backup 2 Specify target drive and path or use The contents of the database are the browse button and click OK saved Caution Before the backup is made all databases are validated This may take up to sev eral minutes depending on the size of the databases If there is a problem with one of the databases a message is displayed and the backup is not made An old backup must be restored in this case Datacolor MATCH tile
67. Matching on page 5 67 Cor rection on page 5 91 Displaying and Printing Existing Reci pes on page 5 104 and Recipe List Window on page 7 91 Opens the Overview window main screen Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Explorer Datacolor Save Close Close All Print Print Setup Send Mail Scan Mail Exit Tools Toolbar Status Bar User Manager User s Browser Definition Define Units 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Saves the current data Closes the currently active window If data is altered the pro gram requests the data be saved Closes all opened windows except the Overview window Prints data of the currently opened Colorant Set List or Recipe window using the default Windows printer Is used for setting up the default Windows printer Is used to send e mails Refer to Sending E mails on page 4 25 Is used to receive and select e mails Closes the program Switches the toolbar on check mark and off Switches the status bar on check mark and off Change Password Refer to Changing the Password on page 4 2 User Administration Refer to Specifying Modifying and Deleting User s Data on page 4 2 Opens the Browse Columns for Explorer dialog box Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Opens the Unit dialog box Refer to Defining Units on page 4 11 Automatic SmartMatch Housekeeping Options Import Export Import Print Form
68. ORANGE K CF 0 05719 0 04880 SIRIUS ROUGE F4BL 154 0 08082 0 05963 SOLOPHEN MARINE BLE 250 0 86884 0 68023 Type of dE PassFail PassFail dE 1 46 0 80 Cor 1 Cor 2 Cor 3 e Cor 4 e Cor 5 3 19 2001 4 30 3 19 2001 4 30 17 3 19 2001 4 30 52 P 0 05246 0 05122 0 62866 PassFail 1 53 3 19 2001 4 31 23 0 05397 0 04644 0 52311 PassFail 2 19 Correction nr 4 3 19 2001 4 33 03 PM 0 05711 0 06648 0 86472 PassFail 1 09 gt 1 2 1 0 O06 0 4 08 1 0 For Help press F1 5 152 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 08 da dl DCI Datacolor 6 Maintenance and Error Handling Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 6 Maintenance and Error Handling Maintenance of the Spectrophotometer Refer to the manual of your spectrophotometer Maintenance of the Database Note Z The delete move copy and rename functions are only available to users having the corresponding access rights Deleting Data You can delete data objects in the corresponding windows and boxes Note Z An object cannot be deleted if it is linked to other objects If the system cannot delete an object all valid links are listed in the Delete Check info box Backup Refer to Backing Up Using Sybase Utilities on page 4 17 Error Handling Note the error message and what you were doing before the error occurred 2 Try to execute the advice of the error message Examp
69. Open Opens the Operation window with the data of the selected operation February 2005 7 65 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 66 Delete Quick Search Duplicate Close Table columns Operation_ID Operation_AuxID Operation_Name Lab Prod Context sensitive menu Refresh Grid Select All Unselect All Locate Filter Show Hide Columns Set Font 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Deletes the selected operation after confirmation Opens the Quick Search dialog box used to search opera tions Quick Search Dialog Box on page 7 59 Duplicates the currently selected operation Refer to Specify ing Modifying Deleting An Operation on page 5 64 Closes the Operation window Unique identification of the operation Additional identification of the operation Unique name of the operation If checked the operation is used in the laboratory If checked the operation is used in production Refreshes the grid Selects all operations of the list Removes the selections Opens the Locate dialog box It is used to search data records containing the entered string in the Field Value field Opens the Filter dialog box used for defining search filters Refer to Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 Opens the Selected Fields dialog box Using the move but tons you can move the field columns to be displayed to the Selected Fields and remove the field columns that are
70. PassFail PassFail de 1 46 0 80 1 53 2 19 1 09 _Cor i Cor 2 Cor 3 e Cor 4 e Cor AZ 10 TE 06 08 TO T2 TA TE For Help press F1 oct February 2005 5 105 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Datacolor MONITOR Option 5 106 Datacolor MONITOR is a color quality control software product that was designed to easily acquire color measurement data and pass fail decisions for production quality control The program is designed to compare side center side for fabrics The major task was to design a software module that is easy to operate Datacolor MONITOR is an option for Datacolor MATCHIEXtile Specifying A Script If you are starting the program for the 15t time you must define a script to be able to measure a batch series A script describes the measurements the tolerances and the relations for the comparison 1 On the Batch Series menu select New Script Batch Serie Script Name E x Name Script fur M amp S Description Side Center Side fur M amp S coe re 2 Specify a name a description not mandatory and click Next to continue Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor MONITOR Option 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Datacolor z Use reference Iv Tag Left One line only E Tag2 LeftCenter Tag3 RightCenter Tag4 Right Measurements per line 4 Measurements per piece 2 Tolerance
71. Refer to Manual Input of SmartMatch Points on page 5 90 5 100 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Manual Graphical Correction The manual graphical correction recalculates the recipe in the basis of the altered dye stuff concentrations You can start the manual graphical modification of recipes from the recipe table the laboratory correction table the production correction table from the Recipe Editor dialog box The tolerance sphere the standard and the position of the current recipe are displayed To visualize the modification in the tolerance sphere the a b path trajectory of each dyestuff of the recipe is also drawn in the graph The concentration displayed at the end of the dyestuff lines represents the position of the color you would get in the tolerance sphere if you took this concentration for the modified recipe The third concentration is the lowest concentration that results in a recipe at the tolerance limit Manual Recipe of fiber of fiber ee 2 5 xj fea frer new Reps venea A l d 4 Reactive Yellow S 3R 150 0 8191 0 8191 0 00 B Reactive Red S 38 150 0 1064 0 1064 E f Reset C Reactive Black S GR 0 4459 0 4459 A 0 Save 0 0654 Cancel Position of the standard grey O Position of the recipe black Dyestuff line The length of the line shows all positions of the recipe between the concentra tions of 0 7616 and 0 8636
72. Reset Change Color Change Printer Color With Origin Grid Fonts Points Log View More Visible Curves Clicking on a curve Select Hide Resets the Zoom and With Origin settings Refer to Customizing Graphs on page 4 30 Refer to Customizing Graphs on page 4 30 If checked the current graph is displayed with the coordinate zero point If checked a grid is displayed Opens the Font dialog box used to define the font for the graph Useful for R and K S vs Wavelength graph If checked the measurement points are displayed The graph is based on logarithmic values Refer to Customizing Graphs on page 4 30 List of all curves The curves may be selected or the selection can be canceled using a mouse click Selects a curve The measurement points are displayed with a greater diameter Hides the selected curve Do not use this point Use this point not used for colorant set program Restore all points The selected point is either used or not used for calibration The point is displayed in a red color if it is not used Resets all points Only used for Reflectance of Calibration Samples and Absorptions of Calibration Samples graphs Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor BLEND Option Fiber Table RGB Product Created Modified dE Product Type Min Conc Max Conc Strength New button 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Color display Un
73. Smart Match points 6 In the dyestuff table specify the con centrations and click Save The Fast Correction Recipe Input dia log box appears Refer to Fast Correc tion Recipe Input Dialog Box on page 7 105 for a detailed description of the parameters In the Colorant Set tab the fields and buttons used for manual input will be activated Only the SmartMatch point will be inserted Manual Input of SmartMatch Points together with the Recipe Action Result Notes 1 to 5 Do not check the SM Insert box Specify the Machine and the Pick up L Ratio for production Smart Match points 6 In the dyestuff table specify the con centrations and click Save Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 The SmartMatch point and the recipe are inserted Datacolor Correction 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Correction Introduction Laboratory correction Production correction Print Dispense use in production m Approval for Print Display Save Selection of correction type Laboratory The existing recipe is altered and saved again e Production An additional recipe is calculated that is used to change color of the dyed batch to the correct color Data input Recipe to be corrected Batch color of the dyed substrate to be corrected Dyestuffs are pre selected by the recipe to be corrected Additional dyestuffs can be selected Concent
74. Specifying A New Color Type Action Result Notes 1 Open the Color Type Property Sheet 2 Specify the name and the additional parameters Measure the sample If the measurement is finished click Insert Refer to Color Type Property Sheet on page 7 45 for information about the parameters Refer to Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 and Specifying Modifying and Deleting Objects on page 5 8 Refer to Measurement on page 5 20 The data of the new color type is creat ed Note Z Fields marked with a red are mandatory Modifying and Deleting A Color Type Z Note Datacolor MATCH te synchronizes color type and sample name If you rename a color type the sample name is also modified The same happens to the color type name if you change a sample name Action Result Notes 1 Open the Color Type Property sheet 2 Modifying Select the color type alter the data and click Save Deleting Select the color type click Delete and confirm the deletion Refer to Color Type Property Sheet on page 7 45 for information about the parameters Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances Specifying A New Tolerance Action Result Notes 1 Open the Tolerance Block Program Refer to Tolerance Block Program Dia dialog box log Box on page 7 46 for information about the paramet
75. Store End For Help press F1 Ta Color codes of the fields Green Blue Pale yellow Red Buttons Show and Print Calculate Single All Store End Values that can be modified Select the field and press the space bar Values calculated while opening the window Values that cannot be modified Mandatory fields Prints the complete set of data The print out is based on a print form The selected colorant is recalculated All colorants of the colorant set are recalculated Saves the colorant set Closes the window If data has been changed a dialog box with a save request appears February 2005 7 173 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 174 Header Information Name ID Industrie Type Type Process Method Calibration Param 1 Param 2 Creation Date Modification Date dE Sigma Unit Graphical Display 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Unique name of the fiber set Unique identification of the fiber set Type of the dyeing process Value Fiber Blending Dye process name Rohner Function or Approximation Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Date of creation Date of last modification Delta E color difference sample theory and standard deviation dependent to the calibration method Unit used for the concentration Graphical view of the calibration results Values and units of the axis are displayed according to the selected analysis Context sensitive menus
76. The concentration 0 7808 is the minimum concentration matching the tolerance limit Datacolor February 2005 5 101 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 102 Navigation in the graph 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Action Description Click and hold down the right mouse button Click and hold down the left mouse button Press F2 Press F3 Press F4 Double click the graph using the right mouse button Moving the mouse forward zooms in moving the mouse backward zooms out Moving the mouse left right up or down rotates the graphic in the corresponding directions The rotation center is the batch Switches to a two dimensional graph a b Switches to a two dimensional graph L b Switches to a two dimensional graph L a The graph view switches between parallel and perspective projection Modification You can change the concentration either by typing or using the buttons in the col umn New Recipe or the column Amount to modify the recipe If you click Set in the columns Proposition the recipe is set to the minimum amount of dyestuff to match the tolerance limit You can see the result of the modification in the graph The recipe moves to the tolerance limit when you click Set Datacolor MATCHTEtile Version 1 0 Datacolor Correction 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Search and Correct An Existing Recipe for A New Standard Datacolor Ex
77. The recipe table only shows the selected recipes e Show all recipes Shows all recipes e Mail Table Opens the mail form with an attached screen shot of the recipe table JPEG format e Modify Refer to Manual Recipe Modification Recipe Table on page 5 87 Round Refer to Round the Dyestuff Concentration Recipe Table on page 5 81 e Manually Change Refer to Manual Graphical Correction on page 5 107 Pressing the Ctrl key and clicking in the recipe number field selects the recipes Clicking in a parameter name first column in the table with the calculated values sorts the recipe table according to the values of the corresponding row Alteration of weighting only possible for metamerism lf you have altered the weighting you have to close the window and match again Datacolor February 2005 5 77 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Color inconstancy iew configuration E x Visible data Vv dL Decimal places colorimetric 2 IV da Iv db Decimal places concentration oa M dc IV dH IV Price IV Sensitivity IV Total concentration IV dE Average IV dE2 IV CMCCONO2 2 IV dE3 IV CMCCONOZ 3 IV dE4 IV CMCCONO2 4 IV 2 illuminants banks Cancel Color inconstancy is the change in color of a single sample under different light sources The magnitude of color inconstancy can be defined by DE CMC or any other color dif ference formula of the sample bet
78. Window Refer to Instruments Setup Tab on page 7 19 and Calibration and Measurement on page 5 10 Opens the General Options tab of the Measurement Main Window Refer to Instruments Setup Tab on page 7 19 and Calibration and Measurement on page 5 10 Only if the green tile test is installed Opens the Prepare for Diagnostic dialog box Refer to UV Calibration Tab on page 7 21 and Green Tile Test on page 5 18 Only for instruments with whiteness option Opens the Measurement Main Window Refer to UV Calibration Tab on page 7 21 and UV Calibration on page 5 11 Only for instruments with whiteness option Opens the Measurement Main Window Refer to UV Calibration Tab on page 7 21 and UV Calibration on page 5 11 Ganz Griesser Parameters Window New Window Cascade Tile Help Help Topics About ColorLab Note Only for instruments with whiteness option Opens the Measurement Main Window Refer to UV Calibration on page 5 11 Creates a copy of the currently selected window Arranges the overview and the opened windows as a cas cade Arranges the overview in the upper and the opened window in the lower part of the explorer Opens the Acrobat Reader with the Datacolor MATCHT tile Dye Lot User s Guide Opens the About ColorLab information box with release copyright and user information Refer to the related window description for window specific menu functions D
79. a dispenser The SmartMatch facility is used to improve first time matching and correction Standard color prediction uses the Kubelka Munk theory which assumes that dyes behave in the same way when used together or stand alone However this is not the case dyes inter act with one another The SmartMatch facility overcomes this problem by taking into account the performance of previous predictions e g learning by experience SmartMatch stores information about the concentrations used to dye a sample and the results of dyeing and uses this data to correct the first attempt made by Kubelka Munk calculations in future matching It stores information about previous predictions as SmartMatch points Once you set your system to SmartMatch it runs automatically However you can also examine the SmartMatch points the system is using and alter them to refine Smart Match performance For example if you suspect that one of the SmartMatch points being used is based on a bad dyeing you can remove this point As result it will no longer be used in the calculations The number of similar points is reduced by grouping them In addition to the automatic SmartMatch housekeeping a powerful graphical tool supports the checking of the SmartMatch population for SmartMatch points to be deleted or grouped All recipes calculated using the Match option will use SmartMatch when SmartMatch is turned on and when relevant populations are available The n
80. a link to a fiber group and the part of each fiber in e g PES 60 CO 40 Can be used for the rela tionship to the colorant set This link can be specified in the Affinity tab of the Quality Style Property sheet if the colorant set is specified Refer to Excluding Including Colorant Sets from into An Affinity on page 5 29 Note The affinity is used to group qualities styles Qualities styles linked to the same affinity should have the same dye behavior or should be dyed with the same combined pro cess Customer A customer can be assigned to each quality style Substrate blank dyeing Reflectance measurement of the substrate and quality style effect factor Colorant set All related colorant sets are assigned per default The list can be displayed using the Search Colorant Set button In the list colorant sets can be selected and excluded using the Exclude button Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Datacolor Special composition Used for altering the parts of a composed quality Example In a composition of polyester cotton and Lycra the Lycra cannot be dyed If you do not set the Lycra part to 0 arecipe is also calculated for the Lycra part Pec ction Molo 114 34 IQ ID Special Composition for Quality Style AuxlD Quality Style Mungo Stretch Affinity Customer PES CO LYC 7042575 Fibers Affinity Grey Quality
81. a recipe is not possible you must add dyestuffs or use specify another colo rant set Parameters Take all None Using this check box you can select or deselect all dyestuffs The single dyestuffs are selected or deselected with a mouse click Group Selection or definition of dyestuff groups February 2005 5 73 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Settings for Recipe Match Refer to Settings Tab on page 7 120 Matching Action Result Notes 1 Click Calculate or press F5 to start According to the settings in the Set the recipe calculation tings tab the recipes are calculated and the best recipes are displayed in a table 2 In the table you can change the Refer to Review recipe table on page order of the recipes according to dif 5 76 for a description of the different ferent criteria e g price metamer review help functions ism Select one ore more recipes using the Trial function of the context sensitive menu 3 If finished close the recipe table The Recipe Database Operation dia log box appears 4 If necessary change recipe name The recipe is saved and the Show full and identification s Recipe dialog box appears Refer to Show Full Recipe Dialog Box on page Click Yes for saving the recipe 5 75 on the following page Click No for returning to the Match dialog box for altering dyestuff selection and settings and recalculate t
82. a reference is not defined the section select or measure the reference for the standard is disabled sample 4 Click Ok to start the measurement The measurement table and the Mea sure Control dialog box appears Note The name of the batch series is used as batch name together with an extension for the number of lines measured e g M amp S Lot 1173652_001 M amp S Lot 1173652_002 M amp S Lot 1173652_003 M amp S Lot 1173652_004 Each sample contains the spectra for the readings made at the positions left center and right Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor MONITOR Option Type the name or number for the 1st piece of fabric and click Measure to start the 1st measurement SE Measure Control Reference GRo 291002 Navy Tolerance CMC 2 1 Piece 4001 2 002 Automatic measure Every lo seconds Finish 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The position you have to mea sure is displayed in the dialog box The program asks for the next reading as soon as the measure ment is done If all measurements defined for a piece of fabric have been done you can type the name ofthe next piece of fabric If you forget it the program asks for a new name If your instrument is equipped with a feature button you can trigger the measurement from the instrument If the measurements of a line have been done the color differ ences will be displayed February 200
83. ai ca aaa deh Dal al A ll a apa D ai da a 7 31 Product Supplier Tab nenea 7 33 DES tuf TaD issa zoo poezie t sedea aa atata a ate eala a iea ehia 7 34 Dye NAS ST Ais aaa ea Cia We cate ba a pnl d at da pala ad 7 36 Supplier Dye Name Tab cccec cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 7 37 Dyestuff Color Tab ss a cit a eee a a o ai 3 7 38 Dyestuff Type Form Tab eine c ac eae ne atac ada 7 39 Dye Description Tab sc se ce a e i a a a i l te ta i 7 40 Stock SOIUMION Tab seaca ie aaa ta aa ca a ea apa dna aa bn Aai 7 41 Formula Setting Dialog Box cccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeensseeeeneneeeeeess 7 42 Customer Property Sheet cca neennnaneeeeeannnanaaeeee eee 7 43 Customer lab zisa ia eae a aaa aa ee pda 000054 7 43 Address Dialog BOX scie ien iaaa iata anna aaa an a aa aan abat aia 7 44 Color Type Property Sheet ssseeeeecceeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeensneeeeneeeeseeseeeeeseeneeees 7 45 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Contents Datacolor Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide Tolerance Block Program Dialog Box cccccccssseeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseenees 7 46 Cl AD Tab eanan ata ea a a a al d n Ra 7 47 CMC Tas aaa ace atena cd dt i aia aa aaa nat aaa 7 48 Datacolor Tab osia aia a oa aaa da it ata al a dada at 7 49 FMOZ Tab sii ei tnt e i o a n a a ap tu ab pu 7 50 ELCA BAD sicilian a aa a ta a an es 7 51 MS89 Tab scoatem one d ul i
84. altered the weighting you have to close the window and match again 7 122 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Match Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Insert A Theoretical Sample Dialog Box Insert a theoretical sample for Colorite E x E Datamatch S ample ae i Name l K0002 ELEFANT K Match Th 013 El c ancel D002 ELEFANT K Match Th 013 R m LD 2 st Parameters Name Selection of the sample The name of the currently selected sample is used as default Insert button Inserts the theoretical reflectance value into the recipe table Graph Refer to Spectral Tab on page 7 73 Datacolor February 2005 7 123 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide Recipe Editor Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes The Recipe Editor dialog box is used to alter recipe parameters Refer to Modifying Recipes on page 5 79 F Modification Rules for adding and removing dyestuffs The dyestuff selection of a recipe can only be altered if the recipe is approved P it is not in use by the laboratory and a modification could influence the laboratory correction Note Data that can be modified is displayed with a green background Recipe Editor x Recipe Name Recipe ID Creation Date M Modification Date Color Type Quality Name M CombinedProcess Batch Customer Name Color Recipe E Dye Process Name Colorant Set N
85. appears 2 Click New to select or specify a The corresponding selection box product appears Edit ae Product a E a een ama 3 Select the product and click OK To specify a new product select Input Form on the context sensitive menu of the selection box 4 Select the corresponding field and The unit is set automatically if a default press the space bar to specify the unit is specified for the selected product values in the Formula Setup dialog box Refer to Product Property Sheet on page 7 31 and Formula Setting Dialog Box on page 7 42 5 Click OK if finished The auxiliaries are displayed for each calibration sample in the Components of One Calibration Series dialog box You can change the concentration or add other auxiliaries here These modi fications are only valid for the selected calibration dyeing Refer to Specifying Colorants and Calibration Samples on page 5 50 Datacolor February 2005 5 49 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Colorants and Calibration Samples Action Result Notes If the header information is filled in and an auxiliary recipe is defined click New to add colorants to the col orant set Select the colorant you want to cali brate If the colorant is new click New to specify a dyestuff Type in the concentrations of your calibration samples separated by a blank or a comma Click Measure to m
86. between original and batch recipe Relative correction for the single dyestuff Addition in Batch size for the calculated correction February 2005 7 181 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 182 New Batch Size 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Fibers have to be added to correct the color The batch size becomes bigger than the total batch size About 50 kg must be added in the example to correct the color The table and the graph show the colorimetric data Evaluate buttons User Add scale back by Computer Add Optimal dE Min Add dE button Min Add dH button Buttons Cancel Show Print ASCII Export Save Print Displays the colorimetric data in a print preview ASCII Creates a text file using a specified form Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Used to reduce the Amount by value in Used for absolute tolerance specification Optimizes dE only with positive adds Removes all negative adds Recalculates the correction using the dE limit given in the Compute To Limit field dE must be higher than the dE limit Recalculates the correction using the dH limit given in the Compute To Limit field Closes the dialog box without saving Data that not has been saved will lost Opens a print preview Prints the correction data Saves the correction data to a file in the ASCII format Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Saves the fiber blend
87. calculated and displayed Displays data of the dye process es Colorant table Displays data of the colorants used for the recipe It is possible to modify the recipe 7 148 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor TICKET 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Buttons on the footer Load and Modify Template or Modify Template Opens the Root Recipe dialog box with the list of all products with there relative amounts Refer to Root Recipe Dialog Box on page 7 149 New Dye Lot Opens the New Dye Lot dialog box Refer to Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot on page 5 117 Root Recipe Dialog Box ii RootRecipe Treatment Continuou 2 4 DYETANK Volume oli oli Perivet ELP lig l Emigen DPR 10 g l DYESTUFFS Remar atomi cazan no Remazol Briliant Red F3B Gran O07 on 77 Remazol Briliant Blue R Spec Gr 1 73238 DIES DE NEES MRE 211 Caustic Soda 33 Be Table columns Sequence of the use Product ID Product name Relative amount Unit Remarks 9oo8 8 Datacolor February 2005 7 149 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Buttons Append Opens the Insert dialog box used to insert call offs dye stuffs products parameters and notes CallOft Dyestuff Product Parameter Note x Cancel Note Z Do not use operate with the dyestuff class as dyestuff placeholder The color rec ipe will thereby be du
88. colors you want to proof to get a useful tolerance block The Datacolor Tolerance Block dialog box closes The Manual Input of Tolerance Values dialog box appears Refer to Manual Input of Tolerance Val ues Dialog Box on page 7 56 for infor mation about the parameters The Manual Input Tolerance Values dialog box closes The new tolerance is created Note Z A Datacolor tolerance block can be modified by adding more standards and batches Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Displaying Datacolor Tolerance Values Action Result Notes 1 Select the requested Datacolor tol erance 2 Click Tolerance Values The Tolerance Value Output dialog box appears Refer to Tolerance Block Program Dia log Box on page 7 46 3 Select or measure the requested The tolerance values are displayed batch Modifying and Deleting Tolerance Values Action Result Notes 1 Open the Tolerance Block Program Refer to Tolerance Block Program Dia dialog box log Box on page 7 46 for information about the parameters 2 Modifying Select the tolerance alter the data and click Save Deleting Select the tolerance click Delete and confirm the deletion 5 46 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Colorant Sets 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Colorant Sets Z Note The delete move copy an
89. displayed auto matically is the value specified in the colorant set program by setting a fixed relation You can check the dyestuff selection using the Lab Graph tab Refer to Check ing the dyestuff selection In the Group section you can select save or delete predefined dyestuff selec tions with all settings Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Recipe Calculation Matching Datacolor F 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTextile Checking the dyestuff selection The Lab Graph tab is used to check that a recipe can be calculated with the selected dyestuffs Note The graphical view cannot check the quality of a recipe r Standard Ko002 ELEFANT K Process Data for matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Match E Save Calculate Dyeset Disperse Dispersol r Dyestuff s choice Take All x Z None i ce E 0 Dispersol Navy C2G Cancel Graph The graph may be rotated by dragging the left mouse button and be zoomed by draw ing the right mouse button The standard is displayed as a sphere on the top of a line The dyestuff selection is OK if the standard sphere is completely inside the color space 1 Check the possible dyestuff selections by rotating the color space The standard sphere must not leave the color space at any position of the color space Note If a selection is not OK you can change the selection of dyestuffs If
90. exhaust Production Affinity 017642 PES CO 70 30 Substrate delivery 4 elements New Possible dveset s 017642 PES CO 70 30 1 Match batch ci inerte nyesa Process fESubstra Pure substas Disperse Dispersol 1 00 1 00 Dacron1 001 Match standard Used dyeset s Reactive Exhaust Cotton knitted blanc n merc 70 PES Disperse Terasil 1 00 1 00 PES Blanc Dyeing Standard ColorTools 8 Datamatch Sample a Evaluate z v gt VO006 PISTACHE E Print ASCII Parameters Quality Style Field for quality style specification Combined Process Field for combined process specification Affinity Protected Display of the affinity Substrate Delivery Selection of a specific substrate delivery New button Used to measure a new substrate delivery Possible Colorant Set s Selection table with the assigned colorant sets Select a colorant set using a double click on the name cell Used Colorant Set s Table with the selected colorant sets Remove a colorant set using a double click on the name cell Standard Selection of color to be dyed target color 7 106 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Fast Correction Recipe Input Dialog Box Datacolor a Colorant Set tab Fast correction for Y0006 PISTACHE 001 Process Data for matching R 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Standard Save ab G
91. is saved Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Example of a new combined process 1 Select the type of combined process you like to specify il New Combine Process OF x Preparation E Finishing C K Continuous D Discontinuous H Half Continuous 2 Select the Dye Process es Search Characters Fae eee EEE tien tive ex TEP st REA Vats Exhaust VAT Disperse Exhaust Dispers DISP Disperse Exhaust T erasil DISP Basic exhaust BAS ja Disperse Exhaust 105 C DISP Disperse Exhaust Foron DISP Dispers Exh 110 C DISP Never Dyesd BAS REA EXCIH Reactive Exh Cibactron REA H DY REA EXH MIG Reactive Exh Migration REA H DY gt x cau The dye processes are the links to the colorant sets This combined process points to two dye processes colorant sets It can be used for blends of polyester and cotton refer to the fiber group list box The combined process exists of one treatment because both dye processes are of type Exhaust ProcessType Name gt Discontinuous 46 Datacolor February 2005 5 63 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCH If you specify a combined process of type Half continuous two treatments are created ProcessType Name o y E Discontinuous 45 p Continuous a v Specifying Modifying Deleting An Operation Note Z Refer to the Datacolor PROCESS document
92. is selected 2 Type the name or a part of the Refer to Find in Folder Dialog Box on name of the searched data records page 7 14 select the search restrictions and The corresponding data is displayed click Search 3 Select one or more of the items in the Search Result box and right click to display print or to make an ASCII output of the data Note The number of data records to be displayed is limited to 1000 A message is displayed if the limit is exceeded Using the overview window Clicking a button opens the corresponding list window Refer to chapter Windows and Dialog Boxes on page 7 1 section Overview Window on page 7 2 Using the list windows A mouse double click in an object opens a window dialog box or property sheet that is used to alter or delete the corresponding object data Refer also to General table func tions on page 5 7 February 2005 5 3 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Using special browse functions and the query designer Operations and Combined Processes are windows with special browse functions Quick search Action Result Notes 1 On the Select menu click Quick The Quick Search box appears Refer Search to Quick Search Dialog Box 2 Select the Search Type check the Quick Search Column s and Glo bal Search 3 Specify search criteria is wildcard In the corresponding browse window for unkn
93. menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Recipe Name Recipe name Recipe ld Unique identification of the recipe Batch Id Unique identification of the batch Status Recipe status Values 1 Recipe Manual Input in Datacolor Pro cess 1 Ready for calculation 2 No solution 4 Calculated 5 Manually modified or inserted 6 Modified by dyestuff exchange Modification Date Date of last modification Quality Name Quality style name Combined Process Name Unique identification of the combined process Functions of the Recipe and the context sensitive menu History Displays the history of recipe generation and corrections Match Opens the Match dialog box Refer to Match Dialog Box on page 7 116 Match in Background Used if several standards are defined for calculation Is only enabled if there are recipes of status 2 ReMatch Re calculation of a recipe February 2005 7 91 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Pass Fail and Laboratory Correction Opens the Correct or Approve Your Recipe dialog box Refer to Laboratory Correction on page 5 92 Pass Fail and Production Correction Opens the Production Correction dialog box Refer to Pro duction Correction on page 5 96 Fast Correction Opens the Fast Correction dialog box Refer to Fast Correc tion on page 5 99 Search Recipes Opens the Search and Correct dialog box used for search ing recipes Refer to Search a
94. multi color qualities styles You can assign its own standard or dyed substrate to each colorant set in the table pro cess and substrate of the same row are assigned In this way the different recipes are calculated together Standard List of standards Multicolor matching IV Keo Folder i is E s DJOO4 Blue 4 gt D017 Blue 17 E DJ011 Blue 11 Dyed substrate lt Sa No Folder j ee Action Result Notes 1 Check the Multi Color Matching The List of Standards box appears box 2 In the Standard selection box You can remove standards from the list select the requested standards one using the Remove by one and move each to the List of Standards box using the Move gt button z button Note Z In the Colorant Set tab you can switch between the selected colorant sets The cur rent colorant set name is displayed on the top of the tab 5 70 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Rules for re dyeing Re dyeing needs the following prerequisites The dyed substrate must by darker than the pure substrate of the colorant set Solution if lighter Specify the dyed substrate as a delivery No component of the dyed substrate must be darker than the standard Solution Bleach and measure again Selecting dyestuffs for matching Standard Process Data for matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings ius Calculate Dyeset Disperse Terasil Part 100 Calculat
95. new sample name Specify the data to the Spectral or The new sample is inserted the Coordinates tab and click Save Z Note You can copy an existing sample using the Save As button Modification of Samples Z Note Datacolor MATCH amp tile synchronizes color type and sample name If you rename a color type the sample name will also be modified The same happens to the color type name if you change a sample name Action Result Notes 1 On context sensitive menu of the The Sample Input dialog box appears Sample list box select Sample Refer to Sample Input Dialog Box on page 7 72 2 Search and select the sample Modify the data in the Spectral or A warning appears the Coordinates tab and click Save 4 Confirm the saving The sample is overwritten with the mod ified data 5 24 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Basic Data Datacolor The Basic Data application is used to manage basic data e g substrates dyestuffs auxiliaries etc The basic data together with the colorant set definitions are prerequi sites for the recipe calculation The basic data is managed using property sheets Basic data include Quality Style Data related to the substrates Product Data related to the dyestuff and auxiliary Customer Data related to the customer Color Type Measured dye sample Parameters De
96. not to be displayed Opens the Font dialog box used to define the font for the table Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Operation Window Operation Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Z Note Refer to the Datacolor Process documentation for more information General Parameters Functions of the Edit menu New Prepares the window for specifying a new operation Delete Deletes the currently displayed operation Duplicate Duplicates the current operation This function can be used for specifying a new operation with only small differences to the current operation Buttons First 1 4 Previous al Next gt Last PI New _ Delete Appl EX Apply oe OK Cancel X Cancel Datacolor February 2005 Jumps to the first operation of the list Jumps to the previous operation Jumps to the next operation Jumps to the last operation of the list Prepares the window for specifying a new operation Deletes the currently displayed opera tion Saves the currently displayed data The window is not closed Saves the currently displayed data and the window closes Closes the window without saving after confirmation Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Parameters of the General Tab i E Operation Bezema Exhaust Isotherme Method REA BZ XH 2 xj File Edit X Cancel i Control Line References rR EA BZ xH
97. o ad aa haven a n dt bac a Monee 7 170 Sort Job Definition Options Dialog Box enneeee eee 7 171 User Field Pre selection Dialog Box c ceea 7 172 Datacolor BLEND Option iscir acei aa aaa an aaa ip a 0 e eialia bau dai aaa 7 173 Blend Fiber Set Window ine ea a scans a a ie 7 173 BUtONS acte as cala ec aaa la einstein aa 7 173 Header Information csc cece fisitsactos ee apetseaadieeathtdelpisai teodeeiaatiagantbedss 7 174 Graphical Display ia tc ceia cota Data dt ca ove it tata e 7 174 Fiber able iza a aaa a a fa da de aa aaa a 0 ada a sc at 7 175 Calibration Series Table lt lt lt nare ee oceane e a aaa de aa 7 175 Components in One Calibration Series Table ii 7 175 Datacolor February 2005 TOC 9 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Contents BLEND Match Dialog BOX siaice eeu a ia la at e ala ened 7 176 Process Data for Fiber Matching Tab seeen 7 176 Dye Set Tab css petala ca a a ala 7 177 Lab Graphic Tabati aaa o a a aaa a Data aa a 7 178 Settings Tab siie eine tate a cl ta a bule barbe aa d te di 7 178 BLEND Recipe Calculation Result Table eee 7 179 BLEND Correction Dialog Box mm aaa ee aa aaa aaa 7 179 Dye Set Tarnai ema eta ata ii al aia aia aa aia 7 180 Lab Graphic Tab eee 7 180 S ttings TaD missni e aa i az e oa dl dada Goa ata dt 7 180 BLEND Correction Recipe Dialog Box me ere 7 181 BLEND Fast Correction Dialog Box mmmneeee eee nana 7 182 8 Glos
98. of the Machine Group table Edit Criteria Opens the Formula Edit window Refer to Specifying For mulae on page 5 66 Delete Criteria Deletes the selected criteria after confirmation Parameters of the Product Parameters tab Product table Product_ID Unique identification of the product Product_Name Unique name of the product Value Numeric value Unit_ID Unit Parameter table Parameter_ID Unique identification of the parameter Parameter_Name Unique name of the parameter String Value String value Value Numeric value Parameters of the References Settings tab Default Prod Form Data Default Lab Form Data Display of the corresponding data Table Name of the linked form and number of records Open button Opens the selected form Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Operations Browse Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Operations Browse Window Datacolor F Note Refer to the Datacolor Process documentation for more information Browse window for operations Refer to Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 and Speci fying Modifying Deleting An Operation on page 5 64 moeras oxi Fie Select Operations View New Open If Delete Quick Search L Close E EEE CY S R u Reactive DM E M A Vat DM v M __ 3 Disperse DM V i ___ ACD Acidification vow ___ ACD CNT Continous Acidification vw __ BTCH Batching Vv Ww __ DISP HT Disperse HT Dyeing vw __ FN CTT AT C
99. page 7 91 Opens the Calibration Conditions dialog box corresponds to the Calibration tab of the Measurement dialog box Refer to Calibrate Tab on page 7 18 and Calibration and Measurement on page 5 10 Only active in recipe application Saves recipes and labora tory corrections Prints data of the currently opened Colorant Set List or Recipe window using the default Windows printer Closes the currently displayed window and asks for saving if some data has been altered Opens the Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide February 2005 7 7 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Recipe toolbar 14 Match Opens the Match dialog box Refer to Match Dialog Box on page 7 116 15 Laboratory Correction Opens the Correct or Approve Your Recipe dialog box Refer to Laboratory Correction on page 5 92 16 Production Correction Opens the Production Correction dialog box Refer to Pro duction Correction on page 5 96 17 Fast Correction Opens the Fast Correction dialog box Refer to Fast Cor rection on page 5 99 18 Search and Correct Opens the Search and Correct dialog box used for search ing recipes Refer to Search and Correct Dialog Box on page 7 109 7 8 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Explorer Folder Structure 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes All objects are displayed in a structured list at the left of the Explorer wind
100. points Too many points may have a negative influence to the matching quality Many statistical calculations are necessary to find the SmartMatch points that build a group The aim is to find clouds of points with similar behavior It is an iterative process which calculates the aver age distance between all points and the smallest distance between two points which are not equal J The graph shows how the pro O gram is looking for points which can be used for grouping OR The group point is calculated using the information of the points that are building the group A theoretical recipe and reflectance values are stored for this new point Points used for grouping are not deleted from the database If you select the group point you can restore the points used to build the group point All points with C and the same number have similar or equal con centrations but the reflectance values of the batches are different All points with Batch and the same number have similar or equal reflectance values but the concentrations are different All points with dBat and the same number have similar or equal color difference values but the concentrations are different February 2005 7 133 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Example of SmartMatch Points to Be Deleted Color 0 oel Hide Comments njak en aes esn um Joe Jen Jar de ae ziain
101. recipes BLEND Fast Correction Dialog Box General parameters Standard Buttons Save Correction Datacolor Tools Evaluate Cancel Selected color to be dyed target color Saves the correction data Used for recalculating the recipe Opens the BLEND Correc tion Recipe Dialog Box dialog box Opens the Datacolor Tools application for color quality con trol Standard and batch are transferred automatically from the Datacolor MATCHTEXile database to the Datacolor TOOLS database Print Displays the colorimetric data in a print preview ASCII Creates a text file using a specified form Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Closes the dialog box without saving Data that not has been saved will be lost Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor BLEND Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor Process Data for Fiber Matching tab Fast correction or Standard Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Available fibersets KSP Baumwolle KSP Baumwolle Approx Correction O mi m Wool Fett m Wool Felt Approximation Evaluate Used fiberset wool Felt Pat 2 100 Current total 0 ao tila Standard n ASCII H ob gt Olive Wool a Cancel Parameters Available Colorant Set Selection table with the assigned fiber sets Select fiber sets by checking the box Us
102. refrac tive index Used by the software to decide which sections of the software are available on the com puter or workstation it is attached to Parameters used for recipe calculation Refer to Settings Tab on page 7 120 Information about a specific laboratory or production dyeing stored in the database This information is used to improve first time matching and correction A group of SmartMatch points which were all dyed on the same substrate using the same dyes The reflectance data is manipulated in such a way that minor variations in the build up of a dyestuff are eliminated by a least mean squared fit Light striking a surface and being reflected or turned back at an angle equal to the angle of incidence The reflected light is specular reflectance A numerical term used to describe the value for the Specular reflectance when used in the Sauderson correction Measured color to be matched target color In Datacolor MATCH tle a standard becomes a color type Definition of different dilutions used for optimizing the accuracy of manual dyestuff pipetting and to prevent that the maximum of the dye solution is to be exceeded The materials onto which Colorant is applied to obtain the desired shade Dyeing without dyestuff but with all auxiliaries Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Substrate delivery Tolerance value Treatment Datacolor 8 Glossary Specific substrate delivery Small differences bet
103. serie Components in one calibration serie Product 1 Type Concentration Unit Terasil Yellow 4G 0 016 O Terasil Yellow 4G Colorant 0 016 Terasil Yellow 4G 0 048 0 000 90 476 N w Terasil Yellow 4G 0 16 0 000 86 383 ia Terasil Yellow 4G 0 40 0 000 79 249 O Terasil Yellow 4G 0 56 0 000 71 733 O Terasil Yellow 4G 0 80 0 000 58 796 D New Calculate Single All ton End pa Values that can be modified Select the field and press the space bar Values calculated while opening the window Values that cannot be modified Mandatory fields Prints the complete set of data The print out is based on a print form Saves the current list of auxiliaries If an auxiliary recipe exists the auxiliaries are added to each new colorant The concentrations may be edited individually The selected colorant is recalculated All colorants of the colorant set are recalculated Saves the colorant set Closes the window If data has been changed a dialog box with a save request appears February 2005 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide Header Information Name ID AuxID Type Dye Class dE Sigma Unit Dye Process Creation Date Modification Date Industry Type Substrate Delivery Lig Ratio or Pickup Operation Graphical Display 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Unique name of the colorant set Unique identification of the colorant set Additional identification of the colorant set Dye process type
104. the batches you want to sort Measure ai patches 0 Selected Batches 219 Color Name Date Name Date 200204 C1440107 001 2003 10 09 10 59 BBM 200204 c1440107 005 2003 10 09 10 59 NI 200204 c1440207 009 2003 10 09 10 59 NI 200204 c1440207 013 2003 10 09 10 59 BB 200204 c1440207 017 2003 10 09 10 59 NI 200204 c1440207 021 2003 10 09 10 59 NI 200204 c1440207 0234 2003 10 09 10 59 NI 200204 c1440207 0248 2003 10 09 10 59 BB 200204 c1440207 0248 2003 10 09 10 59 BBB 200204 c1440307 025 2003 10 09 10 59 NI 200204 c1440307 029 2003 10 09 10 59 NI 200204 c1440307 033 2003 10 09 10 59 N 200204 c1440307 037 2003 10 09 10 59 NI 200204 c1440407 041 2003 10 09 10 59 BMI 200204 c1440407 045 2003 10 09 10 59 Spm SV VERNON ERE GE Add gt Add all gt gt lt lt Remove all lt Remove 0K Uibemetmen Hilfe Selection table for the batches to be used 7 162 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Tapering Parameters Tab xl New Sort Job Wizard Script and Filter Set of Batches Tapering Parameters View Options Output Options Tapering Parameters You have decided to taper What type of tapering do you prefer Sort by A r Tapering Method Color Next Neighbour IT dL CMC Linear Path C Minimum Path I dCICMC P dHICMC Start a new taper sequence if distance CMC greater tha
105. the corresponding data of assigned sort script Sort Job Definition Options x Check the input pages you want to see when a new job is defined or an existing job is maintained Invisible pages are filled with the values from the Sort Script Tl Grouping Parameters IV Group Limits Tapering Parameters IV View Options MV Output Options Cancel Note Z If you want to be sure that a user works only with the predefined settings of the sort script you have to limit the access rights respectively Login as User DCI and run the option User Administration Menu Tools User Manager User Administration Datacolor February 2005 7 171 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide 7 172 User Field Pre selection Dialog Box User Field Pre Selection 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes The User fld file may contain many fields that cannot be used by Datacolor SORT This task is used to select only relevant user defined fields for Datacolor SORT Batch Properties BAT_DCC_STATUS BAT_IMAGE BRAND_LABEL BRAND_MANAGER BRAND_MNGER_EMAIL BUYER CHROMA_BRIGHT_EXTREME CHROMA_BRIGHT_MODERATE CHROMA_BRIGHT_SLIGHT CHROMA_DULL_EXTREME CHROMA_DULL_MODERATE CHROMA_DULL_SLIGHT COMMENTS_1 COUNTRY_ORIGIN DCC_CAL_1_1_04 DCC_CAL_1_1_05 DCC_CAL_1_10_04 DCC_CAL_1_10_05 DCC_CAL_1_11_04 DCC_CAL_1_11_05 DCC_CAL_1_12_04 DCC_CAL_1_12_05 DCC_CAL_1_13_04 DCC_CAL_1_13_05 x DC
106. to be used Group Selection or definition of dyestuff groups The Save button saves the group with all settings of the Selection table The Delete button deletes a group with all settings Refer to Calculation of A New Recipe Series on page 5 69 Box for fiber selection Refer to Recipe Calculation with several Fiber Sets on page 5 144 Settings Tab Refer to Settings Tab on page 7 120 7 178 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor BLEND Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes BLEND Recipe Calculation Result Table amp DCIMatch Olive Wool 001 TI Fie Table Tools Instrument Window Help ME e BE Bi we 29 4717 29 7363 30 1544 30 3211 30 2186 26 0364 27 6536 26 28 9741 i 1293 25 5401 69 5161 69 5665 69 6456 69 5769 69 6001 69 8763 69 9470 70 0170 69 1112 69 1113 63 9743 63 2505 72 3544 0 0000 0 0005 0 0062 10123 oat i Navy wool fet a 3 6 192 2 E j 3 ERE j sme 27 6456 Grey wool felt E S Spies F SEA 4 31 42 00112 T Brown wool felt i pe Z i 7001 Se LEI 3 Rae 10 0846 Recipe with D65 Standard with D65 Refer to Recipe Calculation on page 5 142 and Recipe Correction on page 5 148 BLEND Correction Dialog Box General parameters Standard Protected Measured fiber blending Buttons Correction Opens the BLEND Correction Recipe Correction dialog box D
107. to compare You can set an individual tolerance factor for each relation There are three different types of relations e Relation with Standard only if Use reference is checked in the previous dialog relation with previous batch vertical e relation with batch on the same line horizontal 7 Click Finish to save the script Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Diagram Measurement distribution Width Measurements per line Reference Tag 1 Tag 2 Left Center Measurements per piece The circle repre sents a measure ment position This graph represents one piece of fabric with three horizontal measurement positions e g left center right and three positions per piece e g at the beginning in the mid dle and at the end of the piece In addition the reference is included in the pass fail task Datacolor February 2005 5 109 5 110 Specifying A Batch Series Create batch Seri ae xi Name M amp S Lot 173652 Folder cs Series Script mas Csac EEE 7 Standard EMES Blue 454 Batch name Mes Lot 173652 Batches Description Here you can write down some notes Cancel Action Result Notes 1 On the Batch Series menu select The Create Batch Series dialog box Measure New Series appears 2 Type the name of the batch series select the folder and the script 3 If a reference is defined in the script If
108. to group qualities with the same dyeing properties Chemicals to used for dyeing finishing etc Concentrations of dyestuffs and blank dyed Substrate which when measured with the spectrophotometer become part of the match prediction database in the form of colo rant sets Measured sample dyed with defined concentration and dye strength The data of cali bration samples are used for recipe calculation and correction Calibration samples are used to calculate the calibration data K S for each dyestuff used for recipe calculation and correction Color inconstancy is the color difference if a single sample is illuminated with different light sources The magnitude of color inconstancy can be defined by DE CMC or any other color difference formula of the sample between two light sources A colorant set is a set of color information about the Substrates and dyes the system uses to produce match and correction recipes It contains information about the overall colorant set e g the substrate s and process es that will be used with the dyes product information about each dye e g price and specific gravity density color information about each dye information about the qualities used with the colorant set The color index is produced jointly by SDC Society of Dyers and Colourists in the UK and the AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists in the USA The index is split into two parts one p
109. to simulate the D65 Illuminant and the Ganz Griesser parameters are used to calculate the filter position In addition the target whiteness value is based on 10 standard observer data CIE using D65 10 The light source is filtered to simulate the D65 illuminant This is the procedure used to perform a CIE Whiteness evaluation ISO Brightness C The light source is filtered to simulate Illuminant C This is the pro cedure used to perform an ISO Brightness evaluation February 2005 5 11 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Example using the Ganz Griesser method Note Z The UV calibration is only available for instruments with the whiteness option The UV calibration is necessary to ensure a constant UV emission of the bulb Definition of the Ganz Griesser whiteness parameters This definition is necessary if a bulb or an other part of the optical illumination system has been replaced Measurement Main Window Measurement conditions US Specular Bee Aperture Bo Flashes 68 0 6 4 UV Cut off EA Multiple BI Until Tol E Calibrate Instruments Setup General Options El UV Calibration gt Periodical Illuminant checker Whiteness parameters Nominal whiteness UY Filter Position Whiteness of test tile fico Position to set fo Re Calibrate parameters Whiteness found using position Whiteness Difference Color Coord
110. 0 Datacolor Action In the Measurement Main Window select the UV Calibration tab Select the UV Calibration Method Specify the whiteness of your Illumi nant Checker sample in the White ness of Test Tile field and click Auto Calibrator Repeat the Auto Calibration until the Whiteness Difference is in the range of 1 5 then click Accept February 2005 Result Notes The whiteness difference is calculated and the UV filter is adjusted automati cally if the instrument supports it Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Instrument Correlation There is always some variation in performance between different instruments This dif ference becomes a part of each color evaluation if the standard and batch measure ments are carried out using different instruments While the inter instrument agreement specification for Datacolor instruments is very tight when working with very small acceptability tolerances small variations in instrument performance may have a signifi cant impact on all the color evaluations Maestro offers the additional correlation fea ture to reduce these performance differences further Correlation allows you to adjust the performance of an instrument in order to match it to another reference or master instrument This adjustment is carried out by the applica tion of correlation factors calculated using the results of the spectra
111. 1 990423 002 10 Scheduled 61 M amp S 1 990429 012 10 Scheduled 277 001 10 990506 001 10 Scheduled 681 3 990506 002 0 Generation needed 1135 01 3 990507 001 0 Generation needed 1135 01 RW 3 990507 002 10 Scheduled 277 001 10 X z Findin DyeLot Aub Value DyeLot ipl 2 3 0 33 query sorted on DyeLot_AuxID 4 Menu functions Refer to the Datacolor Process help Press F1 Buttons New Opens the New Dye Lot dialog box for specifying a new dye lot Refer to Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot on page 5 117 Modify Opens the New Dye Lot dialog box Refer to Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot on page 5 117 Open Opens the New Recipe dialog box with the selected recipe Refer to Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot on page 5 117 Delete Deletes the currently selected recipe after confirmation Quick Search Opens the Quick Search dialog box Generate Generates the selected dye lots only if not generated Close Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved Table columns Refer to the Datacolor Process help Press F1 Find in Select the requested table column and type the search crite ria The pointer jumps to the first line with the corresponding data February 2005 7 151 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes New Dye Lot Dialog Box Recipe Selection Tab im New dyelot Refer to the Datacolor Process help Press F1 7 15
112. 100 gt Dye Process Name Reactive Cold Pad Batch Silicate Colorant Set Name Remazol SPB Silicate LiquorRatioOrPickup Dyestuffs gil Remazol Yellow R Gran Remazol Red 3B Remazol Brliant Blue BB gran 133 Add Dyestuff Add Dyestuff Manual Correction porma Gof Emma cotes ooe EE Note Z The Go Manual Correction button is used for a manual graphical correction Refer to Manual Graphical Correction on page 5 101 Datacolor February 2005 5 79 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Action Result Notes 1 In the Recipe List window select the requested recipe and the menu function Edit 2 Replacing header data Double click the corresponding green table cell Altering Data Click the green table cell type the value and confirm the data with the Return key Adding dyestuffs Click Add Dyestuff Removing Dyestuffs Select the dyestuff and press the Delete key Note As long as you have not saved the recipe you can cancel the last modifications by clicking the Undo button 3 If the data is altered click Save Refer to Recipe List Window on page 7 91 The Recipe Editor dialog box appears Recipe Editor Dialog Box on page 7 124 A selection box with the available data appears A selection box with the available dye stuffs appears The dyestuff is removed from the recipe without confirmation
113. 2 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor TICKET 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Machine Selection Tab Ne WY hye she yt Refer to the Datacolor Process help Press F1 Datacolor February 2005 7 153 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor SORT Option Datacolor SORT List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Sort Job Name Unique name of the sort job Sort Script Name Unique name of the sort related script Name Name of the standard Modification Date Date of last modification Description Description of the standard Functions of the Datacolor Sort and the context sensitive menu Refer to Menu Functions of the Sort Job Menu on page 7 155 and for general functions of the context sensitive menu Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Job Result Window x x Fi Sortie Toots Fetrument Window Hap l AAKE 045 07306 45090103013 ox 207306 43420103093 ox B i el 7 154 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option Datacolor 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Menu Functions of the Sort Job Menu Maintain Sample Property Recalculate Options Batch removed Modify Job Save Job Save Job A
114. 207 G7350101 005 200205 E2070406 041B 200205 E4180709 093 200205 E2070406 045 200206 F1990303 025 200205 E4180509 065 200204 C1440207 013 200206 F3940101 001 200207 G7350101 001 200205 D1870102 005 200206 G5650303 045 200205 C6330303 033 0 20 0 27 0 31 ain oas Qn 200204 C1440307 025 200206 G5650203 021 200205 E2070306 025 200206 F4500202 017 200206 G5650203 017 200206 F4500102 005 200205 E4180709 089 200206 F4500202 021 200207 G73501 01 0084 200204 C1440307 033 200204 C1440507 065 200206 F1990403 037 Wl wW NINININI NINI N 4 4 4 4 a a ay a aya P e u N e N DIM Bu m TEREE Datacolor Symbol for cluster Symbol for taper Symbol for taper sequence Symbol for compatible cluster Symbol for Cluster A Cluster B etc Batch 200205 E3940101 001 is compatible to Cluster F and February 2005 7 157 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide 7 158 Examples of Printouts Use the menu function Sort Job Print Preview or Print to show or print the sort result Example 1 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Printout sorted by group and or taper code 01 10 2003 11 10 DCI JobName Bordo 30 09 2003 11 43 07 Standard Bordo Tolerance CMC 2 1 Tolerance Scaling Distance Color Batches not clustered BatchName 200204 C1440307 037 200205 D7460205 017 200205 D746020
115. 27 48 40 33 17 38 43 92 23 32 0 16 0 08 0 10 0 10 Pass ANIS 200206 G5650203 021 27 47 40 30 17 30 4385 23 24 0 20 0 07 0 13 0 14 Pass ANIG 200204 C1440307 025 27 48 40 32 17 41 43 92 23 36 015 0 07 0 10 0 08 Pass ANIT DCiMatch DynaSortByBatch English Version 1 0 DynaSort_OrderedBy_Batch Page 1 February 2005 7 159 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Sort Job Maintenance Dialog Box New Sort Job Wizard Tab Sort Job Maintenance fE ordo 08 10 2003 15 34 55 bemehmen Parameters Select an existing sort job Selection box with the name of the sort job Description Text box for an additional description of the sort job 7 160 Datacolor MATCH e tle Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Script and Filter Tab xi New Sort Job Wizard Script and Filter Set of Batches Tapering Parameters View Options Output Options Script Name and Filter The Sort Script defines the sort operation and with the filter you select which batches will be proposed for the sort 25 SaS fee All Data see GA Lia AT aper only CMC F 1 0 E Taper only CMC F 1 0 Color taper distance 0 3 linear path I want to use a ColorT ools Standard J Automatically include new batches fe All Data n Measure Standard E ordo J Note If you leave the standard empty a calculated average will be used Use only Batches with these properties
116. 5 5 111 Adding A Graph Panel You can add graph panels to the graphical display of all measurement positions and col or difference values Action Result Notes 1 On the Batch Series menu select Graph panels are displayed for each Add Graph Panel measurement Remove Graph Pane 1 Save Layout a Save Layout AS 3 Load Layout Delete Layout ek Settings i as 3 os 05 02 05 03 00 06 03 05 07 00 Print Preview Print oo 05 ne 01 06 dEM amp S Adds a pane different graphic output 2 In the graph panel click the right The Difference Graph Settings dialog mouse button box appears 5 112 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Difference Graph Settings 3 For all graph panels select the mea iT is the normalized tolerance dE TF surement positions to be compared This value is important if you work with and the type of the difference value different tolerance factors for the sam ple relations 4 Save the screen using the Save Refer to Batch Series Window on page Layout As function of the Batch 7 139 for an overview of all functions Series menu Datacolor February 2005 5 113 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Printing A Batch Series The printout or print preview is based on print forms created with the Print View Designer Two default forms are provided with the database Printform db
117. 5 021 200205 D7460205 0244 200205 D7460505 069 200205 E2070206 017 200205 E2070306 037 200205 E2070606 085 datacolor mas SortType Group and Taper ClusteredBy Color D65 TaperingMethod Linear TaperedBy Color TaperDistance 0 30 MinPiecesinCluster 8 Minimum Amount MaxPiecesinCluster Maximum Amount GE CMC aL CMC dC CMC HI CMC 0 47 0 33 0 20 0 27 0 43 0 20 0 08 0 38 0 58 0 31 0 16 0 46 0 57 0 32 0 14 0 45 0 48 0 08 0 27 0 39 0 32 0 18 019 0 19 0 41 0 22 0 29 0 17 0 57 0 33 0 32 0 34 TaperiD 1 ClusterTaperiD A 1 Sum of BatchName Sequence GEfCMC GL CMC ACICMC ciHICMC 200205 E4180709 089 1 0 27 0 08 0 22 0 13 200206 F4500102 005 2 0 25 0 08 0 17 0 16 200206 G5650203 017 3 0 28 0 07 0 20 0 18 200206 F4500202 017 4 0 26 0 07 0 23 0 10 200205 E2070306 025 5 0 16 0 08 0 10 0 10 200206 65650203 021 6 0 20 0 07 0 13 0 14 200204 C1440307 025 7 0 15 0 07 010 0 08 200206 F4500202 021 8 0 18 0 03 0 16 0 09 200207 G7350101 0084 3 0 19 0 01 0 13 0 13 200204 C1440307 033 10 0 13 0 01 0 08 0 10 200205 E2070406 042 11 0 20 0 00 0 12 0 16 200204 C1440107 001 12 0 20 0 00 0 07 0 19 200207 67350101 0088 13 0 12 0 00 0 09 0 08 200206 F1990303 029 14 0 24 0 03 0 20 0 14 200207 G7350101 005 15 0 12 0 01 0 09 0 08 DCiMatch DynaSotByClusterEnglish Version 1 0 DynaSort_OrderdBy_Clust Page Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option Datacolor 7 Window
118. 5 38 Dye fiber group explanation 8 3 specify into a dye process 5 37 Dye lot Datacolor TICKET 5 117 Dye lots list window Datacolor TICKET 7 151 Dye process data handling 5 37 deletion 5 38 explanation 8 3 specify dye fiber groups 5 37 9 Index specify newly 5 37 5 48 updating 5 38 Dye process list window 7 88 Dye process property sheet dialog box 7 29 Dye strength explanation 8 3 Dyestuff check selection for a recipe 5 73 overview 2 3 round concentrations 5 81 selection for a recipe 5 71 settings for a recipe 5 74 Dyestuff class list window 7 88 Dyestuff list window 7 89 Dyestuff type explanation 8 3 E E mail sending printfiles 4 25 Enable instrument correlation 5 16 Enter SmartMatch point manually 2 10 SmartMatch points manually 5 90 SmartMatch with recipes points manually 5 90 Error handling 6 2 messages 6 2 Explorer folder structure 7 9 toolbar 7 7 window 7 2 Explorer window menu functions 7 4 Export data 4 12 dialog box 7 135 print forms 4 19 4 29 samples QTX format 4 16 F Fast correction dialog box Datacolor BLEND 7 182 overview 2 10 Fast correction recipe input dialog box 7 105 Fiber explanation 8 3 Fiber group explanation 8 3 9 4 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor 9 Index Fiber group list window 7 87 Fiber set specify 5 135 window Datacolor BLEND 7 173 7 176 Fibre list window 7 86 Field selection and input mode 5 5 specific functions 5 5 Filter browser 4
119. 5 TOC 7 Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide Contents Dyestuff Class List Window ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeennnse 7 88 Dyestuff List WING asi isca cis sa aaa etc taia ai ca ia dia 0 i a dale 7 89 Auxiliary List Win OW zici aaa a ta oa a a cal abia Ea i e ia 7 89 Product List Window iesene cena a ca se anna si siana dna iau a a in aaa 7 90 Supplier List Window scie ciao atestat scea destin c ii cai pia celi cesses 7 90 Customer List Window cnc ineaca iso scai daase setat cette soia sees clasa dt ist i 7 91 Recipe List Window iscsi sie ice accesati ea ese sc catea iei dea al desi 7 91 Combined Process List Window cena nee nana nnnanaaeeeeee 7 93 Operation List Window inte sc seat canoist biet aaea aaau git i sita 7 93 SmartMatch Result List Window ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeees 7 94 Correct or Approve Your Recipe Dialog Box ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 95 Laboratory Correction Dialog Box ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenenae 7 96 Laboratory Correction Table ccccccccseseseneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeesneneeeeeeeenennes 7 98 View Configuration Dialog Box Laboratory Correction Table 7 100 Production Correction Dialog Box cscseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeenense 7 101 Production Correction Table cccccccccsssseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee
120. 707 Total 156 763 The previous adds are taken into account with 100 Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Dyeset Terasil Part 100 R Fl E color difference for CMC 2 1 D65 LU Data 0006 PISTACHE 1 1 50 IV Total batch Selection Concentration Shown 9 selected 3 Min 100 Max 100 Relation 4 Terasil Yellow 4G 0 0421 0 8 V Terasil Red 5G V Terasil Brill Blue 3RL 0 0047 2 0 0360 4 Result if the previous adds are taken in account Terasil Yellow 4G 68 381 0 98 3 88 Terasil Brill Blue BGE 200 33 585 z 096 4 04 Terasil Violet BL 63 343 0 93 7 81 Total l o 1653091 8959 sq 5 98 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Correction 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Fast Correction The Fast Correction function is used for production or laboratory corrections without an existing recipe It is based on a theoretical calculated recipe of the standard or a rec ipe typed in manually This task is mainly used for production correction ce Print Display Print Display Data input Quality style combined process colorant set and standard Batch color of the dyed substrate to be corrected Dyestuffs must be selected Concentration and parameters can be defined e The acceptance limit and color difference equitation settings can be altered The recipe can be entered manually or a theore
121. 8 1 46 ml 1 100 Bezaktiv Green S4B 2 7595 2 46 ml 1 10 5 104 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Displaying and Printing Existing Recipes Datacolor F 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Calculation of the stock solution Note The single volumes of the stock solution are checked If they exceed the target volume another stock solution is used Recipe History F If a Batch exists Datacolor MATCHTEXtile saves all corrections and modifications of a recipe Modifications done with the Edit option are also saved In addition to the reci pes a dLab graph is displayed Displaying the history Select the function History on the Recipe or the context sensitive menu Printing the history Select Print on the History menu Note The graph is not to be printed DCIMatch Hiktory view s of recipe VAC FIB 16 2 BLAUW 150 i i la x S File History Tools Window Help SEFA SS mee T aie Aa Er Swe Basic Trial Dyestuff Visc 100 1 Date Unit Correction nr 1 3 19 2001 4 30 17 Correction nr 2 3 19 2001 4 30 52 P Correction nr 3 3 19 2001 4 31 23 Fisrt recipe 3 19 2001 4 30 Correction nr 4 3 19 2001 4 33 03 PM SIRIUS ORANGE K CF 0 05719 0 04880 0 05246 0 05397 0 05711 SIRIUS ROUGE F4BL 154 0 08082 0 05963 0 05122 0 04644 0 06648 SOLOPHEN MARINE BLE 250 0 86884 0 68023 0 62866 0 52311 0 86472 Type of dE PassFail PassFail PassFail
122. 8 disabling browse filters 4 9 export browse filters 4 9 import browse filters 4 10 import browse filters from e mails 4 10 using browse filters 4 8 Folder structure explorer 7 9 Form delete print forms 4 28 export print forms 4 29 import print forms 4 29 modify print forms 4 28 rename print forms 4 28 specify print forms 4 26 Form maintenance dialog box 7 136 Formula specify modify 5 66 Formula edit window 7 71 Formula setting dialog box 7 42 Function field specific 5 5 Functions tables 5 7 G Graphical display using colorant set 5 52 Graphs customizing 4 30 Green tile test 5 18 H Handle errors 6 2 Illuminant list window 7 85 Import colorant sets 4 14 Datacolor Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide data 4 13 dialog box 7 134 print forms 4 19 4 29 samples QTX format 4 16 Input sequence recommended for basic data 5 25 Input form selection of context sensitive menu 5 8 Insert a theoretical sample dialog box 7 123 Instrument correlation 5 16 configure and enable 5 16 Introduction colorant set 5 47 combined process 5 61 correction 5 91 Datacolor SORT 5 118 recipe calculation matching 5 67 SmartMatch 5 85 J Job result window Datacolor SORT 7 154 K K explanation 8 3 K S explanation 8 3 Kubelka Munk theory explanation 8 3 L Laboratory correction specify 5 92 List window basics 5 3 5 4 Maintenance database 6 2 spectrophotometer 6 2 Manual type
123. 9 21 43 INTSL BL 2001 LR 11576 024 G S 3257 1 F S 3257 64 4 5625 827654 60388 2001 10 01 09 10 22 INTSL BL 2001 LR 05580 214 G S 7780 2 F S 033175 5 06072 2 00956 1 86858 2001 08 16 07 49 02 INTSL BL 2001 LR 04883 014 G S 4448 1 F S 4448 64 5 56916 1 13963 1 14751 2001 07 06 11 23 31 INTSL BL 2001 LR 06108 03A G S 3562 1 F S 0000 04 5 72801 1 43643 1 13445 2001 09 17 10 08 16 INTSL BL 2001 LR 05381 01A G S 1977 18 F S 0977 16 5 86715 1 16607 1 23132 2001 08 08 12 28 24 INTSL BL 343275 062W 00 00 5 88042 2 09881 1 04957 2001 04 04 19 16 40 INTSL BL 2001 LR 06108 02A G S 3562 1 F S 000004 5 97368 1 03407 1 31574 2001 09 17 10 06 47 INTSL BL 2001 LR 11935 21 G S 1442 21 F S 4019 16 6 10046 299644 1 12658 2001 10 12 15 44 16 INTSL BL 360964 0751 00 00 6 40626 1 46439 920577 2001 08 29 08 12 07 INTSL BL 2001 LR 05770 014 G S 8094 1 F S 0549 75 6 61354 2 07045 817496 2001 08 27 12 54 33 INTSL BL 2001 LR 05477 024 G S 3261 1 F S 326164 6 72603 1 20523 920589 2001 08 09 13 02 46 INTSL BL 368316 993N 00 00 6 79562 1 05721 1 66833 2001 10 09 10 56 52 INTSL BL 2001 LR 06063 024 G S 1797 5 F S 3466 75 7 00940 1 28556 1 28361 2001 09 13 09 52 30 INTSL BL 2001 LR 05477 054 G S 3261 1 F S 326164 7 75772 35173 1 52753 2001 08 09 13 06 53 INTSL BL 2001 LR 04828 024 G S 2839 5 F S 4328 64 8 12035 1 93216 1 26568 2001 06 29 09 36 10 INTSL BL 2001 LR 05477 03A G S 3261 1 F S 326164 8 16039 1 5403 1 85306 2001 08
124. 96 Production Correction Access from Datacolor PROCESS 5 98 Fast COMGCHOM scoata ati a ea aa e vended ta De a o a a nd 5 99 Manual Graphical Correction ce eee 5 101 Search and Correct An Existing Recipe for A New Standard 5 103 TOC 4 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Contents Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide Displaying and Printing Existing Recipes muncea eenannaeeeeeeeeaae 5 104 Recipe QUIDUE isus size atitea a decat aaa aus ot aaa atata bl aE 5 104 Recipe History sis eee aces cae teaca aaa pai pati d dna c alui ad 5 105 Datacolor MONITOR Option e nenea neeeennaeeeeee en nnannaneeee ea aaa 5 106 Specifying A SOMO ces an a eta atatea aaa aa Dita aha Saua dea iad 5 106 Specifying A Batch Series naos oo piara 0 pia ei a ua 5 110 Ad ing A Graph Panel spic ot aaa aa atei ata i 784 pad a d ae a ai 5 112 Printing A Batch Series moiros cnc cea a ot e da a Da da dn di ia 5 114 Datacolor TICKET Option si sira oa i a da a na a ai elan aa rani n 5 115 Datacolor TICKET Production Recipe mmmcne nenea 5 115 Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot sie same eine tatea aa am oa ata ta cd eat 5 117 Datacolor TICKET Administration mmee nenea 5 117 Datacolor SORT Option mite aia oii a am b a o ia 5 118 INTrOdUC IO ase cae acted aa catea aa 20 00 aula a aaa ei eet a 5 118 Clustering coace t ata ec ti aa at Se aa no a atei au ce dt 5 118 UDOT Gs cec
125. ATIONDAAT ARE EI USER_ID E F Default name FIBERGROUP_NAME Custom name Fiber Group Name For Help press F1 You can select the table columns to be displayed as follows Action Result 1 On the Tools menu select User s The Browse Columns for Explorer dia Browser Definition log box appears 2 Select the data type table The related data tree is displayed 3 Check the boxes the table columns In the footer of the dialog box the have to be displayed checked table column titles are dis played 4 Click Save The settings for the selected table are saved 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to display other table columns Repeat steps 2 to 4 to alter the dis play of other tables 6 Click Close to close the Browse Columns for Explorer dialog box Note Z The Reset button deselects all table columns except the object name It is used if the performance of displaying is not acceptable 4 6 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Browser Customizing 4 Configuration and Administration You can alter the column titles of the tables as follows Action Result 1 On the Tools menu select User s The Browse Columns for Explorer dia Browser Definition log box appears 2 Select the data type The related data tree is displayed and the checked table column titles are dis played in the footer of the dialog box 3 A double click in a table column title Refer to the figure on the previous opens the
126. Basic Data The basic data application is used to manage basic data e g substrates dyestuffs auxiliaries etc Quality Style Quality style is a summary of all data in relation to the substrate and contains Quality style and substrate Affinity quality style subgroup Fiber group e Fiber Customer Substrate blank dyeing Colorant Set mm Fiber Definition of all single fibers to be dyed Fiber group Definition of all fibers used for a quality style A fiber group can be a single fiber or a combination of different fibers e g PES PES CO Affinity Definition of a link to a fiber group and the part of each fiber in e g PES 60 CO 40 Used for the relationship to the colorant set Note Z The affinity is used to group qualities styles Qualities styles linked to the same affinity should have the same dye behavior or should be dyed with the same combined pro cess Customer A customer may be assigned to each quality style Substrate blank dyeing Reflectance measurement of the substrate and quality style effect factor 2 2 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Basic Data 2 Overview Product A Product is either a dyestuff or an auxiliary Dyestuff at Ee _ i Auxiliary Product supplier Supplier specific data e g name address phone number Supplier dye name Dye name of the supplier e g Remazol Terasil etc Stock solution Definition of differ
127. C CAL 1 14 04 aaan Pre Selection Properties BAT_FABRIC_LENGTH BAT_QUALITY_LEVEL FABRIC_SUPPLIER lt Remove lt lt Remove All Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Save Cancel Refer to Pre Selections of User Defined Fields on page 5 132 Datacolor Datacolor BLEND Option Datacolor BLEND Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Blend Fiber Set Window E Datacolor Match Edit Wool Felt 2 laj xj ZI Fie Colorantset Tools Instrument Window Help l8 x TuE 9 E e PE RHE Colarant Set Actual colorant WoolYelow Show and print Name Wool Felt 2 RI ID Wool Felt 2 SI Industry Type Fiber blending Dye Process Wool Felt 2 a 3 Methode Calibration Param 0 1 0806 Param 1 0 043893 ii P Creation Date 22 10 2004 15 12 57 Modification Date 22 10 2004 15 27 22 R ae if l dE Sigma 1 60 0 0 z Unit I 400 450 500 560 600 650 700 Created Modified dE Product Type Min Conc Max Conc Strength White 2 22 10 2004 15 27 20 22 10 2004 15 27 35 1 601 White 0 100 Black2 22 10 2004 15 27 22 22 10 2004 15 27 35 1 601 White 0 100 100 Wool Yellow 0 000 Color Fiber 0 100 100 New Calibration serie Components in one calibration serie dE Strength Product 1 Type Concentration Unit Yellow wool felt 100 00 0 000 Wool Yellow Color Fiber 100 New Calculate Single All
128. Color display Unique name of the fiber Opens the Substrate Delivery Effect Dialog box Refer to Calibration and Measurement on page 5 10 Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Quality Style on page 5 26 and Sub strate Delivery Example on page 5 30 Click to specify a new substrate delivery Opens a dialog box to select an existing sample Opens the Measure dialog box Refer to Calibration and Measurement on page 5 10 Executes the measurement Enters the currently displayed substrate delivery Deletes the currently displayed substrate delivery Closes the Substrate Delivery Dialog box If data is altered the program requests the data be saved February 2005 7 27 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Substrate Delivery Effect Dialog Box Substrate Delivery Effect Dialog n I U xl SubstrateD elivery 017642 PES CO 70 30 1 Levafix SPB lt Remazol SPB Silicate i o Insert an new Effect for a Dyeset e B 3 NSE t iR emazol SPB Silicate Delete Close He Table columns Fiber Name Fiber name Colorant Set Unique name of the colorant set colorant set Effect Effect factor for the recipe calculation little correction Insert a New Effect for a Colorant Set Selection box for the colorant set colorant set The browse button opens a browse dialog box used to search for colorant sets Note Z It is possible to create different effect
129. CombProcess_AuxID CombProcess_Name Process Type Dye Process Type DyeProcess_ID Dyeprocess_Name Fiber Group Lab Note Production Note Unique identification of the combined process Additional identification of the combined process Unique name of the combined process Displays the process type the combined process is used for Type of the dye process Unique identification of the dye process Unique name of the dye process List of the fiber groups Additional Notes for the laboratory Additional Notes for the production Note Z In the Lab Note and Production Note fields a context sensitive menu is used for changing data The Cut Copy and Paste functions are used to copy notes from a com bined process to others 7 62 Datacolor MATCH Tle Version 1 0 Datacolor Combined Process Window Datacolor 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Parameters of the Treatments tab E CombProcess Levafix Pad Batch REA LE PB E 2 x File Edit Continuous Visible Operation fe Regular Additions Operations PAD BATCHING RINSE ACIDIFICATION SOAPING RINSE TOTAL TIME sim jon oo rl Name Lab Operation iD ProdOperation ID REA LEY PB REA LEY PB BTCH RNS CNT ACD CNT SP CNT RNS CNT T T EDEDED EDE 220 220 I UseTrialBath TrialBathSize Location hal Valid machinegroup for the treatment MachineGroup
130. Date of last modification Identification of creating or modifying user Available Selected Fibers In the Available Fibers list box all available fibers are listed In the Selected Fibers list box the fibers are listed used for the current quality style definition The fibers of the two boxes can be selected and moved from one to the other box using the move buttons between the boxes or double click the fiber name February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Fiber Tab Quality Style PropertySheet Parameters Name Unique name of the fiber ID Unique identification of the fiber AuxID Additional identification of the fiber Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user 7 26 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Substrate Delivery Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Substrate Delivery Dialog Box Datacolor SubstrateDelivery Dialog E EI Quality Style Creation Date 25 07 2002 17642 PES CO 70 30 Modification User ID DCI SUDRA elivery Jai 7642 PES CO 70 30 1 SS j Measure gi Sample Sample Fibers eer p uul eaf esre Substrate Delivery Combo box Table columns Color Fiber Name Effect Buttons New Sample Measure Measure Directly a Insert Delete Close Selection of existing substrate deliveries
131. Deleting An Operation on page 5 64 Datacolor February 2005 7 69 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Parameters of the References Tab i Operation Bezema Exhaust Isotherme Method REA BZ XH a File Edit X cerea CombProcess Prod Parameter Product User DCI created 14 04 1999 modified 31 03 2000 by DCI References Referenced objects References count Number of objects Open Opens the corresponding Datacolor Process window with the referenced objects 7 70 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Formula Edit Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Formula Edit Window Refer to Specifying Formulae on page 5 66 E Formula_Edit X Dye class Product Disperse Interpolate on x Dye class Disperse 15 35 125 2 E S gt fe Liquor ratio C Pickup I Interpolate on Y Round to Raise error if result lt minimum i OK Cancel Appl Raise error if result gt maximum A x Pey Parameters Combobox Selection of dye class or product X axis Interpolate on X Y If checked the linear interpolation of intermediate values is switched on Liquor Ratio Pick Up Selection for the Y axis Decision Table Set the range limits in the X and Y axis Set the absolute values in the corresponding table cells Round to Rounds to the entered number of units Example Round to value is 5 unit is kg The result is calculated
132. Displayed Opens the list of SmartMatch points and the graphical display Opens the list of SmartMatch points and the graphical display Points outside the tolerances are deleted and points to be merged are automatically merged 3D graph in concentration space If not checked the graph are in Laboratory space Specifies the maximum points to be displayed Datacolor MATCH e tle Version 1 0 Datacolor Current Population Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Population Dialog Box List and graph of the SmartMatch points used for the housekeeping Refer to Reviewing SmartMatch Points on page 5 87 EP File Smart Tools Window Help i 18 x res Ra 2 Ea Comments dE_k dE Kn dE_5 dE_Sn Mean values 1 76 1 31 lt lt C 57 pts 0 deleted O hidden 00017 e x 1 78 0 63 41 02 5 45 3 2 147 0 0 735 00018 3 17 17 oe x C 4 1 64 0 33 9 41 1 13 1 22 1 211 00019 17 E DEL OK C 4 1 54 Ea 2 00023 7 1 82 0 89 ze a 22 00025 00 12 26 06 17 18 2 01 6 86 6 66 74 97 8 71 12 50 2 03 0 80 2 47 0 051 a zi indie dE imd ec acc 20 0 000 20 0 000 19 0 652 19 0 011 18 12 0 271 54 9 0 280 16 11 0 296 14 9 384 16 0 389 13 10 384 18 0 490 53 11 685 54 0 522 51 13 896 0 575 9 14 832 53 0757 55 15 635 51 0 861 8 16 821 46 0 867 3 16 937 55 0 902 11 17 317 26 1 008 2 17 390 7 1 014 12 20 183 13 1 018 1 anana 61 94 E For Help press F1 DCI
133. E Mi theory to standard Group Soe dE Mi theory to batch ag ct ado E eal Selection Cancel 4 In the Dye Set tab select the fibers Refer to Dye Set Tab on page 7 177 you want to use and Lab Graphic Tab on page 7 178 Z Note The fiber selection is more important for this application than with Datacolor MATCH tile because the program may calculate many recipes with a good colorimetric result but the visual effect depends strongly to the fiber colors of the standard The measure ment of the standard is an average of all colors used for the standard 5 Set the parameters of the Settings Refer to Settings Tab on page 7 120 tab if necessary 6 Click Calculate The Recipe List appears Refer to BLEND Recipe Calculation Result Table on page 7 179 and Review recipe table on page 5 76 7 Select the recipe in the table and save it Datacolor February 2005 5 143 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Result Table of Recipe Calculation DCIMatch Olive Wool 001 re Tie eoe Pret Weber tb al Baa ag les Stannteec 10 0646 11 2013 Recipe with DSS Standard wth DES Recipe Calculation with several Fiber Sets Z Note If you want to calculate a recipe for several fibers e g Polyester Wool you must change the Part to the percentage used for fiber set 1 If the Part is not equal 100 the pr
134. ED GTLN 100 159 MAX BLUE U TRL 100 Quality B1 6 1 7 DEN B16 FABRIC PACKAGE Initial size 50 Current size Sortiment BASIC Comment Build 5 86 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor SmartMatch Reviewing SmartMatch Points F Datacolor 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The aim of the housekeeping function is to eliminate poor points points with a color difference greater than 16 DE CieLab and to reduce the number of similar points by grouping them This is a very complicated mathematical task for the program and generally not all points can be recognized for grouping For this reason we still have a very powerful graphically supported part in the program to check the population for further points to be deleted or grouped The human brain is better suited to this tasks than many program lines Action Result Notes 1 Select SmartMatch List on the The SmartMatch Result List window Basic Data or the context sensi appears Refer to SmartMatch Result tive menu List Window on page 7 94 2 Double click the SmartMatch point The Current Population dialog box to be reviewed appears If a group is selected a message appears with the group ID You can open the group using the Open Popu lation by SM ld function and this ID Refer to Current Population Dialog Box on page 7 125 3 Search SmartMatch points for another population if necessary 4 Click After Analyses to automat
135. EXtile Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Product F Note The delete move copy and rename functions are only available for users having the corresponding access rights A Product is either a dyestuff or an auxiliary 2 Dyestuff Auxiliary Product supplier Supplier specific data e g name address phone number Supplier dye name Dye name of the supplier e g Remazol Terasil etc Stock solution Definition of different dilutions used for optimizing the accu racy of manual dyestuff pipetting and to prevent that the max imum of the dye solution is to be exceeded Dyestuff type Type of the delivered dyestuff e g conc gran supra Dye class Classification of dyes according to the chemical composition and reaction e g disperse reactive Dye description Additional description of the dye e g brilliant dark Dyestuff color Color names e g red green blue Formula setting Settings for recipe calculation used for production e g default unit Supplier dye name dyestuff type dye description and dyestuff color can be used to compose the product name Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data Specifying A New Product It is recommended to specify the subordinate objects first Zz Note 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The stock solution defines dilutions used to optimize pipetting in the laboratory Refer to Specifying A Stock Solution on page
136. FMC2 Jpc79 M amp S89 CIE 34 Datacolor February 2005 7 55 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Manual Input of Tolerance Values Dialog Box Manual Input of Tolerance values Standard Al Data Bo ref gt Ref 10 Plum Brightness Le Chromacity C Hue H 7 56 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Parameter Definition Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Parameter Definition Dialog Box Datacolor The parameter values are defined in a colorant set for each dye and are used to set limits for the recipe calculation Examples Fastness parameter operation parameter etc Li z Name EA Data o ooo d Colored discharge dark i ID cou DISCH D Creation Date 25 03 1999 Modification 14 04 1999 Bee User ID DCI Parameter Type Listbox x Text List a Unit z FormulaS etting Note Save Delete Clear Buttons Formula Setting Opens the Formula Setting dialog box for product settings used by the production software Refer to Formula Setting Dialog Box on page 7 42 Save Saves the displayed parameter definition Delete Deletes the displayed parameter definition after confirmation Clear Clears the fields of the currently displayed tab Close Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved Parameters Name Unique name of the parameter ID Unique identification of the paramete
137. J Delete Parameters Name ID AuxID Creation Date Modification User ID Customer Affinity Grey Quality Style Lab Note Prod Note Type Special Comp Unique name of the quality style Unique identification of the quality style Additional identification of the quality style Date of creation Date of last modification Identification of creating or modifying user Name of the customer Name of the affinity Note on the raw quality style Additional notes for the laboratory Additional notes for production Quality style type If checked the composition of quality style is modified 7 22 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Quality Style Property Sheet 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor Modify button Opens the Special Composition for Quality Style dialog box used for changing the fiber parts Example In a composition of polyester cotton and Lycra the Lycra cannot be dyed If you do not set the Lycra part to 0 a recipe is calculated for the Lycra part too Doo stie Mate sili Jag ID Special Composition for Quality Style x AuxlD Quality Style Mungo Stretch Affinity Customer PES CO LYC 70 25 5 Fibers Affinity Grey Quality Lab Note Prod Note Type SpecialComp Vv Modify SubstrateDelivery Substrate b Substrate Delivery button Opens the Substrate Delivery Dialog box to measure a new substrate
138. LL DATA z Larai Name 4RBatch 09721 93 04780 1 60030 0 951 90 4 40000 E yo RBatch 09721 93 04780 1 60030 0 95190 4 40000 R Action Result Notes 1 Select SmartMatch List on the The SmartMatch Result List window Basic Data or the context sensi appears Refer to SmartMatch Result tive menu List Window on page 7 94 2 Select the SmartMatch point to be saved 3 On the Smart or the context sensi The ID s Point for Creation of Sample tive menu select Save Batch as dialog box appears Sample 4 If necessary correct the ID and click The Shown Reflectance Will Be Stored OK as Sample dialog box appears 5 Accept the default name or correct it 6 Click Insert Datacolor February 2005 5 89 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Manual Input of SmartMatch Points 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The Fast Correction function can be used for entering SmartMatch points Action Result Notes 1 On the context sensitive menu select Fast Correction or press F8 2 Specify any standard the quality and substrate delivery 3 Select the Colorant Set tab 4 Specify the batch name and mea sure the batch that represents the dyeing of the SmartMatch point Laboratory or Production 5 Check the SM Insert box and the type of SmartMatch s Point Specify the Machine and the Pick up L Ratio for production
139. MC 1 2 Sorted and taperd by color taper method minimum path Bach Cancel 2 You can modify the name default is Refer to Script Name Tab on page 7 New Script lt date and time gt of the 167 script and you can describe the script 3 Click Next The following dialog box appears 5 126 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor General Settings a x General Settings Do you want to group or taper or both What are your fundamental colorimetric conditions Method C Group only C Taper only z fi lt No Folder gt ae PAIE III Usain m ZIP LIRE PIE Ola We amp Maximum distance CMC Batch to Standard fi lt Back Cancel 4 Define which sorting method illumi Refer to General Settings Tab on page nant tolerance formula and toler 7 168 ance factor you would like to use 5 Click Next The following dialog box appears Grouping Parameters O x Grouping Parameters You have decided lo group your samples What type of gioupna do you prefer r Sort by M d C dCICMC TO dHICME Maximum distance CMC Batch lo Gioup Center Grouping parameters if CIELab is selected as Pass Fail formula lt Back Cancel Meximum distance CieLab Batch to Group Center Datacolor February 2005 5 127 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile 6 Select the sorting type The grouping parameters you can
140. PB Soda gt Exclude 2 Polyester 70 00 2 Disperse Dispersol Exclude Delete Clear Parameters of the Affinity tab Name Unique name of the affinity ID Unique identification of the affinity AuxID Additional identification of the affinity Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user Fiber Group Selection of the fiber group Search Colorant Sets button Displays in the Colorant Set field the selection boxes for colorant sets Fibers Fiber Name Name of the fiber Fiber Part Share of the fiber in percent The summary of all parts must be 100 Colorant Set Is used to set the link between colorant set and affinity 7 24 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Quality Style Property Sheet 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Fiber Group Tab xl Quality Style Affinity Fiber Group Fiber Name ED atamate hi E 0 PES m ID CO_PES Creation Date 08 04 1999 5 Modification 20 04 1999 AuxlD User ID DCI Available Fibers Selected Fibers Datacolor Polyester gt x a Cotton Cotton Modal Delete Clear Parameters Name ID AuxID Creation Date Modification User ID Unique name of the fiber group Unique identification of the fiber group Additional identification of the fiber group Date of creation
141. ParameterUnit v UnitRightOf alue Iv UnitSeparOf alue Iv PriceF actor Printed decimals BaseUnitT ype FactorUnit Parameters Check boxes Price Factor MetricSysCnvFactor Printed Decimals Decimal Precision Base Unit Type Note 0 Decimal precision 4 ResultUnit fo ie hg v MetricSysCnvF actor DenominatorUnit Delete Clear Close Defines use and placement of the unit Factor for price adjustment to the price of the default unit Default units m kg Factor for conversion to the metric system Only used by Datacolor Process production software Num ber of decimal digits to be printed Only used by Datacolor Process production software Num ber of decimal digits used for calculations Relative Weight Length Volume Other Time Result Unit Factor Unit and Denominator Unit can only be selected for the Base Unit Type Relative Result Unit Factor Unit Denominator Unit Buttons Save Delete Clear Close Absolute unit ID for relative units Nominator unit for composed units g l Denominator unit for composed units g l Saves the currently displayed unit Deletes the currently displayed unit after confirmation Clears the fields of the dialog box Closes the Unit dialog box If data is altered the program requests the data be saved February 2005 7 111 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Options Dialog Box
142. Search Dialog Box on page 7 59 Default Query Selects all combined processes User Query Only for advanced database users Opens the Query Designer Refer to the Datacolor Process documentation Functions of the View menu Find in Value Switches the search bar on and off Reset Resets the search bar Record Count Displays the number of records in the title bar Buttons New Opens the Combined Process window for specifying a new combined process Refer to Specifying Modifying Deleting A Combined Process on page 5 62 Open Opens the Combined Process window with the selected combined process Refer to Specifying Modifying Deleting A Combined Process on page 5 62 Delete Deletes the currently selected combined process after confir mation Quick Search Opens a dialog box used to search combined processes Refer to Quick Search Dialog Box on page 7 59 Duplicate Duplicates the currently selected combined process Close Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Quick Search Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Quick Search Dialog Box Quick search E x Enter your search values Pant 14 Pant 19 Search Type Starts with f QuickSearch Column QuickSearch Row vp C Search in result set IV Name IV AuxlD X Conca 2 Heb Search Type Values Exact match Start with Ends with Con
143. Substrate Substrate blank dyeing 8 Glossary The quality is used to define the type of fabric you are going to dye It contains a refer ence to the composition and describes whether the fabric is used for exhaust or contin uous dyeing or both The operation specifies the sequence of action to be done during the dyeing Actions may be parameters e g temperature volume or products e g chemicals etc The parameter values e g fastness are defined in a colorant set for each dye and used to set limits for the recipe calculation Refer to Dye process and Combined process In match prediction used to take in account differences in dyestuff build up The dye stuff concentrations are multiplied with the process factor Values Exhaust Continuous Cold Pad Batch A Product is either a dyestuff or an auxiliary Refer to Correction A process which identifies and calculates the amounts of each coloring matter in a material so that the final color looks like i e matches the given sample in a specified light source and price It is possible to get several combinations which match the sam ple so the process can give the most cost effective one Kubelka Munk coefficient of Scattering The optical property that describes the scatter ing of light by a Colorant or mixture of colorants Measured color stored with its spectral values The diffusion or redirection of radiant energy encountering particles of a different
144. Terasil TT Fie Colorant set Tools Instrument Window Help 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes lei al GIARRE DE bl ci 9 Colorant Set Dye Process Creation Date Type Exhaust Dye Class Disperse dE Sigma 0 00 0 0 Unit Yo Disperse Exhaust Terasil 08 04 1999 08 14 08 Modification Date 04 04 2000 17 05 28 Industry Type Textil Substrate Delivery PES Blanc Dyeing LigRatioOrPickup 10 000 Oneratinn Created R 40 60 E 20 Min Conc Interpol Aonotony s_Subs foual colorant Terasil Yellow 4G Show and print Auziliary recipe 600 650 700 750 Strength nm 08 04 1999 08 14 08 08 04 1999 11 03 11 0 000 Measured z Li 7 100 000 Terasil Orange 2RL 08 04 1999 08 14 08 08 04 1999 11 03 11 0 000 0 000 2 000 Measured aj 7 100 000 Terasil Red 5G 08 04 1999 08 14 08 08 04 1999 11 03 11 0 000 0 000 2 000 Measured D Zi 100 000 Terasil Red R 08 04 1999 08 14 08 08 04 1999 11 03 12 0 000 0 000 2 500 Measured L 7 100 000 Terasil Brill Blue BGE 200 08 04 1999 08 14 08 08 04 1999 11 03 12 0 000 0 000 5 000 Measured L 7 200 000 MEE Ter acil Prill Rie 301 NA na 1999 na 1a na NR na 1999 11 0317 nnn n nnn a nnn Meaciwed A M 7 annam Z For Help press F1 Color codes of the fields Green Blue Pale yellow Red Buttons Datacolor Show and Print Auxiliary Recipe Calculate Single All Store End Calibration
145. Tools menu Product Supplier Unique name of the product supplier Contact Person Name of the contact person Phone Number Phone Number of the contact person Fax Number Fax Number of the contact person Address Address of the contact person City City of the contact person Country Country of the contact person Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 7 90 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Customer List Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Customer List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Customers on page 5 39 Customer Name Unique name of the customer Contact Person Name of the contact person Phone Number Phone Number of the contact person Fax Number Fax Number of the contact person Address Address of the contact person City City of the contact person Country Country of the contact person Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Recipe List Window Datacolor Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools
146. Used Fibers 5 145 Calculation of the Theoretical Color Needed to Correct the Filer Lot 5 147 Recipe Correction aaa 5 148 BLEND Fast Correction neinitiati iati iasi stiinta insa iei ateaie 5 150 Displaying and Printing Existing BLEND Recipes cccccccsssseeeseeeeeeeees 5 151 Recipe OUIDUL see cae acea cae ai a cates d d it ii i devs i a ia 5 151 FREGIOS PISTON scai ata ca ata ta dala i a Baa at de ba a pia 5 152 6 Maintenance and Error Handling Maintenance of the Spectrophotometer cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeens 6 2 Maintenance of the Database cmeneeeeeeeee ere neeeennnaeeee nn nanaaeeeee anna 6 2 Dele Data inca 00 oc i do ear kash ae eee Bai A a rata c 6 2 Backup acts EA 0908 Sai da oa aaa Sa dida tie E 6 2 Datacolor February 2005 TOC 5 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide TOC 6 Contents Error Handling ci citite cect cba edtivectevcthocus cused inves dna a aa alani ide 6 2 Error Messages n ca isaac ul aan ia one ata a dB bene Bahai iri li aaa aia 6 2 Windows and Dialog Boxes Explorer scrisese icoane Diete A Sieg aa isa adaptata dna dala as 7 2 Overview Window mmmmnn nenea anna neam nana 7 2 General Menu Functions mmmmn nenea nenea nana nana 7 4 Toolbar FUNCHONS ss ia eee t it i a a ii iat a al e 7 7 Folder Structure nec cea eta tacut hanes eta dead a calit cca ca 7 9 Functions of the Basic Data Menu ccceccessseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesee
147. User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes More Opens the Options dialog box that allows changes to the graph display Visible Curves Manual Data Entry If checked it is possible to alter the values in the table or the points of the curve manually If finished click Calculate to recalculate the curve Table The results of the calculation are displayed Checksum Summary of all values Delta R Clicking the button adds positive or negative values to the fields 7 74 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Sample Input Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Coordinates Tab Sample Input i x Nae Demo Data Batches Description ABAT12 PI i Data information Input Specular Date Reflectance Manual Included e C Transmission Instrumental Excluded Wed Mar 27 16 12 15 2002 Spectral Coordinates Type RZ C wv C CIE Lab C CIE LCH m Coordinates 27 1 597 fi 8 4946 g 49808 Illuminant D65710 v __Cea Save As Close Parameters Used for specifying recipes manually Type XYZ xyZ CIE Lab CIE LCH Coordinates Coordinate values The result depends on type selection Illuminant Name of the illuminant Color Color display Datacolor February 2005 7 75 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Colorant Set List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table co
148. User Changes Computers 066 3 5 Upgrading Your Purchase cccccccccccececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 Removing Datacolor MATCH oo ccssssesssssssessssessescssssessssessnsensnsenseeees 3 6 Datacolor February 2005 TOC 1 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Contents 4 Configuration and Administration User Administration none ta m mn pe na in i bn a tim e i 4 2 Specifying Modifying and Deleting Users Data m mmm 4 2 Changing the Password cox caca ante aaa ta a lot e aa 4 2 PACCOSS IRIQUISS nas coala at aaa o atat aa ta a Deea a aaa za ada 4 3 Browser Customizing n eseist saca aaa aaa nasi sania aia sai 4 6 Browse Fite rs sn i cca inca iun cl oa a ii ca n i a 4 8 Sing Browse Filters ci apei ea ea ata ani ial a uta aaa aaa aa 4 8 Disabling Browse Filters n cc zace e ia e a e gt e da ta 4 9 Exporting and Sending Browse Filters m nenea 4 9 Importing Browse Filters nt coco o se aaa oo oa oa ee ae 4 10 Importing Browse Filters directly from the E mail mcmeeeeeeeeenneeeee 4 10 Defining UNIS scai ceia c ina cai aa aia aa din ba aaa aha dada iba 4 11 Options capota tea oa aa 0000 ea aa nada iaca a aaa di aaa da aaa de i inc 4 11 Import and Export s iesi inci in insecte daia da c au clase aaa ae ai aaa iata t 4 12 Exporting Data i is i aaa eta Za sia aaa anina bat aa ia alani ana Dia ad a a 4 12 Importing Data a a hoea aneo sue aeaaeae ae raem aa aaa a aa
149. Version 1 0 Datacolor Backing Up Using Sybase Utilities 4 Configuration and Administration Backing Up Using Sybase Utilities The backup utility is used to store running databases database files transaction logs and write files You can access the backup utility using Sybase Central or using the system command line to call the dbbackup utility This utility can be used for specifying batch or command files The backup utility copies the database file and the transaction log of a single database Backing Up Using Sybase Central Backing Up A Running Database Action Result 1 Start Sybase Central 2 Connect the database Right click the database and select Backup on the context sensitive menu 4 Follow the instructions of the wizard Backing Up A Database File or A Running Database Action Result 1 Start Sybase Central 2 Open the Utilities folder in the left panel 3 Double click the Backup Database in the right panel 4 Follow the instructions of the wizard Datacolor February 2005 4 17 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration The dbbackup Command Syntax Dbbackup switches path Switches Switch Description c keyword value Database connection parameters If the connection parameters are not specified the parameters of the SQLCONNECT environment variable will be used if they are set Parameters eng engine dbn database nam
150. _Name FOULARD lUser 1DE Process Type Name Visible Operations Regular Additions Operations Name LabOperation_ID ProdOperation_ID created 08 04 1999 modified 24 09 1999 by DCI Process type Unique process name The normal operation list is displayed The operation list for an addition process is displayed Ordinal number Description of the operation Default No operation name Unique identification of the operation used in the laboratory Unique identification of the operation used for production If the calculator is highlighted the operation is based ona formula A double click on the calculator opens the Formula Edit window Refer to Specifying Formulae on page 5 66 Valid machine group for the treatment MachineGrouplD MachineGroupName Unique identification of the machine group Name of the machine group February 2005 7 63 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes 7 64 Context sensitive menu of the Operations table Open Operation Opens the Treatment Operation dialog box Refer to Speci fying Modifying Deleting A Combined Process and Specify ing Modifying Deleting An Operation on page 5 64 Edit Operation Count Opens the Formula Edit window Refer to Specifying For mulae on page 5 66 Clear Operation Count Refer to Specifying Modifying Deleting An Operation on page 5 64 Context sensitive menu
151. a ana a aasan itli nodl 4 13 Importing Colorant Sets am scsi ose detest ect Anne dt dec a e d aa 4 14 Importing and Exporting Samples as QTX Files sesseeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 16 Backing Up Using Datacolor MATCH ete ooo nenea eeaaaeaeaze 4 16 Backing Up Using Sybase Utilities meeee nene n ne naanaeeeeeeenaaaa 4 17 Backing Up Using Sybase Central cmmmncecceoeee eee nana aaa 4 17 Backing Up A Running Database e nenea 4 17 Backing Up A Database File or A Running Database 4 17 The dbbackup Command eee 4 18 Importing and Exporting Print Forms Tools Menu cucerea 4 19 Exporting Print Forms Tools Menu 0 seseeeccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 4 19 Importing Print Forms Tools Menu mmm 4 19 ASCII Output Option nn aci cetei oi a iai ii ar a alia i e a 4 20 Specifying ASCI FOS a iada a at adc oa data oa at cb aa 4 20 ASCII Output of Recipes nene 4 23 ASCII Output of Basic Data eee 4 23 Calibrating the Monitors Using Datacolor SPYDER2 cccecccseeeeeeeeee 4 24 Sending E mails ses ceai cs ia aa di tea ca tt a 4 25 Mailing Basic Data Lab Dye Lots Colorant Sets mmceeeeeereneaeeee 4 25 Mailing Recipe Tables sc aa oes o a a a dil a ial stones 4 25 Specifying Print Forms Using the Pager cmme nene nenea eennenananaaae 4 26 Starting the Pager soccer 2 n ia na Da t aa aa sei 4 26 Specifying A New Print Form s
152. a manually created recipe Refer to Fixed parameter in Colorant Set Tab on page 7 118 Calculate Starts the recipe calculation Refer to Calculation of A New Recipe Series on page 5 69 Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving Data that not has been saved will be lost Process Data for Fiber Matching Tab ot a Standard aes i sites ree L Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Save Available fibersets Calculate pissa jo e E a S M _ Wool Fett T Wool Fett Approximation KSP Baumwolle F KSP Baumwolle Approx ___ Cj Jay 1 Wool Set Used fiberset Wool Felt Part 100 Curent total l 0 Standard S e i Parameters Available Fiber sets Table with the specified fiber sets Used Dye Set Selected fiber set Part Part of the selected fiber set Refer to Recipe Calculation with several Fiber Sets on page 5 144 Current Total Display of the currently used part Standard Section of the Standard to be used Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor 7 176 Datacolor BLEND Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Dye Set Tab Match a Standard Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Jave Fiberset WoolFelt Part 100 Calculate Batch and color difference j a ee Share Max Of Share gt R dE Mi theory to standard Group dE Mi theory
153. a teeta Aa ate aaa ct dean o Dac Li ana Ga oa a Pe aaa ua ata 5 119 Start Datacolor SORT scitice ata a tra aa ac ata i Eini Erots Ra 5 120 Starting the Standalone Version mmmmeeeeereernnneeeeeeeeeeee 5 120 Starting from Datacolor MATCH Textile bites haa A A ata ba tect Data 70003 as 5 120 Open arSORT JOD cx sectie 28 oi ata ceia de gl a ai p i dau ao aaa 5 121 Specifying a New SORT job cecnnnne nenea anonime aaa eee 5 122 Modifying 2 SOR TJOD si ase tacea c ae odaia Pet bal ta a a ba dale eat 5 125 Specifying A New Sort Script nenea nana ana 5 126 Modifying a Sort Script iei ozana ae ct date ur bd dtp e iasi 5 130 Maintain the Sample Property eee 5 131 Pre Selections of User Defined Fields eccceccceceeeteeeseeeeerneneetes 5 132 SORT job Definition Options eee eee nana 5 133 Datacolor BLEND Option ns seamana la sn ataman alina 5 134 Starting Datacolor BLEND account aa e da ea 5 135 Starting Datacolor BLEND i c c020 2 usca 03 ea east ches iaa teeters 5 135 Specifying A New Fiber Set 2 ccccecccceccceceeesessseeeenseeeeeeesseneneceteeeeee 5 135 Black and White Fibers e oa eat ca dese assent cote Ca aa ee tatal 5 136 Colored FIDET 152 ec e o la tatal Da e Da tat dna aa 5 140 Recipe Calculation ea aa aaa 5 142 Recipe Calculation with several Fiber Sets cccceseceeeeeeeeeees 5 144 Recipe Calculation with An Existing Production Lot of
154. acolor Colorant Set Datacolor 2 Overview Calibration methods Automatic full calibration E E x Type of approximation Measured C Smooth C Automatic Cancel Measured default The calculated absorptions are the same as the measured absorptions The calculated dye concentrations meet all measured dye concentrations All dEs are zero Smoothed Adjusts the dye concentrations for larger variations in dye strength Automatic Normally the Measured method is better for low concentra tions and the Smoothed method for high ones The automatic method transits continuously from Measured to Smoothed February 2005 2 5 Datacolor MATCH E il User s Guide 2 Overview Combined Process F The user has to define combined processes and operations Y Calibration d alibration dye p Colorant set process A i Treatment Y i Teal EA Combined process Treatment A combined process is used to describe the entire dyeing process either for laboratory or production A treatment is generated for each calibration dye process type e g Exhaust Continuous linked to the combined process Treatment A treatment consists of one or more operations describing the dyeing process for labo ratory and or production Operation The operation specifies the sequence of action to be done during the dyeing Actions may be parameters e g temperature volume
155. all color difference to a newly measured standard Search amp correct Ba DaTa o Standard oe 074 gt 2000 O07 4F ReePALL DATA Affinity foz Hw POLYESTER Etoseaeh 0 Seach sean BALL DATA ee L Tolerance Standard Select the new standard Affinity Quality Style Customer Tolerance Selection criteria dE to Search Upper limit for dE Search button Searches for recipes If recipes are found they are listed in the Search Results dialog box Refer to Search Results Dialog Box on page 7 110 Recipes without SmartMatch information appear in the corresponding box They cannot be used to calculate a new recipe Datacolor February 2005 7 109 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Search Results Dialog Box List of recipes that can be used for the new calculation DCIMatch Search results for standard 2000 074F File Search Tools Instrument Window Help Er RRS Be CEIS RecipeName CSL Ef ome om3 Creation Date Dyestuffs 2001 LR 04691 014 G S 7351 1 F S 5031 1 2 69999 311681 984579 2001 06 25 08 49 16 INTSL BL 2001 LR 04055 014 G S 7726 9 F S 0318 75 2 90308 1 67375 1 19537 2001 05 25 14 36 02 INTSL BL 2001 LR 03902 01A G S 2698 1 F S 3717 16 2 96059 646118 803521 2001 05 16 22 44 47 INTSL BL 2001 LR 04875 014 G S 2230 1 F S 4090 16 3 10535 742305 895555 2001 07 06 11 46 14 INTSL BL 368316 0814 00 00 4 18611 979327 540281 2001 09 06 0
156. ame LiquorRatioOrPickup Dyestuffs gt Remazol Yellow R Gran Remazol Red 3B Remazol Brilliant Blue BB gran 133 Add Dyestuff Manual Correction co too 24 Go Expand Collaps Unto Values 0002 ELEFANT 040400 1105 NODDZELEFANT 040400 1105 275 2 04 04 2000 11 03 04 26 07 2002 09 38 52 Cotton knitted not mercerised BAT 15 SS ee Reactive Cold Pad Batch Silicate Remazol SPB Silicate gil The recipe is displayed in a tree structure Data that can be modified is displayed with a green background Buttons Expand Collaps Undo Go manual correction 7 124 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Expands the tree structure Closes the tree structure Cancels the last modifications as long as you have not saved the recipe Refer to Manual Graphical Correction on page 5 107 Datacolor Current Population Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Current Population Dialog Box Current population xj se All Data ae Foca mi 0 II E CEN J H eC Cd ps Datamatch Quality Style PES 3000 pe All Data Substrate Dacroni 001 Sample L 20 0603 a o 42811 b 0 586241 Size dE 250 Process Evaluate Cancel E tau Data a Eep bocsi ne pe All Data cer l 4 Labor Production Machine Dyeset Disperse Dispersol iat m Products Dispersol Green CEB Dispersol Red C4G G
157. ance Combined Process Operation Sample Fiber Fiber Group Affinity Substrate Delivery Browse Date Illuminant List Sample List Color Type List Tolerance List refer to menu Basic Data Display Print ASCII Output Recipe History Match Match in Background refer to menu Recipe Colorant Set V N U WW WOW NY OW VW PP BF BRB BW Ww WOW Ww WOW WW Ww WwW WwW WwW Ww vw wD Colorant Set Calibration 4 4 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor User Administration Datacolor 4 Configuration and Administration Level Lower Levels Included Option gt OO U U N N NONO N W WO Q N N OO Wo U Wo WwW N NOUN N N Tools Colorant Set Display Print SmartMatch All menu options of SmartMatch Batch Series All menu options of SmartMatch Send Mail Scan Mail Production Dye Lot Production Recipe Administration Tool Bar Status Bar User Manager Change Password User Administration Refer to menu Tools Options exception dialog tabs View Dispenser Stock Solution Unit Selection Print Import Refer to menu Tools Instrument All menu options of Instrument February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration Browser Customizing X DCIMatch Overview Browse columns for explorer Data type Fibergroup X UO CREATIONDATE _ FIBERGROUP_AUxID UO FIBERGROUP_ID FIBERGROUP_NAM LZ MODIFIC
158. and Administration Importing Browse Filters Action Result 1 In the Define Filter tab of the User The Open dialog box appears The file Definable Filters dialog box click with the extension dmf can be Import opened and imported Importing Browse Filters directly from the E mail Action Result 1 On the File menu of the overview All attached files with the extension window click Scan Mail dmf are searched und displayed in the Loading Filters from Mail dialog box 2 Select the requested files and click The selected files are imported Load 4 10 Datacolor MATCH tile version 1 0 Datacolor Defining Units 4 Defining Units Configuration and Administration Action Result 1 On the Tools menu select Define The Unit dialog box appears Units 2 Select a unit or specify a new name Specify or alter the parameters 4 Click Save Refer to Unit Dialog Box on page 7 111 The new or modified unit is saved Options The Options dialog box is used to define the view of ID and AuxID the dispenser con nection the use of stock solutions the selection of units and the paper orientation Action Result 1 On the Tools menu select Options The Option dialog box appears 2 Select the corresponding tab 3 Specify or alter the parameters Refer to Options Dialog Box on page 7 4 Click Save 112 The new or modified option is saved
159. and the graph show the colorimetric data Evaluate buttons User Add scale back by Computer Add Optimal dE Min Add dE button Min Add dH button Buttons Cancel Show Print ASCII Export Close Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Print Displays the colorimetric data in a print preview ASCII Creates a text file using a specified form Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Used to reduce the Amount by value in Used for absolute tolerance specification Optimizes dE only with positive adds Removes all negative adds Recalculates the correction using the dE limit given in the Compute To Limit field dE must be higher than the dE limit Recalculates the correction using the dH limit given in the Compute To Limit field Closes the dialog box without saving Data that not has been saved will lost Opens a print preview Prints the correction data Saves the correction data to a file in the ASCII format Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Closes the Production Correction dialog box Datacolor Fast Correction Recipe Input Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Fast Correction Recipe Input Dialog Box Datacolor General parameters Standard Buttons Save Laboratory Production Match Batch Match Standard Datacolor Tools Evaluate Cancel Selected color to be dyed target color Saves the correction data Used for
160. ant Set Window 5mcicsoata oaza iti Cica onneiadansa dani ineaiagetaseinas studies 7 77 BUITONS ss azot a a at a Da i a a al a a eens 7 77 Header Information see a a a eee 7 78 Graphical Display ea 7 78 Colorant TAG hs energii sait aa na e nau e aa 7 79 Calibration Series Table eee nana 7 80 Components in One Calibration Series Table ceee nenea 7 81 Create Calibration Series Dialog Box mmmeeeee eee eee eee nnannannaeee 7 82 Alternate Substrate Information Dialog Box ccceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 7 84 Illuminant List Window ce enma mama aa 7 85 Sample List Window ie a vaio dana asta adune intai asist vatuite 7 85 Color Type List WindOW nisa vana anina sania ien ae aiaaamanaacadaiaciainuiaaa 7 85 Tolerance List Win GOW miei cn uiei evisersvessvecsasstsateeseeene asa aan nasi guai anuoipuaasanias 7 86 Parameter List Window cei eee ea aa ce aid dna ae i a ae 7 86 Fiber List WING OW is csivscscnncesncsecracevcsceverexceecvcedeudescvcsecceessscusesereudeudsssnrssvveersserts 7 86 Fiber Group List Window ccc eee nene 7 87 Substrate Delivery List Window cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenees 7 87 Quality Style List Window mmm eee nnnnnee nana emnenneeeennnnane ana 7 87 Affinity List Wind OW mireasa ian aaa m cn Donna tai aia 7 88 Dye Process List Window suie anca ana ia aaa aaa maaaa a aaa aaaa ata a dai i 7 88 February 200
161. ars Datacolor Sort Starting from Datacolor MATCH te BA nee 1 In the Overview window of the Datacolor MATCH Textile explorer click the Datacolor SORT icon The SORT job window appears 5 120 Datacolor MATCH e tle Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Open a SORT job Result Notes Action 1 Double click the job in the SORT The Job load progress message box job window shows the progress of the loading Job load progress x Batch load progress Clustering progress 0 Tapering progress Cluster 0 Taper 0 If the loading is finished the Job Result window appears Refer to Job Result Window on page 7 154 Datacolor February 2005 5 121 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying a New SORT job Action Result Notes 1 Select either the option New Sort The New Sort Job wizard starts The Job from the Datacolor Sort menu sort job name may be modified and a or from the context sensitive menu description can be entered into the description field Refer also to Sort Job Maintenance Dialog Box on page 7 160 Note Z Depending to the settings in the Sort Job Definition Options you may not see all pages of the wizard Refer to SORT job Definition Options on page 5 133 New Sort Job Wizard E x Welcome to the New Sort Job Wizard This wizard helps you
162. art gives the commercial names for the individual dyes the other part of the index gives the color index number and lists the commercial names for the dyes using that number Refer to Color index number Every dye is given a color index number based on its chemical type The same number is given to the dyes with the same chemical structure For example Resolin Red FB and Dispersol Red B2B both have the color index number CI Disperse Red 60 The index number is divided into four sections CI stand for color index and is displayed in every color index number The next section is the dye type e g Disperse Acid etc The third section is the color according to a defined list off color names e g Red Yellow Orange The last number is increased every time a new dye is added to the index in the example above Cl Disperse Red 60 is the 60th red disperse dye to be added to the index Refer to Color index A coloring matter a dye a pigment or an ink Measured color of a sample The color type is the target color to be dyed Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Combined process Correction Dye class Dye fiber group Dye process Dye strength Dyestuff type Fast correction Fiber Fiber group K K S Kubelka Munk theory Laboratory correction Metameric match Metamerism Monotone data Off shade Datacolor 8 Glossary A combined process is used to describe the entire dyeing pro
163. asurement Stone Wool A fiber with the name FIB_Stone Wool is created These automatically created fibers cannot be used in the normal matching routine They are hidden February 2005 5 145 REE a ee Standard a Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings o swe Fiberset WoolFelt Part 4 100 Calculate Batch and color RIERCS Esec poa nea sb Stone W ool dE 17 36 dL 1581 dC 6 87 dH 205 da 5 25 db 488 Batch refused 400 500 600 700 Share 14 00 Max Of Share 4872 _ gt R TNT ERE ASE ELI GEES Da SECTE E eT EI RE TE DZ EEE EEE dE Mi theory to batch Bem a Delete Selection ha _Save a IE ERE BE mp igo SOND LT Sete Sen Ceempuul Fixed manger Manor Relation m Cancel The proposal Max Of Share for the Batch Fiber is given with 48 72 For this exam ple the share is reduced to 14 00 Some information can be get in the graph The blue curve represents the batch the green curve the standard and the red curve is the theo retical curve representing the part that is used share Very important is that the red curve is below the green curve of the standard Calculated recipes with 14 of the batch already produced pcimateh Coffee 001 File Table Tools Instrument Window Help EERI CEN CieLab Detault D65 CMCCONO2 A CMCCONO2 F11 Black wool fett Yellow wool tett 39 0368
164. asurement Main Window Measurement conditions Il Specular INCL Bo Aperture LAV 3 Flashes 2 ha UV 68 0 Shr Cut off NONE lt lt eo gt gt DEL Refresh Color OR Brightness L Chromacity C Hue h Average 78 847 9 649 155 377 Deviation 0 001 0 002 0 006 450 500 550 600 650 700 Total Selected 2 Dev dE DEI DU S iones 0 2 Com1 19200 N 8 amp 2 Mult 4 Tol Cmc F 0 80 l 2 0 c 1 0 Time left 7 59 4 Place the sample on the spectropho The results are displayed in the graph tometer and click the Measure but and in the table Average and ton deviation are calculated continually For each additional measurement Refer to Multiple Tab on page 7 16 move the sample and click Measure Measurement Dialog Box again 5 In the table cancel the unusable Average and deviation are calculated measurements using the mouse continually Click Accept Now to save the mea surement before the specified num ber is done Datacolor February 2005 5 23 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Manual Input and Modification of Samples Samples can be inserted manually and existing samples can be modified using the Sample Input dialog box Manual Input of Samples Action Result Notes 1 On context sensitive menu of the The Sample Input dialog box appears Sample list box select Sample Refer to Sample Input Dialog Box on page 7 72 2 Type the
165. atacolor Create calibration serie A q Copy of Wool Yellow Copy of Wool Yellow Iv Copy of Wool Yellow 100 00 5 Measure the sample Refer to Calibrating Your Spectropho tometer on page 5 10 and Measure ment on page 5 20 6 Click Accept The new color fiber is added to the fiber set The program goes back to the Fiber Set window 7 Specify the other colored fibers in the same way Datacolor February 2005 5 141 Recipe Calculation Action Result Notes 1 On the context sensitive menu ofthe The Match dialog box appears Recipe List window click Match Refer to BLEND Match Dialog Box on page 7 176 Standard g sot foe ees Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Save Available fibersets Calculate Used fiberset Part 100 Curent total 0 Standard a ZI caneel_ 2 Select the standard 3 Select a fiber set by double clicking The fiber set appears in the list box the name Used fiber set The Part is set to 100 5 142 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor ho Standard mee _ Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Save Fiberset Wool Felt Part 100 Calculate Batch and color difference o F E E All Data i on a Lu EI 50000700 Shae Mae Share me d
166. atacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Explorer Toolbar Functions mn 12 3 4 General toolbar 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 Datacolor Overview Datacolor SORT Datacolor MONITOR SmartMatch Datacolor BLEND Basic Data 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes ase E e SSE ee ae ee EE thas 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Opens the Overview window Refer to Datacolor SORT Option on page 5 118 Opens the Batch Series List window Refer to Datacolor MONITOR Option on page 5 106 Opens the SmartMatch List window Refer to SmartMatch Result List Window on page 7 94 Approving on page 5 84 and Manual Input of SmartMatch Points on page 5 90 Opens the basic data application and displays the basic data list of the last session Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 and Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 Calibration colorant set Recipe Instrument Calibration Save Print Close Help Opens the Colorant Set application used for colorant set preparation and displays the Colorant Set List window Refer to Specifying Colorant Sets on page 5 47 Colorant Set List Window on page 7 76 Opens the Recipe application used for matching correc tion and printing recipes and displays the Recipe List win dow Refer to Recipe Calculation Matching on page 5 67 Correction on page 5 91 Displaying and Printing Existing Recipes on page 5 104 Recipe List Window on
167. atacolor Tools Opens the Datacolor Tools application for color quality con trol Standard and batch are transferred automatically from the Datacolor MATCH amp t database to the Datacolor Tools database Evaluate Print Displays the colorimetric data in a print preview ASCII Creates a text file using a specified form Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving Data that not has been saved will be lost Datacolor February 2005 7 179 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide Dye Set Tab Correction for Wool Olive 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Standard Olive Wool aT Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Fiberset Wool Felt Part 100 BF 50 400 500 600 dE Mi theory to standard dE Mi theory to batch Selection Parameters Fiber set E nm Batch amp color difference for CieLab Defaul D65 T aed E Dlive Wool 1 71 Ea dE 1 20 dL 1 06 dC 0 56 dH 0 08 da 0 06 db 0 56 Batch refused H r a ae e ari EEE E Shown 14 selected II i7 Baa ss ColorT ools r Evaluate mm 1 Print ASCII Protected The fiber set name and the part of the corre sponding fibre set in are displayed on the top Batch and Color Difference Information line Table Selection of the measured sample produced according to the recipe to be corrected Differences dE and dL between standard
168. ation ColorTools r Evaluate Print ASCII Cancel 2 In the Batch and Color Difference field measure or select the sample 3 If necessary alter the data in the Refer to Matching on page 5 74 sec dyestuffs table tion Selecting dyestuffs for matching on page 5 71 4 Click Correction The BLEND Correction Recipe Dialog Box appears Refer to Specifying Modifying and Deleting Objects on page 5 8 5 148 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Total baichaze 500 vfo New balchsine 543 063 R 3 Dra E Me fds sd 2 Corou t kre e Scalaback ty fo x CE waj 5 In the BLEND Correction Recipe Refer to BLEND Recipe Calculation Dialog Box dialog box you can look Result Table on page 7 179 at the result of the matching The The BLEND Correction Recipe can be ae color differences between Stan configured Refer to View Configura dard and Batch are displayed tion Dialog Box Laboratory Correction Click Show for displaying a print Table on page 7 100 preview Click Print to print the recipe data 6 Click Save The corrected recipes laboratory and production are saved Datacolor February 2005 5 149 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide BLEND Fast Correction 5 150 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The Fast Correction function is used for corrections without an existing recipe It is ba
169. ation User ID Tolerance Name Tolerance Factor Address button Unique name of the customer Unique identification of the customer Additional identification of the customer Date of creation Date of last modification Identification of creating or modifying user Unique name of the tolerance definition Using the context sensitive menu you can open the Option input form to specify tolerances Tolerance factor Opens the Address dialog box Datacolor February 2005 7 43 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Address Dialog Box CI xl Name ey All Data E wee ee ID gS Creation Date 14 04 1999 z Modification 16 11 1999 urip User ID DEI Address E oldstreet Address 2 City London ZipCode State Country United Kingdom ContactPerson Ms Lookes PhoneNum 004 1454 8212121 FaxNum 004 1454 8212128 E Mail Parameters Name Unique name of the customer ID Unique identification of the customer AuxID Additional identification of the customer Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user Address Address of the product supplier Address 2 Additional address of the product supplier City Address Name of the city Zip Code Zip code Country Name of the country Contact Person Phone Number Name of the contact person Phon
170. ation for more information Action Result Notes 1 In the Overview window click The Operation List window appears Operation 2 Double click the correspond The Operation window appears Refer ing table row to select an to Operation Window on page 7 67 for operation for modifying or information about the parameters deletion On the context sensitive or The Operations browse box appears Basic Data menu of the It is used to search operations or open Operation List window the Operation dialog box for specifying select Operation a new operation Refer to Data Han dling on page 5 2 3 New operation In the Operations browse The Operation window appears box click New In the Operation dialog box click the button for specify ing a new operation 4 Specify or modify data in the Gen eral tab Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor 5 64 Specifying Combined Processes Datacolor In the Control Line tab specify the sequence of actions Using the con text sensitive menu or the insert key new actions are inserted before the selected one Using the cursor down key an action is inserted at the end of the table Possible actions Call off Specifies a group of products dyestuffs and auxiliaries that can be used together weighted dispensed and defines a new bath if the dye clas
171. ave Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration Customizing Graphs The background color of all graphical displays and printouts is white while text and curves are black with different line styles and the grid is activated by default You can have different settings for background and text color of the graphical displays and the printout Modification of these settings are stored in the registry table of the database You can only modify the graphical settings in programs with graphical options such as the colorant set or the measurement program Setting Colors for Graphs Reset 3hoose background color Ka EJ 5hoose text color RAE 1 Change Color Basic colors Basic colors foes oe Ere Ser e ae Sta za a CeCe hv hve eee Font En EEn S amp S LASA A ASA EE v Points ioe A A A A AA A E EES Log View LA n ne NNE EEE EEE More EEE Oe af Visible Curves gt Custom colors Custom colors BEEBE 5 5 5 Eee 5 5 5 5 1g geese eg Tigges ese Define Custom Colors gt gt Define Custom Colors gt gt O OK Cancel Action Result 1 On the context sensitive menu The Choose Background Color dialog select Change Color O for the dis play or Change Printer Color for color printers 2 Select the background color and click OK 8 3 Select the text color and click OK 8 box appears The Choose Text Color dialog box ap
172. b and C Graphical View nenea 7 131 Example of Manually Checked SmartMatch Points 7 132 Comments Used for SmartMatch Points 00 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 7 133 Example of SmartMatch Points to Be Deleted ccccccecceeteeteeees 7 134 Import Dialog BOX veccscecasecdevacennvscesbincanssicsvenianendecwadddesdedusdecenedeeaeiunebiedswerievves 7 134 Export Dialog BOX ieri nisi ua nr tati o ie e n a ca Ti ec 7 135 Form Maintenance Dialog Box ccmenee eee neeeennneeeen nn naanaeeeeeeeeaaaa 7 136 TOC 8 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Contents Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide Pager WiIndOW iss et ta i a ot iai c i duct a il ll ci a la bei 7 137 Page View Designer specific Menu Functions ccee nenea 7 137 Page View Designer specific Toolbar Functions eeseeeseereee 7 138 Datacolor MONITOR sista anna ra uit a m fa a aa ia iinan aaa ia din aa 7 139 Batch Series WiNdOW 2 tatea cae ae aaa le te a aa ta pa 7 139 Create Batch Series Dialog Box mmnnnnnnocce eee neoane aaa 7 140 Batch Series Script Name Dialog Box mere 7 141 Batch Series Type Dialog Box c cccccccceeeeeeeeesceenecteeeeteseesteneeneeenes 7 142 Batch Series Relation Dialog Box cce nenea 7 143 Select Current Illuminants Dialog Box 7 144 Datacolor TICKET sisciiceiiscesdecestecscsectenssitestscvesescnevsicncsdvesdiuestnestubevsecstesscsesssanss 7 145 Rec
173. ce dyestuffs 5 82 review 5 76 round dyestuff concentrations 5 81 rules for re dyeing 5 71 selecting dyestuffs 5 71 settings 5 74 February 2005 9 7 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide specify a new series 5 69 specify theoretical reflectance values 5 96 window Datacolor TICKET 7 147 Recipe BLEND display and print 5 151 Recipe calculation explanation 8 4 introduction 5 67 overview 2 7 Recipe editor dialog box 7 124 Recipe list window 7 91 window Datacolor TICKET 7 145 Recipe Table window Datacolor BLEND 7 179 Recipe table window 7 121 Re dye rules 5 71 Release group s of SmartMatch points 5 88 Re measure calibration sample 5 51 Remove bad SmartMatch points automatically 5 86 bad SmartMatch points manually 5 87 Datacolor Match Textile 3 6 dyestuff from a colorant set 5 54 Rename print forms 4 28 Requirements system requirements for Datacolor Match Tex tile 3 2 Review recipe 5 76 Root recipe dialog box Datacolor TICKET 7 149 Round dyestuff concentrations of recipes 5 81 Rules re dying 5 71 S S explanation 8 4 Sample explanation 8 4 import export QTX format 4 16 measure 5 20 multiple measurement 5 21 until tolerance measurement 5 22 Sample input dialog box 7 72 9 8 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 9 Index Sample list window 7 85 Sample property dialog box Datacolor SORT 7 169 Scattering explanation 8 4 Search and correct dialog box 7 109 Search results
174. centration space All SmartMatch points within the color difference selected for the radius displayed in the dialog title are colored with different gray shades Points with the same shade in both columns belong together This shows clearly how much the color difference depends to the space you are using to evaluate the points Note It is necessary to look at the color differences of both spaces to assess the quality of a SmartMatch point Navigation in the graph The selected point in the SmartMatch table click the color patch is displayed in the center of the graph Press down the left mouse button and move the mouse to rotate the graphic The selected SM point SmartMatch point with the yellow shaft is the crucial point Press down the right mouse button and move the mouse to zoom in or out February 2005 7 129 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Example of A SmartMatch Group Point The picture shows SmartMatch points that are used to build a group point 57 1 Group point built by the program The negative index indicates a new group the 1 is the number of the group 23 1 24 1 125 1 Points used to build the group 7 130 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Current Population Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Example of Lab and C Graphical View The following pictures show the influence of the space Lab or concentration You see the same points in both
175. cess either for laboratory or production A treatment is generated for each calibration dye process type e g Exhaust Continuous linked to the combined process Datacolor MATCH etile supports three types of correction Laboratory correction The existing recipe is altered and saved again Every additional laboratory correction reduces the differences to the color sample Production correction An additional recipe is calculated that is used to change the color of the dyed batch to the correct color Fast correction Used for a production correction without an existing rec ipe It is based on a theoretical calculated recipe of the standard Classification of dyes according to the chemical composition and reaction e g dis perse reactive Group of fibers dyed in the same bath with the same dyestuffs e g Cotton Viscose The dye process contains Dye class Process type and Process factor The dye process is associated with combined process and colorant set The attribute of color which increases the concentration of the Co orant all other condi tions remaining the same Description of the dyestuff e g gran conc supra The dyestuff type is used to specify the dyestuff name Refer to Correction Single fiber to be dyed All fibers used for a Quality Style A fiber group can be a single fiber or a combination of different fibers e g PES PES CO Kubelka Munk coefficient of Absorption The optical prope
176. cial Stock Solution DefautAuiay 0 YS Note EEE E See FormulaSetting Save Delete Clear Close Parameters Name Unique name of the product ID Unique identification of the product AuxID Additional identification of the product Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of the creating or last modifying user Product Supplier Unique name of the product supplier Product Type Product type e g Auxiliary default Product Form Product form e g liquid or solid Default Delivery Date of the default delivery selected from the delivery list Data are imported from Datacolor Process Datacolor February 2005 7 31 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Product Strength Specific Gravity Lab Strength Factor Actual Price Invent Unit Special Stock Solution Note Formula Setting button 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Currently supplied concentration Specific weight Current laboratory strength factor Current price per inventory unit Unit for the calculation of costs This unit is defined in the Unit Selection tab of the Options dialog box together with a weight or volume It is necessary because the sample weight and the batch volume are normally too low for the cal culation of the costs Special stock solution If stock solution is activated in the options the default stock solution is selected If a specific stock soluti
177. color MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics 5 Using Datacolor MATCH tlle General table functions Selecting columns for sorting and filtering Click the column title to be selected The column is marked with sorting sign and arrow El Data is sorted using two criterias 15t priority has the column you have clicked in 2nd priority always has the object name if it is selected in User s Brows er Definition Changing the order Click the column title of the selected column for changing the order between ascending and descending A selection filter can be defined for each column 1 If necessary select the column title field 2 Type the characters to be used as selection criteria A binocular sign is displayed and the data is selected according to the criteria e The wildcard can be used The selection criteria can be changed as long as the column is selected Use Backspace to remove the character on the left of the cursor Use Shift Backspace to remove the entire selection criteria Examples H COMBPROCESS_IC disp i COMBPROCESS_ID DISPIDisp DISP REA 2B DISPiTer REATBEZ DISPPREA 2B REALLEV PB REAJREM PB SII The names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to chapter Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Tool tips In many places tool tips are implemented Setting the cursor to this place a context sensitive i
178. create a new job for sorting and or tapering samples You will be able to save this sort job and retrieve show and modify it later Type a name for this new sort job je All Data id He n Brown 29 09 2003 16 57 12 Note If you select an existing job from the database you can modify it with this wizard Description Bact Cancel Help 2 Click Next The following dialog box appears 5 122 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option Datacolor F 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Script and Filter Eo xj Script Name and Filter The Sort Script defines the sort operation and with the filter you select which batches will be proposed for the sort fa Sort Script EAD SSS O Group and Taper CMC Group and Taper CMC 2 1 F 1 0 Sorted by Color both group and taper Maximum distance batch to group center 0 2 taper limit 0 3 Taper linear path IV want to use a ColorTools Standard I Automatically include new batches e All Data a Standard A3 ordo M Measure Note If you leave the standard empty a calculated average will be used Use only Batches with these properties Batch Property Type Use Filter Value Use only batches From this folder a BAT_IMAGE ImageMaster Batch Image Ab E Length Length of Fabric DA 0 00 Bat_Fabric_Wwidth Fabric width 31 E BAT_FabricLength Fabric Length in m al zi D C Quality Type Quality type A B o
179. cted Refer also to Completing An Imported Textile Printing Colorant Set on page 5 57 Refer to Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 and Specifying objects on page 5 9 Refer to Specifying Modifying and Deleting Objects on page 5 8 The new colorant set is created The fiber is saved as a Dye Fiber Group in the dye process Continue with Specifying Colorants and Calibration Samples on page 5 50 Note If you want to store the auxiliaries used for the calibration dyeings you can define an auxiliary recipe before you start to prepare dyestuffs These auxiliaries are used for all dyestuffs added to the colorant set later on If the concentration of a product depends on the dyestuff concentration however you must adjust it individually Refer to Auxiliary Recipes on page 5 49 5 48 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Colorant Sets 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Auxiliary Recipes If you want to store the auxiliaries used for the calibration dyeings you can define an auxiliary recipe before you start to prepare dyestuffs These auxiliaries are used for all dyestuffs added to the colorant set later on If the concentration of a product depends on the dyestuff concentration however you must adjust it individually Action Result Notes 1 In the Colorant Sets window click The Introduce Your Complementary Auxiliary Recipe Components in Calibration Series dia log box
180. d and Prod SmartMatch SmartMatch points of location production are used Weighting of hue You can change the weight of dH Value range is 0 2 to 5 5 highest weight of dH 0 2 lowest weight of dH The use of this parameter only make sense if additional illuminants are selected Value 100 New method for matching with one Smart Match point The value is set automatically Value 0 The additive correction is used Recipe Calculation Result Table Column for weighting the colorimetric values and the price Standard PANTONE 19 1333 TC Quality Style 100 00 Trevira 2000 Disperse Exhaust Dispersal 1 00 Trevira 2000 990210 1 10 N Recipe Information CieLab Default D65 Trial 1 sim Color Inconstancy Calculated Values Colorimetric values and prices 0 9856 0 8794 0 8591 0 9064 0 9245 0 9112 1 1 0668 1 0634 1 0814 1 0931 1 1021 0 9244 R selection marks Dyestuff Recipe with D65 Standard with D65 Standard with A Recipe with A Datacolor y concentrations used the recipes 0 0829 0 0825 Color Display February 2005 7 121 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes The following help functions for review are implemented Table menu and context sensitive menu Evaluate Print ASCII Prints colorimetric details using a predefined form Theoretical reflectance Opens the In
181. d Description Line Check the box if a field description line is required Field Description Prefix If necessary type a field description prefix File Name Type the path and the file name File Select Append if the new records should be added to an existing file or select Overwrite if the existing file should be overwritten 5 Click Next The ASCII Form Name dialog box appears 6 Type the name of the form and click Finish Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor ASCII Output Option 4 Configuration and Administration ASCII Output of Recipes Action Result 1 In the Recipe List window double The Show Full Recipe dialog box click the recipe that should be appears printed to an ASCII file Refer to Show Full Recipe Dialog Box on page 5 75 2 Click ASCII The file is saved to the place specified in the ASCII form Example ASCII output of a laboratory recipe Recipe_ID Recipe_Name SubstrateDelivery_Name CombProcess_ID CombProcess_Name ColorType_ Name Trial Weight Quality ID Quality Name 129 Ref Beige REA BEZ Reactive Bezema Exhaust Rec Beige SM 1 10 00 1 Cotton bleached Product_ID Product_Name RecipeAmount RecipeUnit ActualCost Amount Unit NaCl Common Salt 30 00 g 1 0 00 3 00 2 Product_ID Product_Name RecipeAmount RecipeUnit ActualCost Amount Unit SoCar Sodium Carbonate 5 00 g2 1 0 00 0 50 g
182. d Remove Pro The Add Remove Programs Proper grams ties are opened Select Datacolor MATCH amp tiler Datacolor MATCH Fete is removed click Add Remove and confirm the removing If Sybase is not used again e g for Datacolor Process it can also be removed Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor 4 Configuration and Administration Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration User Administration Specifying Modifying and Deleting User s Data Z Note Only the user DCI can specify and modify user s data Action Result 1 On the Tools menu select User The User Administration dialog box Manager User Administration appears 2 In the User s List select a user and click Add to specify a new user Add The Add a New User dialog box appears Insert name and password and click OK Remove to delete of a user s data Remove The user data is removed after confirmation Rename to rename a user Rename The Rename a User dialog box appears Specify the new name and click OK 3 If finished click Close The User Administration dialog box is closed Changing the Password Note N STOP The user DCI cannot be deleted and has all access rights These rights cannot be modified Action Result 1 On the Tools menu select User The Change Password dialog box Manager Change Password appears 2 Insert t
183. d rename functions are only available for users having the corresponding access rights Introduction A colorant set is a set of color information about the substrate and dyes the system uses to produce match and correction recipes It contains information about the overall colorant set e g the substrate and process that will be used with the dyes product information about each dye e g strength minimum and maximum con centrate color information about each dye Connection Datacolor February 2005 5 47 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide Specifying A Colorant Set 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Action Result Notes Open the Colorant Set List window On the Colorant Set or the context sensitive menu select New gt Textile Specify the name and the identifica tion of the new colorant set A click in the Dye Process Sub strate Delivery and Operation field opens the corresponding selection box Select Input Form on the context sensitive menu of the selection box to specify a new object Click Store The Colorant Sets window appears Refer to Colorant Set Window on page 7 77 for information about the parame ters For the colorant set type Textile Alternate Substrate refer to Specifying A Colorant Set for An Alternate Substrate on page 5 55 e Textile Printing with Dyes In addi tion an extender must be sele
184. dard and the samples have already been screened for Pass Fail in the production QC process In clustering and tapering methods there are user defined criteria that determine the taper sequence s the number of clusters and color differences These are described in the section below It must be remembered that there will be samples within a taper or clustering process that fall outside the limits established by the user In the case of tapering these samples are outliers and are listed as such In clustering there may be outliers that do not belong in any cluster The object is to include all samples but not to compromise the user s tolerances Since clustering usually precedes tapering the cluster program must be dynamic rather than static A population may be clustered and the results can be saved as a table printed etc However as new samples are added to the population the entire table will change accordingly If the new samples fall very close to an existing cluster they will become part of that cluster and the average of the cluster will be re calculated If enough samples fall elsewhere but are very similar to each other a new cluster may be formed and the entire population re clustered Tapering It is best to think of tapering as a sequencing method A series of dye lots typically rolls of fabric or cones of yarn are to be shipped to a given location for cutting and assembly It is important that the rolls are sent in a s
185. datacolor mu MATCH Name Recipe Calc 1 Brilliant Yellow4 Li Sum datacolor ma SPECTRUM family of solutions Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide Preface 2 Preface Datacolor MATCH Textile TM User Guide english Version 1 0 February 2005 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of this Guide However should any errors be detected Datacolor would greatly appreciate being informed of them Changes are periodically made to the information and will be incorporated in new edi tions of the guide Datacolor reserves the right to make improvements and or changes in the product s and or program s described in this guide at any time Copyright 2005 Datacolor All rights reserved This guide may not be reproduced or copied in whole or in part without the written permission of Datacolor Trademarks Throughout this manual trademarks are used Rather than place a trademark symbol at every occurrence of a trademark name we state here that we are using the names in an editorial fashing with no intention of infringement the trademark Address Datacolor Brandbachstr 10 CH 8305 Dietlikon Zurich Telephone 41 44 835 38 00 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Contents Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide Contents Preface Contents 1 About About Chis GUIG Cx zii vids iii ai c cara e ata n aa ata ia aa savas sdeatadessebunestdevsbaets 1 2 Who Should Use this Guide netocite a
186. delivery Refer to Calibration and Measurement on page 5 10 Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Quality Style on page 5 26 and Substrate Delivery Example on page 5 30 Substrate Blank Dyeing button If this button is activated you have not measured a sub strate Opens the Substrate Delivery Dialog box to measure the first substrate delivery Refer to Calibration and Measure ment on page 5 10 Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Qual ity Style on page 5 26 and Substrate Delivery Example on page 5 30 Process Type Check boxes Exhaust Continuous Printing Use Affinity SmartMatch If checked SmartMatch points of all qualities linked with the same affinity are used Caution It is indispensable when this method of SmartMatch matching that only qualities with the same dye behavior are linked to an affinity Otherwise the results of matching are unusable Characteristics Notes Weight weight Width width Weft weft material Warp warp material February 2005 7 23 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Affinity Tab Quality style propereysneet x Quality Style Affinity Fiber Group Fiber Name 4117642 PES CO 70 30 ai ID PES CO 70 30 Creation Date 08 04 1999 3 Modification 20 04 1999 AuslD User ID DCI Fiber Group EI a fe 4C0_PES Mie Search Dyesets ibers Dyeset O er name Fiber Part Tata 1 Cotton 30 00 4 Levatix S
187. dialog box 7 110 Security key explanation 8 4 Security system Datacolor Match Textile 3 4 Select current illuminants dialog box Datacolor MONITOR 7 144 Selection basics 5 2 dyestuffs for a recipe 5 71 field specific aids 5 6 step by step 5 5 Set settings for a recipe 5 74 Setting up Datacolor Match Textile 3 2 removing DCI Match 3 6 Settings explanation 8 4 SmartMatch automatic maintenance 5 86 introduction 5 85 manual housekeeping 5 87 manual input of points 5 90 manual input of points with recipes 5 90 overview 2 8 release group s 5 88 using points of other qualities 5 31 SmartMatch list window 7 94 SmartMatch point enter manually 2 10 explanation 8 4 SmartMatch population explanation 8 4 Smoothed data explanation 8 4 SOR sort script maintenance dialog box 7 167 SORT introduction 5 118 job result window 7 154 maintain sample property 5 131 modify job 5 125 modify script 5 130 open a sort job 5 121 option 5 118 Datacolor 9 Index sample property dialog box 7 169 sort job definition options 5 133 sort job definition options dialog box 7 171 sort job maintenance dialog box 7 160 sort list window 7 154 specify script 5 126 start 5 120 user field pre selection dialog box 7 172 Sort specify job 5 122 Sort job open 5 121 Sort job definition options dialog box Datacolor SORT 7 171 Sort job maintenance dialog box Datacolor SORT 7 160 Sort list window Datacolor SORT 7 154 Sort script maintenance dialo
188. difying a Sort Script a 5 130 Action Result Notes 1 Select either the option Maintain The Sort Script Maintenance dialog Sort Script on the Datacolor Sort box appears menu or on the context sensitive Refer to Specifying A New Sort Script menu on page 5 126 and Sort Script Mainte nance Dialog Box on page 7 167 for more information about the settings 2 Modify the data and click OK Note Existing sort jobs are not modified automatically if you change the sort script Modifica tions are taken into account if you recalculate the sort job Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 5 Using Datacolor MATCH tile Maintain the Sample Property With the Maintain Sample Property function you can add or modify a sample property and its value user defined field In the Property tab it is possible to specify or modify a property In the Sample Property tab you can set the values Properties and values are assigned to the batch selected in the table The new property is added to the Datacolor file USER FLD Action Result Notes 1 Select the option Maintain Sample The Sample Property dialog box Property either on the Datacolor appears Sort menu or on the context sensi Refer to Sample Property Dialog Box tive menu on page 7 169 2 Modify the data and click OK Note Z If you have installed Datacolor TOOLS do not add or modify prope
189. dition to the demand for blending and dyeing several fabrics are also creat ed by mixing different materials CO PES The Datacolor BLEND module for Datacolor MATCH amp tlle is able to serve all the pro cess demands of fiber blenders as it offers the capability of calculating the required per centages of pre colored fibers and of calculating the supplementary dyeing The data set preparation for fiber blending is different from the calibration series for dye ing It is necessary to have a set of black and white fiber mixtures and a 100 repre sentative sample of each color The data set preparation of Datacolor MATCH Textile has been modified to reflect these requirements and in addition the matching and correc tion user interfaces have been adapted Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor BLEND Option 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Starting Datacolor BLEND Datacolor BLEND can either be installed as a stand alone application or as a module of Datacolor MATCH tlle Starting Datacolor BLEND 1 On the Windows start menu or the desktop click the Datacolor MATCH amp tile or the Data color BLEND icon The Datacolor MATCH te explorer with the Overview window appears 2 Click the Fiber Blending icon E Fiber blending The Recipe List Window with the existing blend recipes appears Refer to Recipe List Window on page 7 91 Datacolor Match Textile Specifying A New Fiber Set Similar
190. dyeing Lev co2 co 1999 04 08 08 34 55 CO BASF co3 co 1999 04 08 08 34 40 N Substrate Delivery Data type box Shows all data types that the folder selected in the folder structure contains Data box Shows all data records of selected data type Context sensitive menu of the Data box User s Browser Definition Opens the Browse Columns for Explorer dialog box Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Z Note The delete and rename functions are only available to users with the corresponding access rights Rename Is used to rename the selected object Delete Deletes the selected object after confirmation Move to Moves a selected object to another folder Filter Refer to Browse Filters on page 4 8 Reset Filter Resets the selected filter Datacolor February 2005 7 13 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Find in Folder Dialog Box Used for searching data records with a determined name or part of the name The data type of the opened list window is used Refer to Searching objects of a determined data type on page 5 3 Find Product in folder Search Search result Name or part of the name Folder Modified Datamatch 01 12 2003 15 18 Teras e G Datamatch 01 12 2003 15 18 IV find with any trailing text Terasil Brill Blue BGE Print ch 01 12 2003 15 18 Terasil Brill Blue 3RL ASCII output ch 01 12 2003 15 18 Terasil Black SRL 200 Datamatch 01 12 2003 15 18
191. e Group Check Compulsory and select System Delete the dyestuff if it must be used ty save A mouse click displays one by Used for manual input one all A the selected S or the not selected N dyestuffs Input fields for parameter values TTA concentration a Cancel You can select dyestuffs by clicking on the dyestuff multiple choices are possible by inserting parameter values used for limits Accepted operators lt gt lt gt If Compulsory is checked the dyestuff must be used in all combinations Z Note If you have not selected any dye all dyes of the list are selected 1 Click Accept Limits to activate the selection Datacolor February 2005 5 71 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide i 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile You can define the concentration Note by inserting fixed values manual recipe input The dyestuff is used with this con centration for all combinations If the parameter Fixed is used and the recipe is saved before the calculation the dyestuff concentrations are used as default values and can be altered The correction is possible If the parameter Fixed is used and the recipe is calculated and saved after cal culation the specified dyestuff concentrations are constant values and cannot be changed The correction is restricted or impossible by setting a minimum and or a maximum The maximum amount
192. e uid user ID The user must have DBA authority or REMOTE DBA authority pwd password d Only stores the main database file file name Stores the transaction log file to a file with the specified name n The switch is only active if the switch r is set Changes the name of the transaction log file to the following format yymmddnn log yy year mm month dd day nn number in the range of 00 to 99 o file name Creates a file for the log output q Quiet mode Messages are not printed r Rename and start a new transaction log t Only stores the transaction log W Only stores the write file X Deletes and restarts the transaction log XO Deletes and restarts the transaction log without backup y Replaces files without confirmation 4 18 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Importing and Exporting Print Forms Tools Menu 4 Configuration and Administration Importing and Exporting Print Forms Tools Menu Sor Caution Exporting Print Forms Tools Menu If the print form database is to be replaced the old print forms must be exported Your print forms will not be lost if you have not exported them The existing database is renamed by the setup program The user can access the database by changing the database connection in the ODBC settings for the print form DSN Action Result On the Tools menu select Export Print Form Select the print forms to be exported and click Export
193. e aa tt atei aia 1 2 How to Use This Guide mm eee 1 2 Type Styles and Symbols sis stie ata a a da bi a ai a 1 3 2 Overview Basic Data cc setei ei sie sicrie petitia sevens dit bea sit afl tite 2 2 UAT Style sia poata aa teal d Aaaa a ati di Sa uta Ca ul a 2 2 Product ss E tt a a ol to a a hoya d ta a A 2 3 CUStOMEr pissi cadea Da aa d ada aia Data ai ala fala ETET 2 3 Color Type smoala i 2 3 Coloranti Sete eae ar aaae aa oua Da Du Daiana a Daci diacon dluiia8a 3 2 4 Combined Process i ssni iei acas aaea basce decat caiet tinea stati dei 2 6 Recipe Calculation Matching cccccccccsseseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneneeeees 2 7 IMAP Mathie eco e aie aa sede Sie ol ua ao 00 anda Zeal cae Ru aduci dan d tea 2 8 odola p e io n MEE AEE ETT A 2 9 Fast COrme tion e E T E astenie ee 2 10 Input of SmartMatch Points eee 2 10 3 Installation Supported Operating Systems cceeeceeeseeceneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeneeees 3 2 Installing Datacolor MATCH exe a cssssssssssssssesesnssesessssesesessesssseeteneaees 3 2 Updating Datacolor MATCH Ome aa acsscsessesesssssesessesessesessssessnsensnsensseees 3 3 Datacolor Security System casei iai a be anna ia dd Da seal aaa moda de 3 4 New Installations ecccec cece eee nenea nenea nenea nana nana 3 4 Existing Installation senso creeaza data st aa oa Bode batuta terns 3 5 What Happens if the Software Security Key Stops Working 3 5 What Happens if the
194. e absolute amount of concen tration is entered Selection of the measured fiber set sample according to the recipe to be corrected Differences dE and dL between standard batch and Dif Formula On the left a graphical view of the differences is displayed If the differences are out of tolerance the message Batch refused is displayed and the traffic light is red SmartMatch analysis graphical display and SmartMatch result table Color differences standard batch according to the formula used for recipe calculation Check the box if the batch is measured with all fibres Selection of laboratory or production for the SmartMatch point insertion Dyestuffs selection and concentration input Refer to Lab Graphic Tab on page 7 178 Settings tab Refer to Settings Tab on page 7 120 Datacolor MATCH FeXtile Version 1 0 Datacolor O Glossary Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 8 Glossary F Absorption Affinity Auxiliary Calibration data Calibration sample Color inconstancy Colorant set Color index Color index number Colorant Color type Note References to other glossary entries are written in italics The conversion of light or other electromagnetic radiation into heat energy This light energy cannot be reflected back to an observer The selective absorption of light is responsible for our perception of color The affinity group is an optional field that is used
195. e number of the product supplier Fax Number Fax number of the product supplier E Mail E mail address of the product supplier Buttons Save Saves the displayed address Close Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Color Type Property Sheet Color Type Property Sheet ColorType Propertysheet_ es ColorT ype 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Name fq li Data oo EI TM Red ID 27 Creation Date 08 04 1999 AuslD User ID DCI Modification 04 04 2000 Sample LabNote ProdNote ToleranceName Buttons Save Delete Clear Close ToleranceFactor fi Saves the displayed color type definition Deletes the displayed color type definition after confirmation Clears the fields of the currently displayed tab Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved Parameters of the Color Type tab Name ID AuxID Creation Date Modification User ID Lab Note Prod Note Tolerance Name Tolerance Factor White Unique name of the color type Unique identification of the color type Additional identification of the color type Date of creation Date of last modification Identification of creating or modifying user Additional Notes for the laboratory Additional Notes for the production Unique name of the tolerance Tolerance factor Check it if the sample i
196. easure the cali bration samples If all calibration samples have been measured press Accept to return to the Colorant Set window The Create Calibration Series dialog box appears Refer to Create Calibration Series Dia log Box on page 7 82 Refer to Specifying A New Product on page 5 35 The colorant name plus the concentra tion is used for sample name field Sample You can modify the sample name in the Prefix field The K S values are calculated automat ically using the default method Mea sured If you open a Colorant set containing colorants not calibrated a message box appears for a few seconds when you open the colorant set the next time Note You can select a range of colorants Click Accept to save the colorants without measuring the calibration samples The colorants are saved to the colorant set 1 0000 and a red background color in the dE field indicate that no calibration samples are assigned to the colorant If you click one of the colorants without calibration samples the Create Calibra tion Series dialog box appears and you can select the calibration samples from the database or measure the samples If you open a colorant set containing colorants that are not calibrated a mes sage box appears for a few seconds Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Re measure Deleting or Move Calibration Samples The calibration samples are listed automatical
197. eat Di a i pai ab at i asi anita 7 52 9 94 Tabi ciori air Pal iai ad a dai Da e aa o aaa 7 53 DINGO A E TR RPR SR PRR IAR SA ei RR A AA 7 54 Datacolor Tolerance Block Dialog Box cceneeeeeeeeeeeee eee naanaaeeeee nana 7 55 Manual Input of Tolerance Values Dialog Box ccee eee 7 56 Parameter Definition Dialog Box mmmeeeeeeee eee neneeeeennneeeee en ananaaaeeeeeeaa 7 57 Combined Processes Browse Window ccu eee eee eee 7 58 Quick Search Dialog BOX scenice cai coca aici oana atata maia dac aa 7 59 Combined Process Window memne nenea nenea 7 61 Operations Browse Window mme none eee eee 7 65 Operation Window lt lt ss icoana nai die aceia Gun igdnaeiad aan dani dnei dacica unari das 7 67 General Parameters nea 7 67 Parameters of the General Tab mmmce nenea 7 68 Table Columns of the Control Line Tab cceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 69 Parameters of the References Tab mmcceee nenea 7 70 Formula Edit Window ss cetei fin tea ocin iasi cai ca i casta dana sa eta 7 71 Sample Input Dialog Box eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 72 Special Dei a ty rh ot tata a aaa 0 eta aaa MDA a a alee aa tea 7 73 Coordinates Tab se neiere iei a e te ea poti i i ip na pl a 7 75 Colorant Set List Window eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneneeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 76 Color
198. eca ao a ti d a oa a 4 26 Modifying A Print FOr cteccintctdareccacanerutestieacegeceinatetiesendeleactatedeadeesdmagany 4 28 Deleting or Renaming A Print Form seeeeeeeeereerrresssrrrrrrssssrrrrree 4 28 Importing Print FOrmS sss Ace dopat aa aaa Paula seat la aa ardea Ea aa tai 4 29 Exporting Print FOS een einen tod tibia la ed aie aaa ds d catei 4 29 Customizing Graphs siwiscencinasecicadiiaiitesanwnaadocetentiscasdienmesccanenieeseceedtinnateemanrenne 4 30 Setting Colors for Graphs cicssseiedtedeecsdeeh a i a a a cee 4 30 Setting Line Style and Color esas n ara ae aaa ma o ga na r al dee ot 4 31 TOC 2 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Contents Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCH tlle BASICS scai tata 0 it pu a ut ceata i c od am dai 5 2 Starting Datacolor MATCH Me n catia ca taia a a aa aia 5 2 Dat Pan ling soia Ciano aa gl ea ea n 5 2 Browse and Selecting mmenoooe ere neeeeeeeeee eee nana nea ea aaaaa 5 2 Specifying Modifying and Deleting Objects mmmeeeeeeeeeeee 5 8 Calibration and Measurement ccccccceescecccccceeeeeeeeeeeecsneeneneeeneenenene 5 10 Calibrating Your Spectrophotometer cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 UV Calibration sertare sale eee ul a etal a o edi al 5 11 Instrument Correlation c cccceeceeseseeeneceeeeedeneseecenetenedeneesceetees 5 16 Green Tile Test as sa te rote spol isa ate o apa ua aie Mesa ae 5 18 Measur
199. ecify newly 5 36 Style data handling 5 26 overview 2 2 quality style property sheet 7 22 specify newly 5 27 update and delete 5 33 Substrate explanation 8 4 Substrate blank dyeing explanation 8 4 Substrate delivery explanation 8 5 Substrate delivery dialog dialog box 7 27 Substrate delivery effect dialog dialog box 7 28 Substrate delivery list window 7 87 Supplier list window 7 90 Symbols description 1 3 System requirements for Datacolor Match Textile 3 2 February 2005 9 9 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide T Table alter column titles 4 7 alter position of column titles 4 7 display columns 4 6 functions 5 7 tool tips 5 7 Theoretical reflectance values creation 5 96 TICKET administration 5 117 dye lot 5 117 dye lots list window 7 151 new dye lot dialog box 7 152 option 5 115 production recipe 5 115 recipe list window 7 145 recipe window 7 147 root recipe dialog box 7 149 Tolerance data handling 5 44 specify newly 5 44 Tolerance block dialog box 7 46 Tolerance list window 7 86 Tolerance value deletion 5 46 explanation 8 5 updating 5 46 Tool tip tables 5 7 Toolbar explorer 7 7 Toolbar functions Page View Designer 7 138 Treatment explanation 8 5 Type styles description 1 3 U Unit dialog box 7 111 specify 4 11 Update color type 5 43 customer 5 39 Datacolor Match Textile 3 3 dye class 5 38 dye process 5 38 object 5 9 parameter 5 40 product 5 35 quality style 5 33 9 Index tolerance
200. ection O Information if the recipe was manually modified The last measured batch 07 02 2005 15 03 DCI datacolor mmm Blend Recipe Name Stone Wool Recipe_ID 6543 Standard Stone Wool Weight 10 00 g Fiber price 1 37 Tolerance_ Name CieLab Default Factor 1 06 DyeSet Wool Feit O Modified No Measured Predicted dE 065 1 49 2 68 Metamerism A 0 37 0 49 Metamerism F11 0 19 0 33 Dyeset_Name Woo Feit Part 100 00 tastMeasuredBatch Stone Wool 171 Wool white tett Wool white felt 55 19 5 52 g Black wool fett Black wool felt 28 64 2 06 g Yellow wool fet Yellow wool felt 4 00 0 40 g Orange wool fett Orange wool felt 12 17 1 22 g Datacolor February 2005 5 151 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide Recipe History 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile If a Batch exists Datacolor MATCH tle saves all corrections and modifications of a recipe Modifications done with the Edit option are also saved In addition to the reci pes a dLab graph is displayed Displaying the history Select the function History on the Recipe or the context sensitive menu Printing the history Select Print on the History menu Z Note The graph is not to be printed DCIMatch Hiktory view s of recipe VAC FIB 16 2 BLAUW 150 H File History Tools Window Help Se SPO TEICES Trial Dyestuff Correction nr 1 Correction nr 3 Visc 100 1 Date Unit SIRIUS
201. ed Fiber Set s Table with the selected fiber set Remove a fiber set using a double click on the name cell Part Part of the selected fiber set Refer to Recipe Calculation with several Fiber Sets on page 5 144 Current Total Display of the currently used part Standard Section of the Standard to be used February 2005 7 183 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 184 Colorant Set tab 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Fast correction for Olive Wool 001 Standard Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Fiberset Wool Felt gF i E 40 500 600 700 dE Mi theory to standard 1 33 5 60 dE Mi theory to batch 1 20 4 95 Selection I SM Analyse Save Part 100 Batchsize n Amount input Batch amp color difference for CieLab Default DE5 Correction It P qOlive Wool 11 dE 1 20 dL 1 06 dC 0 56 dH 0 08 da 0 06 db 0 56 Batch refused Share 100 00 Max Of Share 92 23 gt R Fiber Set Batch Size Batch and Information line SM Analysis Total batch SmartMatch Point Table Lab Graph tab DCTools Evaluate Print Dre ASCII Cancel Protected A Fiber Set tab is displayed for each colorant set The colorant set name and the part of the corresponding fibre in are displayed on the top If Amount Input is checked th
202. eeeeeeeeneense 7 10 Data in Folder Dialog Box cccccecceeeeeeeeee tenet eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 13 Find in Folder Dialog BOX noni ca ceea iti ta aie n il to i 7 14 Measurement Main Window mmnnnnnn nene eee mame me eee amana aaa aaa 7 15 Single Tab Example 1 00 iu ti at cata ta d 0 ca t oala a 7 15 Multiple Tabs cc ot aaa a a aa a a e etan da 7 16 Until Tolerance Tab eee 7 17 Calibrate Tab toate ae aaa a Da clau aa iat a te eos 7 18 Instruments Setup Tab eee 7 19 General Options Tab sis veces a a ata n bt a a aA a e aa aaa 7 20 UV Calibration Tab aaa 7 21 Quality Style Property Sheet ccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 7 22 Guality Style Tabi sks cei ec ate aia le bai ee Rae Lica a da dain 7 22 Affinity FED sa ea oo ant tate i eta Du Go t ia ag dia neu i i 7 24 Fiber Group ab sia aaa aia ciot acasa cada 8 ada atac ui za tt dai 7 25 Fiber labiilor E 7 26 Substrate Delivery Dialog Box ccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeenennees 7 27 Substrate Delivery Effect Dialog Box ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 7 28 Dye Process Property Sheet ccccccsssssseeeeeeceseseseeseeeeseeeeesesseeeeeeeereeneess 7 29 Dye Process Talia dona data sata Apa ani ae tera coe da Act apa 7 29 Process Factors Tab ssni eee 7 30 Product Property Sheet mins anca in in aan licenta ina anii te 7 31 Aulay Tae e aus
203. elected Best Add Best Positive Add Reset Recipe table 1St column Check the box if the batch is measured with all fibres Check the box if it is the first correction of the recipe anda SmartMatch point should be saved This function is only enabled if checked Selection of unused dyestuffs of the same colorant set to be added Evaluates and adds the best dyestuff according to the colorimetric results Evaluates and adds the best dyestuff to correct negative amounts This function is only available if the recipe is calculated with additional illuminants and the initial result has negative add amounts Removes the added dyestuffs Color display February 2005 7 103 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Dyestuff Recipe Amount Effect Rel New Recipe 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Names of the dyestuffs Values of the original recipe Absolute amount of dye lot Values of the correction Effect factor for the recipe calculation performance between original and batch recipe Relative correction for the single dyestuff Addition in Values of the new corrected recipe without additions A print out is not possible Batch Size Bath Liquor Ration Use Pickup If you have altered a value press the Tab key to recalculate the correction For continuous dyeing If it is checked the entered pickup value is taken into account Amount and Amount are adjusted The table
204. ement cae iei pg oc a ga at ba buc d whet o a ti 5 20 Manual Input and Modification of Samples seessesseeeeeeeeeeteee 5 24 Manual Input of Samples cmmn nenea 5 24 Modification Of Samples mmcc nenea enma nana 5 24 Specifying Basic Data css aice i ia Dia ti ani i aa cama dada Sale 5 25 Recommended Sequence of Basic Data Input cccceceeeeeseeeeeeeees 5 25 Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Quality Style ees 5 26 Specifying A New Quality Style 0 eee 5 27 Excluding Including Colorant Sets from into An Affinity 5 29 Substrate Delivery Example cccceeseeessecteceeeeeseeseeceeneeeetees 5 30 Substrate Delivery with Colorant Set Dependent Effects 5 31 Using SmartMatch Points for other Qualities 0 cc eee 5 31 Overwriting Measurements of Substrate Deliveries 5 32 Modifying and Deleting A Quality Style nenea 5 33 Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Product seenen 5 34 Specifying A New Product cccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseecenenenennens 5 35 Modifying and Deleting A Product e nenea 5 35 Specifying A Stock Solution ies nat aaa cauta a d i 5 36 Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Dye Process ceeeeeeees 5 37 Specifying A New Dye Process cmmnnennnonee eee anno eee 5 37 Modifying and Deleting A Dye Process ccecce 5 38 Specifying Modifying or Dele
205. eneess 7 103 Fast Correction Recipe Input Dialog Box ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 105 Search and Correct Dialog Box c cecene nneeeennnneeeen ea nnnanaaeeeeee 7 109 Search Results Dialog Box cca nee nana an nnanaaeeeeee 7 110 Unit Dialog BOX sii ia aliase nr it ai a nina r Dai tn mah adela 7 111 Options Dialog BOX insisi aaa aa a Da ti aaa i pi Bo dea adj a 7 112 View Tab scai a cireasa Pet atat Dra Dac dead ut daia cadet acute dal tru 7 112 Dispenser Tabs iesea iesi 0 E0G aa aaa Da aaa atat daca p n 7 113 Stock Sol tion Tab sas ici a e ie Se in el acu m n ete dtz 7 114 Unit Selection Tab aaa 7 115 Print TAD access cota ana a i a a e li a aaa dia do atac 7 115 Match Dialog BOX isus cae oa cab aaa teen Dai n aia E i ana aiba 7 116 Process Data for Matching Tab ce eee anna 7 116 Colorant Set Labis ata aaa ct a atatia ii ral a a ret ae ee 7 118 aD Graph e e sess a E E ET 7 119 Settings UA koi cc ta a ot aa headin epee neue Gl a da sa i 7 120 Recipe Calculation Result Table nnneeee eee anna 7 121 Insert A Theoretical Sample Dialog Box e nenea 7 123 Recipe Editor Dialog BOX iei ice maci aa dea dau ada Daia ani a 7 124 Current Population Dialog Box cccceccseseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 125 Population Dialog BOX scara ac ara na se nat aa alai ea e ta i 7 127 Example of A SmartMatch Group Point rr 7 130 Example of La
206. ent dilutions used for optimizing the accu racy of manual dyestuff pipetting and to prevent that the max imum of the dye solution is to be exceeded Dyestuff type Type of the delivered dyestuff e g conc gran supra Dye class Classification of dyes according to the chemical composition and reaction e g disperse reactive Dye description Additional description of the dye e g brilliant dark Dyestuff color Color names e g red green blue Formula setting Settings for recipe calculation used for production e g default unit Supplier dye name dyestuff type dye description and dyestuff color can be used to compose the product name Customer A customer delivers the substrate and orders the dyeing It is assigned to the quality style Color Type Measured color pattern A color type is substrate independent A color type is a standard and can be linked to a recipe Datacolor February 2005 2 3 Datacolor MATCH E il User s Guide 2 Overview Colorant Set A colorant set is a set of color information about the substrate and dyes the system uses to produce match and correction recipes It contains information about the overall colorant set e g the substrate and process that will be used with the dyes product information about each dye e g strength minimum and maximum con centration color information about each dye Connection Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Dat
207. entification s of the objects in the fields and click OK Result The User Definable Filters dialog box appears The selected objects are displayed in the list window Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Browse Filters 4 Configuration and Administration Disabling Browse Filters Action Result 1 On the context sensitive menu of the requested list window click Reset Filter Exporting and Sending Browse Filters A filter definition can be exported to a file or be attached to an e mail User definable filters LX Prepare Filter Define Filter Data Recipe Language English v Filter Recipes with two dyestuffs SQL SELECT Recipe Recipe_ID FROM Recipe key join colorrecipe key join colorrecipe_line crl1 colorrecipe_line crl2 where crll product_id and crl2 product_id and crll colorrecipe_ak crl2 colorrecipe_ak Evaluate Clear Save Import Export Send Mai Delete Cancel Praga Help Action Result 1 In the Define Filter tab of the User Definable Filters dialog box click Export to export the filter The Save as dialog box appears The definition to a file file can be saved with the extension dmf i click Send Mail to mail the fil The e mail form appears and the filter ter definition definition file is attached Datacolor February 2005 4 9 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration
208. equence such that there is minimal color differ ence from roll to roll The rolls are usually cut as they are received The cutter will there fore have a much easier job if the fabric supplier has already provided the optimum sequence of rolls In many dyeing processes the processes themselves will result in a tapering effect especially in continuous dyeing of woven fabrics Factors such as roller pressure and dye tank feeds cause variations in the run but this variation is gradual We would expect the variation to occur more often in lightness darkness and in chroma Differenc es in hue can occur but less frequently and are associated with the differences in dye substance to the fiber rather than mechanical effects February 2005 5 119 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Start Datacolor SORT Sorting with Datacolor SORT is performed using a sort job according to a sort script Sort criteria is specified in a sort script Z Note Before you can use the program to cluster and or taper samples you have to define Sort Scripts A Sort Script contains the conditions and limitations sort criteria that are used to build clusters and tapers Datacolor SORT can either be installed as a stand alone application or as a module of Datacolor MATCH tlle Starting the Standalone Version Datacolor SORT icon m 1 On the Windows start menu or the desktop click the ST td The SORT job window appe
209. erpolate on Y Round to Raise error if result lt minimum OK C Appl Raise error if result gt maximum s x Shr ivi 5 66 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Recipe Calculation Matching 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Recipe Calculation Matching Note The delete move copy and rename functions are only available for users having the corresponding access rights Introduction Datacolor Selection Dyestuffs Limits for parameters Concentration vy Multicolor matching Match in the background Save Print Dispense Selection Quality style data of the substrate Combined process Substrate delivery only for deliveries with data different to the blank dyeing sub strate Dyed substrate over dyeing only Dyestuff group with dyes pre selected from the assigned colorant set The dye stuff group is used to optimize the recipe calculation Selection criteria Dyes from the list Parameter values e g fastness information Concentration values e g min max conc Settings parameters for calculation control Standard Color to be matched February 2005 5 67 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Match The recipes are calculated according to the selections and the results are displayed Review The recipes can be reviewed according to the different crite ria various color difference values coordinates price etc
210. ers 2 Specify the tolerance name 3 Select the requested tab and specify Refer to Browse and Selecting on page the tolerance values 5 2 and Specifying Modifying and For Datacolor pass fail formula refer Deleting Objects on page 5 8 to the following section 4 Click Save The new tolerance is created 5 44 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data Datacolor pass fail formula 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Action Result Notes 1 Select the Datacolor tab 2 Specify the tolerance name 3 e Click Datacolor Block Training for tolerance block calculation based on visually excepted stan dards and the related batches For changing the formula click Diff Formula and select the for mula Select or measure the standard and the related batches Select other colors standards and batches to specify a color independent tolerance block Click Apply e Click Block Manual Input for a manual input of tolerance values Select or measure the standard and specify the tolerance values Click Apply 4 Click Save The Datacolor Tolerance Block dialog box appears Refer to CieLab Tab on page 7 47 for information about the parameters The Select Difference Formula dialog box appears In the table the batches are listed All batches with a CMC color difference lt 1 are selected automatically Click the refused batches to select Select at least all
211. es are out of tolerance the message Batch refused is displayed and the traffic light is red SmartMatch analysis graphical display and SmartMatch result table Color differences standard batch according to the formula used for recipe calculation Check the box if the batch is measured with all fibres If checked the fast correction is used to enter SmartMatch points manually Only the SmartMatch point is saved using the Save button If you only save SmartMatch points it is not necessary to select the standard Smart Match points are independent to the standard They depend to the quality the substrate delivery and the colorant set February 2005 7 107 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes SmartMatch Point Selection of laboratory or production for the SmartMatch point insertion Note Z If you do not check SM insert the recipe and the SmartMatch point can be saved using the Save button The recipe can be used for the Recipe Search and Correct function then Table Dyestuffs selection and concentration input Lab Graph tab Refer to Lab Graph Tab on page 7 119 Settings tab Refer to Match Dialog Box on page 7 116 section Parameters on page 7 120 7 108 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Search and Correct Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Search and Correct Dialog Box Used for searching for existing recipes that are based on a batch that has a sm
212. es of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Product Name Unique name of the product Product Id Unique identification of the product Product Supplier Name Unique identification of the product supplier ACTUAL_PRICE Current price ACTUAL_CONC Currently supplied concentration Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 February 2005 7 89 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Product List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Product Name Name of the product Product ID Unique identification of the product Product Supplier Name Name of the product supplier ACTUEL_PRICE Actual price of the product ACTUAL_CONC Current concentration of the product Modification Date Country of the contact person Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Supplier List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the
213. f Dyeclass Supplier Dyename Dyestuff Color Name CAI Data ID REA Creation Date 08 04 1939 Modification 20 04 1999 amp uxiD User ID DCI Note Technical Data OO parameter ame 0 rroo O Lightfastness 1 5 Delete Clear Parameters Name Unique name of the dye class ID Unique identification of the dye class AuxID Additional identification of the dye class Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user Note Field for additional notes Technical Data Table with the parameter sequence assigned to all dyestuffs of a colorant set with this dye class The values are to be assigned to the colorant set program Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Product Property Sheet 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Supplier Dye Name Tab x Dyestuff Type Form Dye Description Stock Solution Auxiliary Product Supplier Dyestuff Dyeclass Supplier Dyename Dyestuff Color Name EA fi ID B Creation Date Modification AuslD User ID Supplier EAI Data o i DyeClass a Al Data de EFeactie de Clear Delete Parameters Name ID AuxID Creation Date Modification User ID Supplier Dye Class Datacolor Close Unique supplier dye name e g Terasil Remazol Unique identification of the supplier dye name Additional identification of the supplier dye name Date o
214. f all color differences indicated by u One section with the standard deviation of all color difference indicated by o The next section contains the result for all measurement on one line This section is separated by the name of the piece of fabric Symbols describing the relation of the sample pairs used for color difference calculation Indicates color difference to a previous measurement e g left to left center to center or right to right February 2005 7 139 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Indicates color differences to a neighbor sample e g left to center center to right and right to left Indicates color differences to the reference e g left to reference center to reference or right to reference You will have nine color difference decisions if you have checked all possible relations Create Batch Series Dialog Box Refer to Printing A Batch Series on page 5 114 gt Name Mis Lot 173652 Folder cs s enes ES Script me GS Gisele Pa eat c esta ant Series Standard MES Blue 454 Batch name M amp S Lot 173652 Batches Description Here you can write down some notes Cancel Name Name of the batch series Folder Selection of the folder Script Selection of the script Standard Selection of the Standard Batch Name Name of the Batch Batches Selection of the batches Description Field for a desc
215. f creation Date of last modification Identification of creating or modifying user Unique name of the supplier Dye class e g Disperse February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Dyestuff Color Tab Product PropertySheet Parameters Name Unique name of the dyestuff color ID Unique identification of the dyestuff color AuxID Additional identification of the dyestuff color Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user 7 38 Datacolor MATCH amp tile version 1 0 Datacolor Product Property Sheet 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Dyestuff Type Form Tab Product PropertySheet Parameters Name Unique name of the dyestuff type e g gran conc supra ID Unique identification of the dyestuff type AuxID Additional identification of the dyestuff type Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user Datacolor February 2005 7 39 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Dye Description Tab Product PropertySheet Parameters Name Unique name of the dye description e g Brillant Dark ID Unique identification of the dye description AuxID Additional identification of the dye description Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modificati
216. ffinity Id Unique identification of the affinity Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Datacolor February 2005 7 87 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Affinity List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Affinity Name Unique name of the affinity Affinity Id Unique identification of the affinity Fiber Group Name Unique name of the fiber group Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Dye Process List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Dye Process Name Unique name of the dye process Dye Process ld Unique identification of the dye process Dye Class Name Unique name of the dye class Dye Class Id Unique identification of the dye class Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive men
217. finition of parameters with value ranges for the dyestuff prop erties Recommended Sequence of Basic Data Input 1 Qualities styles with the related objects Refer to Specifying Modifying or Delet ing a Quality Style on page 5 26 Products Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Product on page 5 34 Customers Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Customers on page 5 39 Parameters Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Parameters on page 5 40 Color Types Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Color Type on page 5 43 If these data is defined the colorant sets can be specified Refer to Specifying Colorant Sets on page 5 47 February 2005 5 25 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide 5 26 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Quality Style F Note The delete move copy and rename functions are only available for users having the corresponding access rights Quality Style is a summary of all data in relation to the substrate and contains Quality style and substrate Affinity quality style subgroup Fiber group Fiber Customer Substrate blank dyeing Special composition Colorant sa o Fiber Definition of all single fibers to be dyed Fiber group Definition of all fibers used for a quality style A fiber group can be a single fiber or a combination of different fibers e g PES PES CO Affinity Definition of
218. fying Combined Processes on page 5 67 You can measure a new substrate deliv ery using the New button Refer to Substrate Delivery Example on page 5 30 Refer to Measurement on page 5 20 Refer to Measurement on page 5 20 In the Used Colorant Set s table you can temporarily modify the percentage the process factors and or the substrate effect factors In case of a multi fiber quality style you have to select the fiber parts to be matched Refer to Multi color matching for multi color qualities styles on page 5 70 In case of re dyeing dyed substrate recipes cannot be corrected To enable corrections measure the dyed substrate as substrate delivery and select it for the recipe calculation In the Colorant Set tab select the dyestuffs to by used and select or specify a dyestuff group February 2005 Refer to Selecting dyestuffs for match ing on page 5 77 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Note Z You can check the dyestuff selection using the Lab Graph tab Refer to Lab Graph Tab on page 7 119 9 In the Settings tab select the Refer to Settings Tab on page 7 120 parameters for the matching pro cess 10 Click Calculate to immediately start Refer to Matching on page 5 74 the recipe calculation The recipe table appears 11 Select the recipes you want to dye 12 Click Close or Save to save the recipe Multi color matching for
219. g and Deleting Objects on page 5 8 3 If necessary specify the parameters Refer to General table functions on in the table page 5 7 4 Click Insert The dye class is created Z Note Fields marked with a red are mandatory Modifying and Deleting A Dye Class Action Result Notes 1 Open the Product Property Sheet Refer to Dye Process Property Sheet on page 7 29 for information about the parameters 2 Modifying Select the dye class alter the data and click Save Deleting Select the dye class click Delete and confirm the deletion 5 38 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Modifying or Deleting Customers F Datacolor The customer data contains name identification tolerance details and status Specifying A New Customer Action Result Notes Note Open the Customer Property Sheet Refer to Customer Property Sheet on page 7 43 for information about the parameters Specify name identification and data of the new customer Click Insert Click the Address button Specify the address and click Save and Close Fields marked with a red are mandatory Modifying and Deleting A Customer Refer to Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 and Specifying Modifying and Deleting Objects on page 5 8 The data of the new customer is creat ed The Address dialog box appears Refe
220. g box Datacolor SORT 7 167 Special browse functions basics 5 4 Specify auxiliary recipe for a colorant set 5 49 BLEND fast correction 5 150 colorant set for an alternate substrate 5 55 combined process 5 62 correct an existing recipe for a new standard 5 103 Datacolor Sort job 5 122 Datacolor SORT script 5 126 dye fiber groups into a dye process 5 37 exclude colorant sets from an affinity 5 29 fast correction 5 99 fiber set 5 135 formula 5 66 include colorant sets from an affinity 5 29 laboratory correction 5 92 manual graphical correction 5 101 new color type 5 43 new colorant and calibration sample to a colo rant set 5 50 new colorant set 5 48 new customer 5 39 new dye class 5 38 new dye process 5 37 5 48 new object 5 9 new parameter 5 40 new product 5 35 new quality style 5 27 new recipe series 5 69 new stock solution 5 36 new tolerance 5 44 objects 5 8 Datacolor Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide objects using the input form 5 8 operation 5 64 print forms 4 26 production correction 5 96 theoretical reflectance values 5 96 unit 4 11 user 4 2 Spectrophotometer calibrate 5 10 green tile test 5 18 instrument correlation 5 16 maintenance 6 2 UV calibration 5 11 Specular reflectance explanation 8 4 Specular reflectance coefficient explanation 8 4 Standard explanation 8 4 Start Datacolor BLEND 5 135 Datacolor Match Textile 5 2 Datacolor SORT 5 120 Page View Designer 4 26 Stock solution explanation 8 4 sp
221. ght ooo e Note Actual Price 42 000 Actual Supplied Conc 150 000 Actual Lab Strength 1 000 Default delivery Cancel Fields with a green background can be edited Type of Sample Input Selects the source of the samples Measure with Input of Concentration Values Measurements Table with the samples to be measured Concentrations must be entered or corrected before the measurements Prefix and sample name can be edited Used Stored Samples From database Selection of samples New Calibration s Series Table with the measured or selected sample s Reset button Removes all samples from the New Calibration s Series table Accept button Accepts all samples from the New Calibration s Series table Datacolor February 2005 7 83 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Alternate Substrate Information Dialog Box Alternative substrate information r Reference colorant set RI All Data Fat Name Gpr ei oan Bera m Data for construction of the correlated colorant set Substrate Best product to dye on substrate pee Al Data a pe All Data Name Cotton Ricki blank dyeing Single input H 4BEZAKTIV Black V RSD 75 iq Samples Product dE1 dE Mean Sigma 0 00 Lam 400 Lam 440 Lam 480 Lam 520 Lam 560 Lam 600 BEZAKTIV Orange V 3R 0 00 Lam 640
222. groups dyed in the same bath and using the same recipe Refer to Specifying dye fiber groups on page 5 37 Datacolor February 2005 7 29 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Process Factors Tab Used to name process factors DyeProcess PropertySheet Parameters Name Unique name of the factor ID Unique identification of the factor Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user Factor Input of a process factor 7 30 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Product Property Sheet 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Product Property Sheet Buttons Save Saves the displayed product definition Delete Deletes the displayed product definition after confirmation Clear Clears the fields of the currently displayed tab Close Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved Auxiliary Tab x x Dyestuff Type Form Dye Description Stock Solution Ausiliary Product Supplier Dyestutf Dyeclass Supplier Dyename Dyestuff Color pee ee a ID EBPs Creation Date 15 04 1999 Modification 04 04 2000 AuxlD CIB APS User ID DCI Product Supplier fi Ii Data CCIEA E i Product Type i Product Form E Default Delivery ciBa 1 999 06 03 v Product Strength fico 4 Specific Gravity Doo Lab Strength Factor N Actual Price fz Invent Unit ka z i Spe
223. gs Individual settings may be saved for each user The Save button saves all settings The Delete button deletes the settings A mouse click on the corresponding button sets the pre defined values Number of additional illuminants to be used for recipe calcu lation multiple illuminant match Maximum value is 3 Calculate All Combinations No off Solutions Accept Stop Selection Range of dyestuffs that can be used for a single recipe Maximum of solutions to be displayed with the defined maxi mum of dE Up to this number the recipes are displayed after calculation Recipes are accepted if dE and dM are better than the speci fied values If a recipe has values better than defined the calculation is stopped and the results are displayed Precision Most precise calculation Turbo Recommended for big colorant sets Other pre selection is used Both methods calculate recipes with the same precision With Turbo you may not get all possible combinations 7 120 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Match Dialog Box Tolerance Formula llluminants Matching Technology Weight dH SmartMatch Factor in 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes The tolerance formula is selected automatically Using these buttons illuminants may be selected or dese lected Selection of Normal Match no SmartMatch Lab Smart Match SmartMatch points of location laboratory are use
224. h types for one product The option toggles between one and two graphical displays Note The function Use 2 graphs works only if a graph is being displayed e g if you have selected the function Show tables the function Use 2 graphs does not work Examples The left graph always shows the curves of the currently selected colorant The right graph shows the curves of the previously selected colorant foual colorant SR spez gran Brill Orange Remazo Show and print Auxiliary recipe R R You can display two different types of curves for one colorant fiotua colorant N gran 150 Deep Black Remazol Show and print Auzsiliary recipe R on disc 590 nm K N gran 150 Deep Black Remazol S conc February 2005 5 53 Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide Note 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Remove A Dyestuff from A Colorant Set Generally you can only remove a colorant from a colorant set if the colorant as a com ponent of this colorant set is not linked to other data Action Result Notes 1 Select the colorant and open the context sensitive menu 2 Select Delete Colorant The program checks wether the colo rant is linked to other data and removes it from the colorant set if there are no links If the dyestuff is linked a dialog box with the names of the first 20 linked items appears Click Show All to search the entire databa
225. he graph The spike becomes a sphere The next point in the list will be selected for checking ALL The All button displays all the points again Graph The SmartMatch points are displayed in the graph with different colors The spike has the color of the batch A gray shaft represents a normal point A blue shaft indicates a grouped point and all points belonging to a group The point you have selected in the upper table is displayed with a yellow shaft A red shaft is displayed if a point is suspect The length of the shaft is proportional to the dLab vector representing the lab distance between the theoretical reflectance and the reflectance of the measured batch For better identification all points are numbered e g 20 Index No of the SmartMatch point 17 4 The 1 number is index no of the SM point the 2 number is the number of the group the point belongs to 54 1 A negative index identifies a new group point not existing in the database it is built when population is opened It is saved after confirmation during closing the SM population screen 7 128 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Current Population Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor Table columns on the left of the dialog box The columns ind dE and dE contain the index number and the dE for the CIELab space The column ind CC and dCC show the SmartMatch index and the difference in con
226. he old and new password and confirm the new one 3 Click OK The password is changed 4 2 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor User Administration 4 Configuration and Administration Access Rights Enabled lt amp Main Delete and Rename Copy Data Hel File H Basic Data H Recipe History Match Match in Background ReMatch Pass Fail and Laboratory Pass Fail and Production Fast Correction Search recipes Search results 4 TANSESESNASASAEK Cancel Action Result 1 On the Tools menu select User Manager User Administration 2 Select the requested user and click Permissions 3 Set the permissions and click OK 4 In the User Administration dialog The User Administration dialog box appears The User Permissions dialog box appears The User Permissions dialog box closes The User Administration dialog box closes box click Close Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration Available options Z Note The setting of a user right is valid for all attached rights at lower levels Level Lower Option Levels Included 0 Main 1 Delete and Rename 1 Copy Data File Basic Data Product Quality Style Dye Process Customer Color Type Parameter Definition Toler
227. he possible links from colorant sets to affinities are not displayed immediately if you scroll through the list of affinities Instead click the Search Colorant Sets Search Dyesets button to see which links are defined or excluded marked with an It can take several minutes to find all colorant sets valid for an affinity depending on the number of items in the database The list of affinities and colorant sets is filtered to avoid the definition of incorrect links Action Result Notes 1 Exclude Select an included colo rant set not marked with an and click Exclude Include Select an excluded colo rant set marked with an and click Include Note Z The number of colorant sets linked to the current affinity is displayed under Total Datacolor February 2005 5 29 Substrate Delivery Example Example for Blends PES CO 70 30 Refer to Substrate Delivery Dialog Box for more information SubstrateDelivery Dialog x Quality Style Creation Date 2 9 00 017642 PES CO 70 30 Modification User ID DCI SubstrateD elivery New 017642 PES CO 70 30 2 39 00 Sample et mal Total Fane Mesue gl ede If you want to measure only the total substrate it is sufficient to do it only once No mea surements are needed for an individual fiber If you have burned out the cotton you can measure the polyester skeleton pressing the Measure button in the fiber row
228. he recipe 5 Edit the Curr Pickup Curr Liquor Ratio value if necessary Click Show to displays the complete recipe Click Print to print the complete reci pe Click Dispense to send the recipe to a connected dispenser Select the recipe output s according your needs and close the Show Full Recipe dialog box 5 74 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor Show Full Recipe Dialog Box Show full recipe for Y0006 PISTACHE 1710 Se xi Modified 04 04 2000 17 10 26 Status Tialist __Dyeset__ Weight Part Type orig Pickup curr Pickup Liquor 1 a Lona ir tel ma Print Dispense ASCII P Use Pickup Close Trial List List of the added Trials Orig Default values from the dye process Curr Editable value You can specify a current value Table Colorant set and recipe values Show Opens the print preview of the recipe Print Prints the recipe Dispense option Sends recipe data to a connected dispenser ASCII option Export the recipe data in the ASCII format Close Closes the Show Full Recipe dialog box February 2005 5 75 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide Review recipe table Column for weighting the colorimetric values and the price Standard PANTONE 19 1333 TC Quality Style 100 00 9 Trevira 2000 Substrate factor Trevira 2000 990210 1 10 Process factor Disperse Exhaust Dispersol 1 00 Formula CieLab Defaut D65 dE
229. her members of the same group in color to prevent any noticeable color variation between them The size of each block is set by the user by means of a tolerance value to limit the amount of shade variation within each group The tolerance is a set of three numerical values that control the dimensions of each block typically in dL dC and dH although variations exist using dL da and db as well as HunterLab dL da and db The selection of the tolerances by the user is critical to the performance of the system Tolerances that are too large will produce shade groups with excessive shade variations within each group Tolerances that are too small will result in too many subdivisions of the population with many of the shade blocks containing only one or two samples An alternative to the 555 shade sorting system is a dynamic sorting system that we will call clustering or grouping This alternative is realized in the new Datacolor SORT module Clustering Clustering is an alternative to 555 shade sorting whereby all the samples rolls piec es garments cones are placed into groups such that all members of the group may be shipped or cut together The members of the group have minimal color differences from the overall group average As described below there are usually two steps in the pro cess 1 Clustering or grouping the entire population of samples into a manageable num ber of distinct groups then 2 a sequenc
230. ialog box Datacolor TICKET 7 152 O Object specify newly 5 9 update and delete 5 9 Object tree basics 5 2 Off shade explanation 8 3 Open context sensitive menus 5 8 sort job 5 121 Operation explanation 8 4 formulae 5 66 specify modify delete 5 64 window 7 67 Operation list window 7 93 Operations browse window 7 65 Option connecting dispensers 4 11 Datacolor BLEND 5 134 Datacolor MONITOR 5 106 Datacolor SORT 5 118 Datacolor TICKET 5 115 Options dialog box 7 112 sort job definition options 5 133 Output ASCII 4 20 ASCII files of basic data 4 23 ASCII files of recipes 4 23 specifying ASCII forms 4 20 Overview auxiliary 2 3 basic data 2 2 5 25 calibration methods colorant set 2 5 color type 2 3 colorant set 2 4 combined process 2 6 correction 2 9 customer 2 3 dyestuff 2 3 fast correction 2 10 matching 2 7 product 2 3 quality 2 2 recipe calculation 2 7 SmartMatch 2 8 style 2 2 Datacolor 9 Index window 7 2 Overview window buttons 7 3 selection 5 3 P Page View Designer delete print forms 4 28 export print forms 4 29 import print forms 4 29 modify print forms 4 28 rename print forms 4 28 specify print forms 4 26 starting 4 26 Page View Designer window menu functions 7 137 toolbar functions 7 138 Pager window 7 137 Parameter data handling 5 40 deletion 5 40 explanation 8 4 specify newly 5 40 updating 5 40 Parameter definition dialog box 7 57 Parameter list window 7 86 Password cha
231. ical The Population dialog box appears ly delete bad points and to automat Refer to Population Dialog Box on page ically merge points to be merged 7 127 Otherwise click Quick 5 Check the values and delete Smart Match points if necessary 6 Close the Population dialog box A confirmation is requested if the Delete boxes have been checked Note dE_S values should always be lower than the corresponding dE_K values If not the population contains bad points that should be deleted February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Release SmartMatch Points from the Group Datacolor MATCH does not delete the original points if they are used to build a SmartMatch group point You can release re establish the original points if you select a group point in the explorer view The menu function Release points from group is only enabled if the selected point is a group point Executing this function brings back all points used to build the group point and the group point is deleted Use the Release Groups button in the Automatic SmartMatch Housekeeping dialog box Refer to Automatic SmartMatch Maintenance on page 5 86 to release the Smart Match points of all groups 5 88 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Saving A Batch as A Sample A color sample can be specified using a SmartMatch point Shown reflectance will be stored as sample bee ce xi R J A
232. ick Next The following dialog box appears View Options xj View Options Define the columns you want to see in the result window and the graphical display modus m Table Options Graph Options mo V dE CMC Lab Graph at IV dLICMC Difference Graph mo V dC CMC m Vv 5 m M wIGG Whiteness Ganz Griesser I TGG P WICIE whiteness CIE I T CIE Property E lt Back Cancel 12 Define what you would like to seein Refer to View Options Tab on page 7 the results window 165 13 Click Next The following dialog box appears Datacolor February 2005 5 129 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Output Options xj Dutput Options How do you want your output to be sorted and identified C By Sample Name r Group Codes e A B C First Group Code A C L a b code m Taper Codes e DUZI C ABC First Taper Code 1 Group T aper Separator p lt Back Cancel The last wizard page is used to set up the output and to select the coding you would like to use for groups clusters and tapers The print output sort order is linked to individual print forms One is used to print the job ordered by Group Taper code and the second is sorted identically to the order you have displayed in the output screen You can change the order in the output screen by clicking in the table columns 14 Click Next to finish the wizard Mo
233. ier Fax number of the product supplier E mail address of the product supplier February 2005 7 33 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Dyestuff Tab Product PropertySheet E E Dyestulf Type Form Dye Description Stock Solution Ausiliary Product Supplier Dyestuff Dyeclass Supplier Dyename Dyestuff Color Name CAI Datat ic AB ezaktiv Red 5 38 150 ID BRD 53B Creation Date 08 04 1999 Modification 04 04 2000 AuslD BRD 538 User ID DCI Supplier D serene a Dye Description E ed A Dyename Ext Dyestuff Strength fi 50 4 precias a Reatve zi Compose Name Product Supplier E Product Type m E AG Dyestuff y Product Form Default Delivery No Delivery gt ad Solid Lab strength Factor 1 Actual Price 28 Colorindex Specific Gravity fo ig pe cu Special Stock Solution Note Defaut Dyestuff Save Delete Clear Invent Unit fkg v 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes x Close Parameters Name Unique name of the dyestuff ID Unique identification of the dyestuff AuxID Additional identification of the dyestuff Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user Supplier Dye Name Dye name of the supplier Dye Description Description e g Brilliant Dyestuff Color Name of the color Dyestuff Type Form Dyestuff type e g Light Dye Name Ext Dyestuff na
234. ier list 7 90 quality style property sheet 7 22 tolerance block program dialog box 7 46 quick search dialog box 7 59 tolerance list 7 86 recipe editor 7 124 unit dialog box 7 111 recipe list 7 91 user field pre selection dialog box Datacolor recipe list window Datacolor TICKET 7 145 SORT 7 172 Datacolor February 2005 9 11 Datacolor MATCH iile User s Guide 9 Index 9 12 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor
235. in steps of 5 kg Raise error if result lt minimum If checked and the result is lower than the minimum value an error message appears and the matching is stopped If not checked the minimum value is set Raise error if result gt maximum If checked and the result is higher than the maximum value an error message appears and the matching is stopped If not checked the maximum value is set Datacolor February 2005 7 71 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Context sensitive menu Add Row Column Delete Row Column Build Formula Sample Input Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Adds a row column after the selected one Deletes the selected row column Opens the Expression Wizard dialog box used for creating formulae The Sample Input dialog box is used for the manual input of samples based on reflec tance values or color coordinates General parameters Name Description Unique name of the color sample Additional description of the color sample Data Information Input Specular Reflectance Manual Included Transmission Instrumental Excluded Date Date of the input Buttons Insert Save Used to insert a new or save an existing sample Clear Clears the input fields Save As Used to save a modification Close Closes the Color Sample Calculator If data is altered the program requests the data be saved Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Sample Input Dialog Box
236. ing Functions of the View Menu Find in Value Reset View Record Count Switches the search bar on and off Resets the search bar Displays the number of records in the title bar Buttons New Opens the New Recipe dialog box for specifying a new recipe Refer to Datacolor TICKET Production Recipe on page 5 115 Open Opens the New Recipe dialog box with the selected recipe Refer to Datacolor TICKET Production Recipe on page 5 115 Delete Deletes the currently selected recipe after confirmation Quick Search Opens the dialog box Quick Search dialog box Close Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved February 2005 7 145 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 146 Table columns RGB Color Recipe_ID Recipe_Name Recipe_AuxID Recipe Location Locked Level Quality_ID CombProcess_ID Affinity_ID Context sensitive menu Refresh Grid Select All Unselect All Locate Filter Show Hide Columns Set Font Find in 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Display of the color Unique identification of the recipe Name of the recipe Additional identification of the recipe Recipe type Red The recipe must not be used for dye lot generation Unique identification of the quality Unique identification of the combined process Unique identification of the affinity Refreshes the grid Selects all displayed combined processes Deselect all co
237. ing or tapering process to put the members of the group in the correct order for shipment or cutting Jarvis and Aspland at Clemson first developed clustering in the early nineties The Apparel Research Dept has a fully functioning garment assembly plant and shade sorting has always been one of their specialties Simon developed the original 555 con cept there in 1955 Sorting by 555 has certain drawbacks The fixed grid in CIELab or CIELCH results in large numbers of boxes boxes with few members and the corners present problems in that samples can be very similar to a neighbor but are sorted into different boxes Clustering eliminates all of these problems by grouping them according to their proximi ty to each other in a logical fashion in much the same way you would group them visu ally The use of CMC based ellipsoids for the clusters helps to insure that samples are placed into clusters that best correspond to visual shade grouping The center of the ellipsoid is taken to be the average of the cluster Clustering definitely produces fewer groups and a better color agreement within the group Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 5 Using Datacolor MATCH tile Datacolor The only disadvantage is that clustering does not provide a color relationship to the orig inal standard whereas 555 does This is not usually a problem because the clusters can be plotted in color space relative to the stan
238. ingle tab for a single measurement Select the Multiple tab for a multi ple measurement Select the Until Tolerance tab for an until tolerance measurement Refer to Calibrating Your Spectropho tometer on page 5 10 The Measure dialog box appears Refer to Measurement Main Window on page 7 15 Refer to Single measurement on page 5 20 Refer to Multiple measurement on page 5 27 Refer to Until tolerance measurement on page 5 22 Single measurement Action Result Notes Place the sample to the spectropho tometer and click the Measure but ton Click Close Click Insert to save the measure ment The results of the measurement are dis played in the subordinate tabs The Measurement dialog box is closed Inserts a substrate delivery measure ment into the substrate deliveries for example Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics Datacolor Multiple measurement 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Action Result Notes Place the sample to the spectropho tometer and click the Measure but ton For each additional measurement move the sample and click Measure again In the table cancel the unusable measurements using the mouse Click Accept Now to save the mea surement before the specified num ber is done If the specified number of measure ments is done the Measure button changes to Accept Click Accept
239. ion gt Periodical Illuminant checker Whiteness parameters Nominal Whiteness UY Filter Position Whiteness of test tile fis Position to set zz Re Calbrate parameters Whiteness found using position Whiteness Diiterence UY Calibration Methods Color Cord pesa Ban orese D65 10 CIE Whiteness C ISO Brightness COM1 19200 N 8 2 Mult 4 Tol CieLab F 1 00 DE 1 0 Time left 4 40 Refer to UV Calibration on page 5 11 February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Quality Style Property Sheet Buttons Save Saves the displayed quality definition Delete Deletes the displayed quality definition after confirmation Clear Clears the fields of the currently displayed tab Close Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved Quality Style Tab xi Quality Style Affinity Fiber Group Fiber Name E Polyester 2025 ID PES 2025 Creation Date 21 04 1939 i Modification 15 09 2004 BuxiD User ID DCI EE bd Customer feel All Data Red Bull Dyers Affinity fis Datamatch Polyester textured Grey Quality Lab Note Characteristics Weight 95 Prod Note FO Type ao SpecialComp Process Type Exhaust Iv r Continuous Printing Use Affinity Smartmatch Width 165 Welt SubstrateDelivery Warp
240. ion and green tile test Refer to Green Tile Test on page 5 18 Until tolerance Select the formula and specify the tolerance to be accepted Correlation Refer to Configuring and Enabling the Maestro Correlation Feature on page 5 16 7 20 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Measurement Main Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes UV Calibration Tab F Datacolor Calibration Methods Note There are several methods that can be used to calibrate the adjustable UV filter posi tion Please refer to the whiteness standard you are using to determine the method to be used Ganz Griesser This procedure uses the Ganz Griesser calibration method The light source is filtered to simulate the D65 Illuminant and the Ganz Griesser parameters are used to calculate the filter position In addition the target whiteness value is based on 10 standard observer data CIE using D65 10 The light source is filtered to simulate the D65 illuminant This is the procedure used to perform a CIE Whiteness evaluation ISO Brightness C The light source is filtered to simulate Illuminant C This is the pro cedure used to perform an ISO Brightness evaluation Example Using the Ganz Griesser Method Measurement Main Window Measurement conditions leas Specular ECL a Aperture LAV 3 Flashes 2 4 UV 68 0 6 Cut off NONE EA Multiple FA Until Tol Calibrate Instruments Setup 4 General Options El UV Calibrat
241. ion Correction Table 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Production Correction Table Datacolor Production correction for O002 ELEFANT 002 E x Smartmatch in production Standard 0002 ELEFAN insert ES AllDatal zi Machi Batch NOOO2ELEFANTN Machine E I Total batch First dyeing Fibre Add new dyestuff s Us selected Best add Best positive add T om Recipe amount effect Rott new reeta Dispersol Scarlet C2R 4101 0 858 g 0 77 20 91 0 04958 Dispersol Blue G 1 080 0 565 g 0 32 52 58 0 01648 Dispersol Navy C2G 3 429 0 127 g 1 10 3 69 0 03302 Total 1 29888 BatchSize fio v Ika Bath io gt Liquor ratio fio CieLab Default D65 R ttuminant detent New deta aci ma aeicmd aemm dE D65 212 0 44 0 03 0 27 0 35 Met 4 0 35 0 64 0 03 0 42 0 48 Met F11 0 09 0 39 0 12 0 05 0 37 Evaluate r Computer add _ew ASCII Optimal dE Hin Add dE User add Scale back by jo Standard Batch aR Compute to limit gt E dE Limit Manual Cor Mir Add dH 400 500 600 700 Measured color to be dyed target color Measured sample dyed according to the recipe to be corrected SmartMatch in Production Used to save a production SmartMatch point Total Batch First Dyeing Fibre tab Add New Dyestuff s User s
242. ipe List Window eee 7 145 Recipe Window Datacolor PROCESS mere 7 147 Root Recipe Dialog BOX nn oceane e a adn n a a a ds 7 149 Dye Lots List VVINGOW lt script a E aaa eas 7 151 New Dye Lot Dialog BOX es ao fa e ia aaa dd aaa tatea 7 152 Recipe Selection Tab eee 7 152 Machine Selection Tab n sai miez aaa a ga lata 378 aa aaa aaa a aa 7 153 Datacolor SORT Option ca acasa caii nana sua aaaaaalt nana aaa nana 7 154 Datacolor SORT List VINA sei taca abtin beat ad oma tea ae tas 7 154 Job Result WINdOW stii so za sn ed o a ete a a d 7 154 Details to the Job Result Table m mc aaa 7 157 Examples of Printouts m eee 7 158 Sort Job Maintenance Dialog Box eee aaa 7 160 New Sort Job Wizard Tab nico aaa aa atata aa ea s aa d 7 160 Script and Filter Tab eee 7 161 Set of Batches Tab naspa aaa de mea a oi cada aaa te Ea bt de aa 7 162 Tapering Parameters Tab aces o acceeasi ao ina a arat 7 163 View Options Tab asista cae ta 30 da a E Sata aa a 7 165 Output Options Tab en 7 166 Sort Script Maintenance Dialog Box mnnneeeee eee 7 167 Script Name Tab eee aaa 7 167 General Settings Tabara aaa at oa ia ata 602 d c t aaa 7 168 Tapering Parameters Tab se erai te tt a la a Da a 7 168 View Options Tab ciot zece ue c aaa et ba oua uda pda cata tices 7 169 Output Options Tab ear 7 169 Sample Property Dialog BOX ces re ec aaa dai lu beu d 7 169 Sample Property Tab eee 7 169 Property Tai ies acu
243. ipe in the Recipe List window 2 On the context sensitive menu The Show Full Recipe Dialog Box dia select Lab Dyelot or press Enter log box appears Refer to Matching section Show Full Recipe Dialog Box on page 5 75 Recipe Output New output features O Colorimetric data is printed color difference and metamerism for standard batch and standard theoretical batch of correction O Information if the recipe was manually modified Water volume to be added to get the final volume The last measured batch The modification number of the recipe starting with No 0 for the di recipe Recipe Ref Green Trial 1 Recipe ID 141 Standard Rec Green 01 Dyed Sample Quality Cotton bleached Substrate CombPro Reactive Bezema Exhaust Weight 10 00g Dyestuff Price 0 03 Chemical Price 0 00 O Tolerance Name CMC 2 4 Factor 1 00 DyeSet Reactive Exhaust o Recipe Modified No Measured Predicted dE D65 0 84 0 00 Metamensm A 0 32 0 01 Metamensm F11 0 22 0 06 Note Dyeing cain 1 Volume 100 00 ml wer Water to add 85 36 Temperature 60 00 Note Chemikalien zugeben MERNX Meropan 1 5000 g l 1 50 ml 1 10 saw Biavin 109 0 3000 g l 3 00 mi 1 100 Nac Common Salt 70 0000 g l 7 000 g Dyeset Reactive Exhaust Dye Process Reactive exhaust iastMeasuredBatch Ref Green Liquor Ratio Pickup 10 00 Substrate Factor 1 00 O Modification No 1 3 Bezaktiv Yellow S 8G 0 3727 3 73 ml 1 100 u Bezaktiv Yellow S 3R 150 0 145
244. ique name of the product The header contains the number of listed products Date and time of creation Date and time of the last modification Delta E color difference between current samples and the theoretical values A red background indicates that there are no selected or measured calibration samples White Black or Colored Specification of the minimum concentration Specification of the maximum concentration Product strength in percents Click to add a new fiber Calibration Series Table Results of the calibration series The first column displays the color of each sample RGB Sample dE Strength Do not use CNew button Color display Unique name of the sample The header contains the num ber of listed samples Delta E color difference dependent to the calibration method Relative strength in percents If checked the sample is not used for the calculation Click to add a new calibration sample Components in One Calibration Series Table Product Type Concentration Unit New button Unique name of the product The header contains the num ber of listed products Product type Numeric value of the concentration Unit used for the concentration Click to add a new product February 2005 7 175 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes BLEND Match Dialog Box General Parameters Standard Protected Display of the selected standard General Buttons Save Saves
245. ise Sirius Colorant 30 000 g kg Extender 1 Extender 970 000 g kg New 1000 000 Note Z You must recalculate all colorants of the colorant set If they have all been calculated with the same method measured or smoothed you can click All 5 58 Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Version 1 0 Datacolor Comparing Colorants This option is used to compare colorants delivered from different dyestuff manu facturers or to analyze the influence of dyeing processes and auxiliaries on the build up of the colorant Action Result Notes 1 Open the Colorant Set List window 2 Open the requested colorant set and select the colorant 3 On the context sensitive menu click The Compare Colorants dialog box Compare with Other Colorant appears The selected colorant is listed in the box 4 Select the colorants you would like If necessary change the colorant set to compare Compare colorants Bee x Fes All Data zi Colorant set HHR 45 RemazolAV Selected components to compare BB gran 133 Brill Blue Remazol R48 Remazol AV BB gran 133 Brill Blue Remazol R45 Remazol AV Add RNL Golden Yellow Remazol 3R spez gran Brill Orange Remazol FR Bril Drange Remazol 3B Red Remazol BB BrillRed Remazol F3B gran Brill Red Remazol RB gran 133 Red Remazol B Bordeaux Remazol 5R Bril Violet Remazol R spez gran Brill Blue Remazol GG gran Navy Blue Remazol I Price weighted gran 133 Brill Blue Re
246. isting recipes that are based on a batch have a small color difference in relation to a newly measured standard that has been searched and corrected Action Result Notes On the Recipe or the context sen sitive menu of the Recipe List Win dow select Search Recipe or press F9 Select the new measured standard Select the search criteria and click Search In the Search Results dialog box select the base recipe for the calcu lation e If the color difference is small enough select Save as new recipe on the context sensi tive menu If a new recipe is to be calcu lated select Correct and Save on the context sensitive menu The Search and Correct dialog box appears Refer to Search and Correct Dialog Box on page 7 109 for a detailed description of the parameters If recipes are found the Search Results dialog box appears Refer to Search Results Dialog Box on page 7 110 for a detailed description of the parameters e Recipes found that cannot be used are displayed in the Found Recipes without SmartMatch Information box The selected recipe is saved for the new standard The new recipe is calculated based on the selected recipe and saved for the new standard February 2005 5 103 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Displaying and Printing Existing Recipes Action Result Notes 1 Select the rec
247. isu ea a situs ao ao ul pas da 5 79 Manual Recipe Modification Recipe Table cceeneeeeee 5 81 Round the Dyestuff Concentration Recipe Table 5 81 Replace Dyestuffs in Recipes mccee eee 5 82 Printing Recipe ISIS iiiaae a ea aa dee dl Pda ada tal 5 84 ADpIOVING isi soti aa Daia ta atol od beaten Dirt gata UL calaret 5 84 Recipes Inserted Manually by Datacolor PROCESS na 5 84 SmartMatch css uzinei oana ant sewetecesedewecesewentccnesconcececerescesececers eset 5 85 Ard ei alg haere san sumei at nr evince nether re se Bica atol zoolog ce cl cc e dea a ati 5 85 Automatic SmartMatch Maintenance mmme nenea 5 86 Reviewing SmartMatch Points mme nenea anna 5 87 Release SmartMatch Points from the Group cccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 88 Saving A Batch as A Sample cccccecsssccceeeeeeeesesseeeeneeeeseeseceeeeenenens 5 89 Manual Input of SmartMatch Points ccceseseeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 5 90 Manual Input of SmartMatch Points together with the Recipe 5 90 Correction lt 5ms scai cnc a oile asa naitoaadnoataeaip i danii bios p inaauas atei ozia c coeincetsescberte 5 91 INtrOAUGIION i iai ce ae i d a a ta a ala n tab 5 91 Laboratory Correction weh paz ireal talia Ol PN la oana mat te 5 92 Specifying Theoretical Reflectance Values 5 96 Production Correction sos raci oa inta aa a e oa ata at ie a ia tal 5
248. k is mainly used for production correction songs Display Print Display Data input Quality style combined process colorant set and standard Batch color of the dyed substrate to be corrected Dyestuffs must be selected Concentration and parameters can be defined The acceptance limit and color difference equitation settings can be altered The recipe can be entered manually or a theoretical recipe can be calculated Caution STOP Only fast corrections of laboratory recipes can be saved Fast corrections of pro duction recipes must be printed before closing the Production Correction dia log box Otherwise the recipe will be lost Input of SmartMatch Points The Fast Correction function can be used for entering SmartMatch points 2 10 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor 3 Installation Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Supported Operating Systems Workstations Windows XP Professional Windows 2000 Professional Windows NT 4 0 service pack 4 or higher Windows 98 Not recommended Server Windows XP Server Windows NT Server service pack 4 or higher Windows 2003 Server Installing Datacolor MATCH tle 3 Installation Action Result 1 Insert the Datacolor MATCH eXtile The installation program starts automat compact disc into the CD ROM ically drive If the installation does not start auto matically select Run on the Win dows start menu
249. l reflectance curve box appears Insert a theoretical sample for Datacolor Match Textile or Datacolor Envision a x pe Name iNew Color Compl 1 Coffee E Ca Compl 1 Coffee R 2 Accept or modify the sample name The sample can now be used for and click Insert to save the sample matching in Datacolor MATCH tle Datacolor February 2005 5 147 Recipe Correction The Datacolor BLEND correction task does not distinguish between laboratory and pro duction correction Both corrections are calculated The new recipe is saved as soon as the correction is saved In the correction printout are both the new recipe and the addi tion if a production correction is required Action Result Notes 1 In the Recipe List window select The Correction Dialog box appears the recipe and on the context sensi Refer to BLEND Correction Dialog Box tive menu select Pass Fail and Cor on page 7 179 rection or press F7 Correction for Wool Olive Standard Olive Wool a Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Fiberset Wool Felt Part 100 gFl l Batch amp color difference for Ciel ab Detaul D65 E All Data h 3 Dlive Wool 1 71 EI dE 1 20 dL 1 06 dC 0 56 dH 0 08 da 0 06 db 0 56 E Batch refused 30 500 60 700 dE Mi theory to standard dE Mi theory to batch Selection n aa N 1 Ea BS Shown 14 selected Max 100 Rel
250. l test Using the dif ferences between the master measurement and the current measurement the program calculates a set of factors that are applied to each measurement and which reduce the color difference between the two measurements By generating correlation factors for every instrument used in the supply chain the measurements made by each unit can be adjusted to simulate the performance of a single master unit The result of this is that the Pass Fail decisions will reflect the differences in the samples rather than in the instruments used to measure them These correlation factors are generated using Mae stro The instrument correlation feature is enabled through the instrument driver mod ule however which is accessible using any Datacolor program including Maestro Once the correlation factors have been generated they can be applied to raw measure ment data to compensate changes in instrument performance The adjusted measure ment data should then closely resemble the measurement data produced by the master unit By designating a single instrument as master and generating correlation factors for every instrument used in the supply chain you can minimize any color differences caused by differences in instrument performance This allows you to share color data electronically and you will have the confidence that the instruments Pass Fail decisions are accurate evaluations regardless of the instrument s used for the measurement
251. lass on page 5 38 Opens the Dyestuff List window Refer to Dyestuff List Win dow on page 7 89 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Product on page 5 34 Opens the Auxiliary List window Refer to Auxiliary List Win dow on page 7 89 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Product on page 5 34 Opens the Product List Window Refer to Product List Win dow on page 7 90 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Product on page 5 34 Opens the Supplier List window Refer to Supplier List Win dow on page 7 90 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Product on page 5 34 Opens the Customer List window Refer to Customer List Window on page 7 91 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting Customers on page 5 39 Opens the Combined Process List window Refer to Com bined Process List Window on page 7 93 and Specifying Combined Processes on page 5 67 February 2005 7 11 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Operation List General functions Display Print ASCII Output 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Opens the Operation List window Refer to Operation List Window on page 7 93 and Specifying Modifying Deleting An Operation Displays a list with the selected objects Prints list with the selected objects Creates a text file if a corresponding form exists Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 User s Browser Definition Opens the Browse Columns for Explorer dialog box
252. lation Chapter 4 Configuration and Administration and Chapter 5 Using Data color MATCH e some dialog boxes are described in connection with their use 8 Glossary Explanation of specific terms used in this guide 9 Index The index should help you to find the descriptions you need 1 2 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor About this Guide 1 About Type Styles and Symbols The following type styles and symbols have been used in this guide References to other chapters and sections of this guide are shown in italics e g Refer to General Table Functions Screen texts window titles parameter names etc are written between double quotes e g Explorer window If a user action is requested menu functions or button names are highlighted in bold e g Click Save A note is used to draw your attention to additional useful information e g Note Z Leave the spectrophotometer to warm up for a few minutes Datacolor recommends that for the greatest accuracy you should wait thirty minutes before calibrating A caution symbol is used to draw your attention to potential hazards e g Caution STOP An alteration of these parameters can interrupt the communication between the PC and the spectrophotometer Datacolor February 2005 1 3 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide 1 About 1 4 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor 2 Overview Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 2 Overview
253. le below Specify a mini mum of one batch before clicking Save again 3 Log out of Datacolor MATCH le and restart Windows 4 Restart Datacolor MATCH tile If the error occurs again contact your Datacolor representative for further advice Error Messages If an error message appears while you are using your system you should follow the advice above Example of an error message ColorLab x IN Please insert one batch at minimam 6 2 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide Explorer Overview Window HE Datacolor Match Overview 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Title bar k 18 xi E File Tools Instrument window Help Ne Menu Bar la x e BA ZE 439 E e SEB ari e Toolbar datacolor az MATCH Fiber Process Recipe p Modules E Combined Process Colortype EJ Fiber blending GH SubstateDelver W Operaten E Recipe m ColorFber Z Affinity DyeProcess BE ColorantSet Ei Monitoring E Fete al Aia EN Dyestuff p Sorting jii Fiber fe Parameter Lal Sample p Production m Dyet g Production Recipe Administration For Help press F1 Status Bar ocr Title bar The title bar contains the title of the program the title of the current window and if a list window is opened the number of data records Menu bar Refer to General Menu Functions on page 7 4 for the general functions or to the related
254. llary Recipes snieni Te ata Ea ac Uau at ie TA Ruta 5 49 Specifying Colorants and Calibration Samples cee 5 50 Re measure Deleting or Move Calibration Samples 5 51 Moving Colorants isis cise eta ara ea a a et a a 5 51 Using the Graphical Display ccc cccecceeeeeseseeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeesees 5 52 Remove A Dyestuff from A Colorant Set nenea 5 54 Specifying A Colorant Set for An Alternate Substrate eee 5 55 Completing An Imported Textile Printing Colorant Set ee 5 57 Comparing Colora MiS caca coate i aa e a AA ea a a eae 5 59 Specifying Combined Processes cccccccccsseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 5 61 Introduction sssri on atta aaa a i aaa d a aa 5 61 Specifying Modifying Deleting A Combined Process 0 008 5 62 Specifying Modifying Deleting An Operation cccc nenea 5 64 Specifying Formulae sisirin dade ta acre eagle na ec la d e i aa 5 66 Recipe Calculation Matching cccccccssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeneneeenees 5 67 HAM OCA UC UOI cotei ts ad aden esa gle tt dan caw eh pews dad Moai pt a pares 5 67 Calculation of A New Recipe Series eee 5 69 Preliminary Work sms erai aaa seated calves aa ia o at a at 5 69 Settings for Recipe Match ce caract t at aa da Za glia 5 74 Matching acceeasi ii ot fra i E ae ben pa 5 74 M difying RECIPES ese ee ctre ela a ata n aa eu a la aa 5 79 Recipe Editor s
255. lor Sorting Batch Series SmartMatch Fiber Blending Basic Data General Calibration Recipe Overview Opens the Dye Lot List window Refer to Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot on page 5 117 Opens the Production Recipes List window Refer to Data color TICKET Production Recipe on page 5 115 Opens the Datacolor PROCESS Administration dialog box Refer to Datacolor TICKET Administration on page 5 117 Refer to Datacolor SORT Option on page 5 118 Opens the Batch Series List window Refer to Datacolor MONITOR Option on page 5 106 Opens the SmartMatch List window Refer to SmartMatch Result List Window on page 7 94 Approving on page 5 84 and Manual Input of SmartMatch Points on page 5 90 Opens the Recipe List window Refer to Recipe List Win dow on page 7 91 and Datacolor BLEND Option on page 5 134 Opens the list window last opened The context sensitive menu is used to open the other basic data windows Refer to Specifying Basic Data on page 5 25 Opens the Colorant Set application used for colorant set preparation and displays the Colorant Set List window Refer to Specifying Colorant Sets on page 5 47 Colorant Set List Window on page 7 76 and displays the basic data list of the last session Opens the Recipe application used for matching correc tion and printing recipes and displays the Recipe List win dow Refer to Recipe Calculation
256. lumns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Fiber Group Name Unique name of the fiber group Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Substrate Delivery List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Substrate Delivery Name Unique name of the delivered substrate Substrate Delivery Id Unique Identification of the delivered substrate Quality Name Unique name of the quality style Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Quality Style List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Quality Name Unique name of the quality style Quality Id Unique identification of the quality style Affinity Name Unique name of the affinity A
257. lumns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browse and Selecting on page 5 2 ColorantSet_Name Unique colorant set name SUBSTRATEDELIVERY_NAME Unique substrate delivery name CREATIONDATE Date of creation A mouse double click opens the Colorant Set tab of the Colorant Set window Refer to Specifying Colorant Sets on page 5 47 Functions of the Colorant Set and the context sensitive menu New Opens the Colorant Set window to specify a new colorant set of the selected type submenu Textile Textile alter nate substrate Textile Printing with Dyes Refer to Speci fying Colorant Sets on page 5 47 Fiber Mixing If option Datacolor BLEND is installed Refer to Datacolor BLEND Option on page 5 134 Copy Opens the Colorant Set window with a copy of the selected colorant set Edit Opens the Colorant Set window with the selected colorant set Show Displays a print preview of the header or the complete colo rant set submenu Rename Used to rename the currently selected colorant set Delete Used to delete the currently selected colorant set Filter Refer to Browse Filters on page 4 8 Reset Filter Refer to Browse Filters on page 4 8 Users Browser Definition Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Colorant Set Window Colorant Set Window DCIMatch Edit Disperse
258. ly The program searches for the best sequence of samples that pass the pass fail decision based on the selected formula and tolerance factor Group and Taper In the 1st step the program builds subsets of samples clus ters groups and in the 2nd step it tapers the samples in each cluster Tolerance All tolerance formulas can be selected Note Z M amp S89 is optional If M amp S 89 is used you must select one of the M amp S illuminants msTL84 10 msD65 10 msA 10 No results are displayed if other than ms illuminants are selected Maximum distance xxx Batch to Standard Tolerance factor scaling factor used for Pass Fail XXX is a placeholder for the selected formula Note Z This scaling factor modifies the tolerance value set in the tolerance block Tapering Parameters Tab Refer to Tapering Parameters Tab on page 7 163 7 168 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes View Options Tab Refer to View Options Tab on page 7 165 Output Options Tab Refer to Output Options Tab on page 7 166 Sample Property Dialog Box Sample Property Tab a Sample Property Property Standard Bordo Batch 200205 E 41 80709 089 Property Bat Fabric Wwidth BAT_IMAGE Lenath Quality Type Cancel Help Parameters Standard Standard the sample is related to Batch Batch the sample is related to Property Properties specified for the sam
259. ly by ascending concentration Action Result Notes 1 Select the calibration sample and open the context sensitive menu 2 Select the requested action The move works like the moving of col orants Refer to Moving Colorants on page 5 57 Moving Colorants Action Result Notes 1 Select the required colorant and move it using the Up and Down but tons Remazol Brilliant Yellow 4GL Gran to move Product 17 Remazol Brilliant Yellow 4GL Gran Remazol Yellow GR Remazol Yellow R Gran Remazol Golden Yellow RNL gran 150 Remazol Red 3B Remazol Brilliant Red F3B Gran Remazol Brilliant Red 3BS Gran Remazol Red RB gran 133 Remazol Brilliant Blue BB gran 133 Remazol Brilliant Blue R Spec Gran Remazol Brilliant Blue RN New Remazol Blue RR Gran Remazol Navy Blue R GB Gran Remazol Navy GG gran Remazol Black B gran 133 Remazol Black RL Remazol Brilliant Green 6B H20 poa Je a 2 Repeat the actions 1 to 2 until all col orants are placed correctly 3 Click OK The new sequence of the colorants is saved Datacolor February 2005 5 51 Using the Graphical Display Click anywhere in the green fields of the Product control grid to obtain the context sen sitive menu for all graphical options Examples papa o O RNL gran 150 Golden Yellow Remazol dE Min Conc Max Conc 0 000 Interpol tony bs Measured gt 7 0 000 0 000 Measured w 100 000
260. mazol R48 Remazol AV BB gran 133 _ Brill Blue Remazol R45 Remazol AV logiK S KIS co Strength eo Example The Brilliant Blue BB is selected from two different colorant sets The first colorant set R48 O is dyed at 40 C and 80 g l salt the second R45 is dyed at 40 C and 50 g l salt As you can see in the graph the slope of the dyeing with 50 g l 8 is not as steep as that with 80 g l O salt 5 Click the corresponding button to Refer to the example below for K S display the different graphs Refer to the examples on the following page for Log KS and Strength Datacolor February 2005 5 59 Datacolor MATCH e User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile LogK S B8 gran 133 Brill Blue Remazol R48 Remazol AV 5B gran 133 Brill Blue Remazol R45 Remazol Av log K S conc Strength B3 gran 133 Brill Blue Remazol R4B Remazol AV BB gran 133 Brill Blue Remazol R45 Remazol AY gRelatve strength conc 0 5 70 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Combined Processes 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Combined Processes Z Note The delete move copy and rename functions are only available for users having the corresponding access rights Introduction The user has to define combined processes and operations
261. mber J 1 Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Dyeset Remazol SPB Silicate Part 4 100 he r Production R Batch amp color difference for CieLab Default D65 E All Data a fs Reset batch N0002 ELEFANT N B zz Match batch dE 2 12 dL 2 04 dC 0 55 dH 0 20 da 0 05 db 0 59 Batch refused Match standard ri z0 uo Fist comrection E nm V Total batch 80 50 pal Cancel General parameters Standard Measured color to be dyed target color Buttons Production Used for calculating the recipe to correct the dyed production Opens the Production Correction dialog box Reset Batch Resets the batch data to original data if modified manually Match Batch The application assumes that exactly the calculated recipe has been used to dye the batch A correction therefore only makes sense if the color difference is not too large dE lt 5 If the color difference is larger something has gone wrong during dyeing In this case the Match Batch calculates a new recipe using the dyestuffs of the original recipe The new recipe becomes the base for correction and no SmartMatch point is saved Match Standard Calculates a new recipe for the standard Datacolor Tools Opens the Datacolor Tools application for color quality con trol Standard and batch are transferred automatically from the Datacolor MATCHT tle database to the Datacolor Tools deskt
262. mbined process Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Operation List Window Datacolor Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the menu Tools Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Operation Name Operation name A mouse double click opens the Opera tion window Refer to Specifying Combined Processes on page 5 67 Operation Id Unique identification of the operation Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 February 2005 7 93 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes SmartMatch Result List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 SM Result AK Identification of the SmartMatch point DE KS Color difference dependent to the calibration method DE_SM Color difference of the recalculated SmartMatch point Modification Date Date of last modification Quality Name Unique name of the quality style List Products Name Li
263. mbined processes Opens the Locate dialog box Opens the Filter dialog box Opens the Selected Fields dialog box Using the move buttons you can move the field columns to be displayed to the Selected Fields and remove the field columns that are not to be displayed Opens the Font dialog box used to define the font for the table text Select the requested table column and type the search crite ria The pointer jumps to the first line with the corresponding data Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor TICKET 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Recipe Window Datacolor PROCESS B Recipe MB1209 Old Gold Yellow 1630 9728 001 File Edit Recipe 3728 001 AMD Name ME1203 Old Gold Yellow 1630 cc Color type 7 42 00 MBq 209 Old Gold Yellow 1630 ry Quality fi X Cotton bleached d Affinity CO SPZ Cotton bleached CombProcess X X Location Laboratory X 8 me DyeFiberGroup SESE set Bezaktiv Red S 3B E a 0 0000 __150 Bezaktiv Green S 48 0 2301 0 0000 100 PassFail Modify Template D New dyelot User DCI created 03 10 2002 modified 03 10 2002 by DCI Functions of the Recipe menu Correct Is used to modify a recipe and keep a copy of the original rec ipe Refer to Production Correction on page 5 96 Clear Template All loaded recipe components using the Load and Modify Te
264. me extension Dyestuff Strength Currently supplied strength Dye Class Dye class e g Disperse Compose Name button Name Dye Description Dyestuff Color and Dyestuff Type Product Supplier Unique name of the product supplier Product Type Product type e g Dyestuff default Default Delivery Date of the default delivery selected from the delivery list Data are imported from Datacolor Process If activated a dyestuff name is composed using Supplier Dye Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Product Property Sheet 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor F Product Form Product form e g liquid or solid Lab Strength Factor Current laboratory strength differences to the default deliv ery Note The Lab Strength Factor is a divisor Example Original 100 New delivery 97 Lab Strength Factor 0 97 The original quantity is divided into 0 97 Exception If the recipe is sent to a laboratory dispenser the concentration is corrected Actual Price Current price per inventory unit Invent Unit Inventory unit Specific Gravity Specific gravity Color Index Refer to Color index on page 8 2 Note Field for additional notes Special Stock Solution Special stock solution February 2005 7 35 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Dye Class Tab CT x Dyestuff Type Form Dye Description Stock Solution Ausiliary Product Supplier Dyestuf
265. mplate button are to be removed Go to Dye Lot Opens the Dye Lot List window with the existing dye lot of the selected recipe Refer to Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot on page 5 117 New Dye Lot Opens the New Dye Lot dialog box Refer to Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot on page 5 117 Datacolor February 2005 7 147 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Buttons on the top Apply J OK Tia X Cancel Parameters ID AuxID Name Color Type Quality Affinity CombProcess Location Traffic Light Pass Fail button Dye process table 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes First Jumps to the first recipe of the list Previous Jumps to the recipe process Next Jumps to the next recipe Last Jumps to the last recipe of the list New Prepares the window for specifying a new recipe Delete Deletes the currently displayed recipe Apply Saves the currently displayed data The window is not closed OK Saves the currently displayed data and the window closes Cancel Closes the window without saving Unique identification of the recipe Additional identification of the recipe Unique name of the recipe Display of the color type Selection of the quality Display of the affinity Selection of the combined process Selection of the recipe type The traffic light may be set to red if the recipe must not be used for dye lot generation The color difference between the color type and the last batch is
266. mple Reflectance tab Shows the reflectance values of the measured sample Coordinates tab Shows the color coordinates e g yxz Lab of the measured sample Conditions tab Shows the measurement conditions Datacolor February 2005 7 15 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Multiple Tab Measurement Main Window Measurement conditions thee Specular INCL Ben Aperture LAV 3 Flashes 2 4 UV 71 9 Bin Cut off NONE Brightness L Chromacity C Hue h Average 46 727 7 087 189 185 Deviation 0 780 0 134 0 616 450 500 550 600 650 700 Total Selected Dev ae S Jons eee Com1 19200 N 8 2 Mult 4 Tol Cmc F 0 80 1I 2 0 c 1 0 Time left 5 0 Parameters Used for a measurement series The graph and the fields show the result of the measurement Average and deviation are calculated according to the selected measurements In the table the measurements can be selected or canceled using the mouse Measurements can also be canceled using the measurement selection and the DEL buttons at the top of the graph Accept now Selects all measurements Measure Executes the measurement Close Closes the Measurement dialog box and saves the cur rently calculated values 7 16 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Measurement Main Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Until Tolerance Tab Datacolor Measurement Main Window Measuremen
267. n II CieLab BI CMC EI Datacolor FMC2 JPc7a mseg 58 Cie94 E DIN 99 Parameters Table Input for tolerance values Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 Datacolor February 2005 7 53 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes DIN99 Tab i System wl UI EI wee Creation Date Modification User ID Description II CieLab BI CMC EI Datacolor i FMC2 JPC79 Ms83 BF Cie 94 W DIN 33 DINS9 Parameters Ke a Change Kch yd a Deltas High os a EE aa 3 Parameters Table Input for tolerance values Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 7 54 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor Tolerance Block Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor Tolerance Block Dialog Box Datacolor Tolerance Block Standard os ka DIVOT Blue ret iv ue reference E Batches STANDARD BATCH CMC 2 1 D65 10 NAME of BATCH DJ013 Blue 13 Total of samples Diff Formula Other color Apply Selected samples 7 Standard Selection or measurement of the standard Batch Selection or measurement of the batch Diff Formula button Opens the Select Difference Formula dialog box for the selection of the formula Select difference formula Tolerance Factor 1 CMC 2055 e Datacolor
268. n Check Volume If checked the program checks that the final volume is not exceeded by the volumes of the components Default Stock Solutions for Dyestuffs Selection of stock solution for dyestuffs Default Stock Solutions for Auxiliaries Selection of stock solution for auxiliaries 7 114 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Options Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Unit Selection Tab View Dispenser Stock Solution Unit Selection Print Laboratory weight unit E Laboratory volume unit ml v Laboratory Price Calculation Weight fi 00 ka z Volume fi 000 ji X Close Selection of weight and volume unit for laboratory data Laboratory Price Calculation Weight and bath volume for cost calculation of a laboratory dye lot Print Tab View Dispenser Stock Solution Unit Selection Print Recipe table Portrait C Landscape Selection of portrait or landscape format for the recipe table printouts Save The current selection is saved for further use Otherwise the selection will only be valid for the current session Datacolor February 2005 7 115 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Match Dialog Box 7 116 General parameters Standard Color to be matched A standard can be selected or re measured General buttons and fields Z Note If the Fixed parameter is used and the recipe is saved before the calculation k
269. n Result Notes 1 In the table of the Dye Process tab Dye Process Property Sheet dou ble click into an empty row 2 Select the fiber s that can be dyed in the same bath and click OK 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to define addi tional dye fiber groups The Dye Fiber Group for Dye Process dialog box appears The dialog box closes and the selected fiber s are displayed in the table row Refer to the note below Note Zz Enter the Dyefibergroups Group of fiber s dyed in the same bath Each row defines a dye fiber Fibers s group to be dyed in the same i _ MO bath E i P Fields marked with a red are mandatory Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Modifying and Deleting A Dye Process Action Result Notes 1 Open the Dye Process Property Refer to Dye Process Property Sheet Sheet on page 7 29 for information about the parameters 2 Modifying Select the dye process alter the data and click Save Deleting Select the dye process click Delete and confirm the dele tion Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Dye Class Specifying A New Dye Class Action Result Notes 1 Open the Dye Class tab of the Refer to Dye Class Tab on page 7 36 Product Property Sheet 2 Specify name and identification of Refer to Browse and Selecting on page the new dye class 5 2 and Specifying Modifyin
270. n and check the corresponding boxes CMCxxx Color display for two illuminants To activate the display of two Illuminants open the context sensitive menu select the function View configuration and check the box 2 illuminants banks The selection becomes active after saving the recipe If you open the recipe table again or match a new recipe the colors for the first two illuminants are displayed Note For the two illuminants the colors can be very different February 2005 5 95 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Theoretical Reflectance Values You can save theoretical reflectance values of a laboratory correction or a laboratory recipe Datacolor TOOLS can send this data to a user with a Datacolor Envision system to prove the color for example Action Result Notes 1 In the laboratory recipe or the cor rection table select the requested recipe 2 On the context sensitive menu The Insert a Theoretical Sample dia select Theoretical Reflectance 3 Click Insert Production Correction log box appears Refer to Insert A Theoretical Sample Dialog Box on page 7 123 The sample name is a proposal Alter it if necessary Action Result Notes 1 Select the recipe to be corrected in the Recipe List window 2 On the context sensitive menu select Pass Fail and Production Correction or press F7 Click Production 4 Yo
271. n 1 0 9 Index selection using the object tree 5 2 selection using the overview window 5 3 specify modify delete objects 5 8 using special browse functions and the query designer 5 4 Batch series window Datacolor MONITOR 7 139 Batch series script name dialog box Datacolor MONITOR 7 141 Batch series type dialog box Datacolor MONITOR 7 142 7 143 BLEND correction dialog box 7 179 correction recipe dialog box 7 181 fast correction 5 150 fast correction dialog box 7 182 fiber set window 7 173 7 176 option 5 134 recipe calculation 5 142 recipe correction 5 148 recipe table 7 179 specify a new fiber set 5 135 start 5 135 Browse basics 5 2 Browser alter position of table column titles 4 7 alter table column titles 4 7 customizing 4 6 display table columns 4 6 filters 4 8 Button browse 5 5 overview window 7 3 C Calculation recipe Datacolor BLEND 5 142 Calibrate green tile test 5 18 instrument correlation 5 16 monitor 4 24 spectrophotometer 5 10 UV calibration 5 11 Calibration data explanation 8 2 Calibration methods colorant set overview 2 5 Calibration sample explanation 8 2 Change position of table column titles 4 7 table column titles 4 7 Check dyestuff selection for a recipe 5 73 Datacolor 9 Index Color index explanation 8 2 Color index number explanation 8 2 Color type data handling 5 43 deletion 5 43 explanation 8 2 overview 2 3 specify newly 5 43 updating 5 43 Color type list wind
272. n oe OK Ubemehmen Parameters Sort by Color Samples are sorted by color All three dimensions are used dL dC and dH dL xxx Samples are sorted by dL only xxx placeholder for selected Pass Fail formula 1 dimensional dC xxx Samples are sorted by dC only xxx placeholder for selected Pass Fail formula 1 dimensional dH xxx Samples are sorted by dH only xxx placeholder for selected Pass Fail formula 1 dimensional Datacolor February 2005 7 163 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 164 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes dL xxx plus dC xxx or dH xxx Samples are sorted by dL plus dC or dH xxx placeholder for selected Pass Fail formula 2 dimensional Start a new taper if distance xxx is greater Tapering Method Note This tolerance defines the distance between the batches If the distance is above the limit a new taper starts If Color is selected as the sort type the limit corresponds to a color dif ference dE xxx We call the limit a distance because it is not a real color dif ference if you select a 2 dimensional sort e g dL plus dC The distance represents in this case Maxdis dL xx3 dC xxx xxx placeholder for selected Pass Fail formula The program starts tapering with a batch that has a connection to a compatible cluster This allows a taper to be built across the cluster borders Next neighbor Linear path Minimum path The program sea
273. named as follows Green tile test Standard __ TEST SF3008 SCI UVINC Green tile test Batch __ TEST SF3008 SCI UVINC 010321 11 46 The name contains the type SF300 the serial number 8 the measurement condition SCI UVINC and only for samples the date and the time of the measurement The instrument settings and the measurement conditions are displayed in the status bar of the Measurement Main Window February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide F 5 20 Measurement 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The program stores the type tab of the last measurement The tab used for the last measurement appears for each new one Single measurement using the Measure Directly button Action Result Notes Check that your spectrophotometer is switched on and calibrated Place the sample into the spectro photometer For a single measurement and if you do not need any parameter alter ations click the Measure Directly a button Click Insert to save the measure ment Refer to Calibrating Your Spectropho tometer on page 5 10 The measurement is executed Inserts a substrate delivery measure ment into the substrate deliveries for example Measurement using the Measure button Action Result Notes Check that your spectrophotometer is switched on and calibrated Click the Measure button or on the context sensitive menu select Measure Select the S
274. ncentration K vs Concentration at Maximum Value Fix your Wavelength Show Tables Show Edit Parameters Logarithmically displays the absorption in relation to the dye stuff concentration K S versus concentration Opens a dialog box used to select the wavelength for the following absorptions curves Displays the numeric tables K table and S table if the two constant method is used Displays the parameter values February 2005 7 79 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes KS Relative Strength Displays the strength in relation to the dye concentration for selected dyes in the Colorant Set tab strength at first calibration sample 100 strength at cal ibration sample KS Absolute Strength Displays in the Colorant Set tab the absolute strength for selected dyes Strength is the summary of norm absorptions of the sample Add Colorant Opens the Create Calibration Series dialog box Refer to Specifying Colorant Sets on page 5 47 Move Colorant Refer to Moving Colorants on page 5 51 Delete Colorant Removes the selected colorant from the colorant set after confirmation Refer to Remove A Dyestuff from A Colorant Set on page 5 54 Compare with another Colorant Opens the Compare Colorants dialog box Refer to Com paring Colorants on page 5 59 Use two Graphs Splits and resets the graphical display Calibration Series Table Results of the calibration se
275. nd Correct An Existing Recipe for A New Standard on page 5 103 Search Results Lists the current result list Lab Table Display Displays the matching results of the selected recipe Lab Dye Lot Opens the Show Full Recipe dialog box used for displaying printing and dispensing recipe data Edit Opens the Edit Recipe dialog box for altering color type and combined process of a recipe Refer to Modifying Recipes on page 5 79 Recipe List Prints the recipe list of all selected recipes Change Dyestuff in Recipes Opens the Change one Product in Recipe dialog box used for changing the product Refer to Replace Dyestuffs in Reci pes on page 5 82 User s Browser Definition Opens the Browse Columns for Explorer dialog box Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Rename Used to rename a selected recipe Delete Deletes the selected recipe after confirmation Filter Refer to Browse Filters on page 4 8 Reset Filter Resets the selected filter Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Combined Process List Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Combined Process List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the menu Tools Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Combined Process Name Unique name of the combined process Combined Process Id Unique identification of the co
276. nformation appears refer to figure below Calibration Formulation Max Conc ia dE between the measured reflectances and the calculated reflectances pee 3 asUTeu g z Datacolor February 2005 5 7 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Opening context sensitive menus Context sensitive menus are available in different windows dialog boxes and fields Refer to the corresponding descriptions For opening set the mouse cursor into the corresponding field or table column and click the right button Specifying Modifying and Deleting Objects Z Note The delete move copy and rename functions are only available for users having the corresponding access rights Specify or modify an object you can specify new objects of another linked object type using the corresponding tab or selection field Example In the Quality Style Property Sheet you can specify a new affinity as fol lows Use the Affinity tab In the Affinity field of the Quality Style tab use the Input Form function of the context sensitive menu No Folder Ctrl F Ctrl B 4 24 A Affinity Folder Grey Quality Browse Lab Note Prod Note Opening the input form Action Result Notes 1 If available select the corresponding A context sensitive menu appears tab or right click the selection field where the new object should be entered
277. ng the original data This task copies the entire table to the Windows clipboard E g this is a simple way to transfer the data to Excel February 2005 7 155 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Print Preview Shows the print out in the Job Result table Refer to Exam ples of Printouts on page 7 158 Print Prints the result without displaying on screen Refer to Exam ples of Printouts on page 7 158 ASCII Output optional Writes the job result to an ASCII file An ASCII form must exist Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Close Sort Job Closes the sort job 7 156 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Details to the Job Result Table Standard Bordo Tolerance CMC 2 1 Iluminant D65 Sort type Group and Taper Clustered by Color Tapered by Color Tolerance Scaling 1 Distance Color 02 Min pieces in cluster 8 Max pieces in cluster Minimum Amount Maximum Amount Tapering method __ Linear Taper Distance 03 Print sort order Baten No ue cmc a CMO ACCME KONO E ZS P Oy 100204 C1440307 037 208205 07480205 0 4 a 200205 D7460205 021 200205 D7460205 0 pai 200205 D7460505 01 200205 E2070206 0 200205 E2070306 0 200205 E2070606 08 200205 E2070406 042 200204 C1440107 001 200207 G7350101 0088 200206 F1990303 029 200
278. nge the selection of dyestuffs P If a recipe is not possible you must add dyestuffs or use specify another colo rant set Parameters Take all None Using this check box you can select or deselect all dyestuffs The single dyestuffs are selected or deselected with a mouse click Group Selection or definition of dyestuff groups February 2005 7 119 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes _ Settings Tab Match Standard Process Data for matching Dyeset Lab Graphic f Save User s setting a E Biar J Seve Delete Predefined settings Calculate Defaut XXL Additional illuminants for match Calculate all combinations from No of solutions to display Accept when dE lt Stop the calculation when Available illuminants Observer Parameters i E is EI Bo matches with dE lt 0 04 and dM lt fos Smartmatch factor in Matching technology Lab smartmatch Weights for dH Selection E Precision Turbo to a for a value dE lt fe anddM lt e selected illuminants Tolerance formula ia z AD atacolor Default RF Factor 1 3 20 Cancel The parameter selection is altered according to Optimize using User s Settings Predefined Settings Additional Illuminants Selection or definition of the settin
279. nging 4 2 Population dialog box 7 127 Preliminary work recipe 5 69 Print delete print forms 4 28 existing BLEND recipes 5 151 existing recipes 5 104 export print forms 4 29 import print forms 4 29 modify print forms 4 28 recipe lists 5 84 rename print forms 4 28 specify print forms 4 26 Print form delete print forms 4 28 export 4 19 4 29 import 4 19 4 29 modify print forms 4 28 rename print forms 4 28 specify print forms 4 26 Process factor explanation 8 4 Datacolor Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide Process type explanation 8 4 Product data handling 5 34 deletion 5 35 explanation 8 4 overview 2 3 specify newly 5 35 updating 5 35 Product list window 7 90 Product property sheet dialog box 7 31 Production correction access from Datacolor Process 5 98 specify 5 96 Production recipe Datacolor TICKET 5 115 Q Quality data handling 5 26 explanation 8 4 overview 2 2 quality style property sheet 7 22 specify newly 5 27 update and delete 5 33 using SmartMatch points of other qualities 5 31 Quality list window 7 87 Quick search basics 5 4 dialog box 7 59 R Recipe approving for production 5 84 ASCII output 4 23 calculation Datacolor BLEND 5 142 check dyestuff selection 5 73 correction Datacolor BLEND 5 148 display and print 5 104 manual modification 5 81 matching 5 74 modification 5 79 modification using the editor 5 79 multi color matching 5 70 preliminary work 5 69 print lists 5 84 repla
280. o Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 7 50 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Tolerance Block Program Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes JPC79 Tab Tolerance Block Program xi 5 System E PE73 Creation Date 01 04 1999 Modification User ID DCI Description II CieLab BI CMC EI Datacolor v FMC2 JPC73 mses 58 Cie 94 E DIN 39 se Parameters Table Input for tolerance value Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 Datacolor February 2005 7 51 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes MS89 Tab Tolerance Block Program RE xj mx VEEE Creation Date 01 04 1999 Modification User ID DCI Description II CieLab E CMC E Datacolor FMC2 JPc7a El MS89 f Cie 94 E Din 93 f nly illuminants msTL84 10 msD65 10 and ms4 10 are approved for M589 msTL84 10 msD65 10 Parameters Table Input of dE values The other tolerance values are calculated Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 Note Z The user can only modify the dE values DH DC and DL are calculated automatically These values are displayed after saving the tolerance and closing and opening the dia log box 7 52 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Tolerance Block Program Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Cie 94 Tab eee Creation Date Modification User ID Descriptio
281. o be corrected Differences dE and dL between standard batch and Dif Formula On the left a graphical view of the differences is displayed If the differences are out of tolerance the message Batch refused appears and the traffic light is red SmartMatch analysis graphical display and SmartMatch result table Color differences standard batch according to the formula used for recipe calculation Check the box if the batch is measured with all fibres Selection of dyes Refer to Preliminary Work on page 5 69 section Selecting dyestuffs for matching on page 5 71 Minimum and maximum concentrations can be changed for the correction This can result in better corrections if more then 4 or 5 colorants are used by the recipe Settings tab The settings cannot be modified February 2005 7 97 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Laboratory Correction Table DCIMatch 0002 ELEFANT 002 O l8j xj Tl File Correct Tools Instrument Window Help 6 xj Se BNNs Resa wE ae ee NOOO ELEFANT N BEA a 183 dog I smartmatcn N i Performance _ Standard Original 0 0496 0 7692 0 0410 D 0410 Standard with D65 N bisperse Disperso JE L For Help press F1 DCI Table columns Dyestuff Used dyestuffs SmartMatch Recipe corrected using the SmartMatch algorithm Additive Recipe corrected using the additive algori
282. og box Box on page 7 57 for information about the parameters 2 Modifying Select the parameter alter the data and click Save Deleting Select the parameter click Delete and confirm the deletion 5 40 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Parameter Examples Parameter type String Value Name E Ho Folder Tal EX ighttastness 1 1 ID Ww Creation Date 6 22 99 Modification AnD User ID DCI Parameter Type Sting value ia Writ K E Ei g E Za Lighttastness 1 1 ci sa 5 LIIITITITTTTTTTITTTTTTTITITITTTETTTETTTETITYTTTETYTYTTTYTYTYTTTTYTYTTETTYTTTTETEETE Oe ARIEI E one Banana Parameter type List Box Parameter Definition x Name E Ho Folder pe Colored discharge dark ID COL DISCH D Creation Date 6 22 99 Modification AuwiD User ID DCI Parameter Type Listbox 7 OJ o Teist Unit z Partly Note Save Delete Clear Datacolor February 2005 5 41 Parameter type Value Parameter Definition gt a CAE atchina Time This parameter is used for a rule The batching time depends on a combined process 5 42 Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Color Type Measured color pattern A color type is substrate independent A color type is a standard and can be linked to a recipe
283. ogram asks for a 209 34 Fiber sets as soon as the recipe for the 1 fiber set is calculated The recipes are calculated one after the other because the 2 fiber recipe is influ enced by the first This behavior of Datacolor BLEND is a different to Datacolor MATCH exile 8 Select the next fiber set and repeat the calculation procedure starting with instruction 3 5 144 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor Recipe Calculation with An Existing Production Lot of Used Fibers If an existing production lot should be used as fiber for the recipe calculation you must measure or select a sample of the production lot as batch The program asks if you like to specify a new fiber based on that measurement and gives a proposal for the maxi mum percentage this fiber can be used This value is very rough information In reality you should start with smaller concentration If no recipe can be calculated you can switch back to modify the concentration again Standard Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Fiberset Wool Felt Pat 100 Batch and color difference sF lt i Jem S DEE RE 400 500 dE Mi theory to standard dE Mi theory to batch ati y Selection al es EC IC III EI Cancel Example The program asks to specify a new fiber on base of the batch me
284. olorant set The best colorant for calibration is auto matically selected 4 Select or specify the new substrate Click Sample to measure the cali The Create Calibration Series dialog bration samples box appears Refer to Create Calibration Series Dia log Box on page 7 82 6 Select the calibration samples from the database or measure them 7 Click Accept The Create Calibration Series dialog box closes Results are displayed in the graph and in the table 8 Check the results Refer to Review of the results on page 5 56 9 Click Accept if the results are OK The new correlated colorant set is cre ated when you accept the correlation data The type of interpolation is set to Correlated for all colorants The dE shows the red background color because there are no calibration sam ples The colorant set is ready to be used for matching Datacolor February 2005 5 55 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Review of the results Graphs 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Scattering versus concentrationScattering versus wavelength Plots on Concs C Wavelength Lam 400 Lam 440 Lam 480 Lam 520 Lam 560 Lam 600 Lam 640 Lam 680 Mean 35 pee sigma__ sigma o Cc 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Plots on C Concs fe C 2 00 C 10 00 C 25 00 C 50 00 C 75 00 C 100 00 C 120 00 C 140 00
285. on User ID Identification of creating or modifying user 7 40 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Product Property Sheet 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Stock Solution Tab Product propertysheet x Ausiliary Product Supplier Dyestuff Dyeclass Supplier Dyename Dyestuff Color Dyestuff Type Form Dye Description Stock Solution Name E CI AD efault Auxilar ID DEFAUX Creation Date 04 04 2000 Modification AuxiD User ID DCI Description Default settings defined 04 04 00 m Exhaust r Continuous Amount Stock Solution Amount Stock Solution smaller than g 1 smaller than g 1 0 5 10 1 10 0 1 100 0 5 100 0 01 1000 0 05 1000 0 001 10000 Save Delete Clear Parameters Name Unique name of the stock solution ID Unique identification of the stock solution AuxID Additional identification of the stock solution Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user Description Field for an additional description Exhaust Continuous Input fields for the stock solutions in relation to the amount in g Refer to Specifying A Stock Solution on page 5 36 Datacolor February 2005 7 41 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Formula Setting Dialog Box 7 42 Formula Setting E i x Nate These setting
286. on Series Dialog Box Dialog box for specifying new calibration samples Refer to Specifying Colorants and Calibration Samples on page 5 50 Create calibration serie Product Relative strength S J eri se EN Type of sample input Measurements From database Measure with inputs of conncentration values Levels Concentrations separated by blank or comma Terasil Yello 6 0 016 0 048 0 16 0 4 0 56 0 8 T RZA 8 0 1 02 03 04 05 06 OF 0 ene Terasil Yellow 4G Multiple Measure Strength K S Sample Terasil Yellow 4G 0 800 676 New calibration s serie Calibration Sample Terasil Yellow 4G 0 400 Terasil Yellow 4G 0 560 a a Terasil Yellow 4G 0 800 i 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 0 T Z S e 8 Reset Accept Cancel Parameters Product Selection of the product New button Opens the Product property box to insert a new product Refer to Specifying A New Product on page 5 35 Modify button Opens the Product Edition dialog box used to modify the selected product 7 82 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Create Calibration Series Dialog Box 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Product edition q x Values Name Bezaktiv Blue S GN 150 ID BBU SGN AuxID BBU SGN Creation Date 08 04 1999 08 11 57 Modification Date 04 04 2000 10 12 58 User DCI Product Supplier ID Bezema AG Product Type Colorant Product Form Solid Specific Wei
287. on for each re calibration samples again for each Re calibra li dwidS 4002 38 The value of this example is ok 9 If the value is ok click Accept The Instrument specific Formula Parameters dialog box appears Instrument specific Formula Parameters dialog box Instrument specific formula parameters Whiteness Ganz Parameters Phi Bandwidth D pg m ri k 016 43 727 495 73 3263 5 14 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics Checking the UV part of the bulb The periodical check of the UV emission of the bulb is done using an Illuminant Check er sample The Ganz Griesser whiteness is calculated and the UV filter is adjusted Measurement Main Window Measurement conditions Specular EXCL or Aperture 4 UV 68 0 EA Multiple FA Until Tol II Calibrate Instruments Setup 4 General Options El UV Calibration gt Periodical Illuminant checker 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile LAV he Flashes 2 he Cut off NONE Whiteness parameters Nominal whiteness UY Filter Position Re Calibrate parameters Whiteness of test tile fi 50 Position to set 70 using position Whiteness found Whiteness Diiterence Color Coord UY Calibration Methods D65 10 Ganz Griesser D65 10 CIE whiteness C ISO Brightness COM1 19200 N 8 2 Mult 4 Tol CieLab F 1 00 DE 1 0 Time left 4 4
288. on is required for a product you must define it in the Stock Solution tab Field for additional notes Opens the Formula Setting dialog box for product settings used by the production software Refer to Formula Setting Dialog Box on page 7 42 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Product Property Sheet Product Supplier Tab Datacolor Product PropertySheet d Dyestuff Type Form Ausiliary 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Dye Description Stock Solution Dyestutf Dyeclass Supplier Dyename Dyestuff Color la aicea E ID ca Creation Date 08 04 1999 Name EJ Al Data AuxlD User ID DCI Modification 03 06 1999 Contact person Mr Muer Address Kybechstass1 Address 2 C City E E NI Zip code poz State P Country Switzerland Phone number C Fax number O O E Mail P Parameters Name ID AuxID Creation Date Modification User ID Contact Person Address Address 2 City Zip Code Country Phone Number Fax Number E Mail Unique name of the product supplier Unique identification of the product supplier Additional identification of the product supplier Date of creation Date of last modification Identification of creating or modifying user Name of the contact person Address of the product supplier Additional address of the product supplier Address Name of the city Zip code Name of the country Phone number of the product suppl
289. on the File menu select Open Select Application Option object type Language and Version and click OK Alter the form as requested Refer to Specifying A New Print Form on page 4 26 In the toolbar or on the File menu select Save and click OK The Template Identification dialog box appears The selected form appears The print form is altered Deleting or Renaming A Print Form Action Result In the toolbar or on the File menu select Delete Rename Select the requested form Rename Click the form name alter the name and press ENTER Deleting Select Delete and con firm the deletion The Form Maintenance dialog box appears The name is altered The selected print form is deleted Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Print Forms Using the Pager Importing Print Forms 4 Configuration and Administration Action Result 1 On the File menu select Import The Open dialog box appears 2 Search and select the form to be The selected file is imported imported and click Open Exporting Print Forms Action Result 1 On the File menu select Export The Form Maintenance dialog box appears 2 Select the form to be exported and The Save as dialog box appears click Export 3 Select the path specify a file name The selected form is exported and click S
290. onable data for recipe lists is stored in the print form data base Action Result Notes Select the recipes to be printed in the Recipe List window On the context sensitive menu A print preview appears select Recipe List Approving You can approve a laboratory recipe using the Approve button in the Correct or Approve your Recipe dialog box refer to Correct or Approve Your Recipe Dialog Box on page 7 95 or in the Laboratory Correction dialog box refer to Laboratory Correc tion Dialog Box on page 7 96 If you approve a recipe all other trials and the recipe table will be deleted The recipe location is set to Laboratory and the recipe lock level is set to green The recipe can be used for production Recipes approved without measuring the batch are saved without SmartMatch information These recipes cannot be use for recipe search Recipes Inserted Manually by Datacolor PROCESS F Note Recipes created using Datacolor PROCESS can be listed printed and corrected with Datacolor MATCH tile if a colorant set has been selected in Datacolor PROCESS Missing data is added automatically The recipe has the status 1 created by Datacolor PROCESS CMC is stored as tolerance If a colorant set is not selected in Datacolor PROCESS an error message appears The colorant set must be added in Datacolor PROCESS All dyestuffs of the recipe must be calibrated in the colorant set
291. ons This dialog helps you maintaining a script for sorting and or tapering your samples The script defines the fundamental criteria according to which the batches will be sorted tapered This dialog is intended for experienced users only If you feel unsafe please press Cancel now Select an existing script E All Data i AT aper only CMC F 1 0 zi Note If you switch to input mode and enter a new name you can create a new script Description Taper only CMC F 1 0 Color taper distance 0 3 linear path OK Ubernehmen Hilfe Parameters Select an existing script Selection box with the name of the sort script Description Text box for an additional description of the sort script Datacolor February 2005 7 167 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes General Settings Tab Sort Script Maintenance xl Script Name General Settings Tapering Parameters View Options Output Options General Settings Do you want to group or taper or both what are your fundamental colorimetric conditions r Method C Group only Pi A Group and Taper Tolerance MCD CZ Illuminant E All Data is i ss 1 fo Maximum distance CMC Batch to Standard i DK _Abbrechen Ubemehmen Parameters Group only The program builds subsets of samples clusters groups that pass the pass fail decision based on the selected for mula and tolerance factor Taper on
292. op Evaluate Print Displays the colorimetric data in a print preview ASCII Creates a text file using a specified form Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Datacolor February 2005 7 101 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving Data that not has been saved will be lost Parameters of the Colorant Set tab Colorant Set Protected A Colorant Set tab is displayed for each colo rant set The colorant set name and the part of the corre sponding fibre in are displayed on the top Batch and Selection of the measured sample dyed according to the rec ipe to be corrected Information line Differences dE and dL between standard batch and Dif Formula On the left a graphical view of the differences is displayed If the differences are out of tolerance the message Batch refused appears and the traffic light is red First Correction Check the box if it is the first correction of the recipe and a SmartMatch point should be saved Total Batch Check the box if the batch is measured with all fibres Table Selection of dyes Refer to Preliminary Work on page 5 69 section Selecting dyestuffs for matching on page 5 71 Lab Graph tab Refer to Lab Graph Tab on page 7 119 Settings tab Refer to Match Dialog Box on page 7 116 section Parameters on page 7 120 7 102 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Product
293. ot all features will be available while in the demon stration mode The users should validate their software as soon as possible as it may take up to seven days to do so 2 Visit http pmweb datacolor com call the local sales office the Lawrenceville or Dietlikon call centers or mail the necessary information to Datacolor SoftwareLicense Datacolor com using the validation instruction sheet pro vided with the software Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor Security System 3 Installation Existing Installation If you already have one of the following Datacolor software packages Datacolor MATCHT e MatchExpress or Datacolor Process that run using a green software security key and receive an upgrade due to an upgrade purchase or a software maintenance agreement that does not require re licensing your software will run as before Continue to use the green software security key What Happens if the Software Security Key Stops Working If the software security key fails to work for any reason the software will be converted to the fourteen days demonstration period The user then has two options First check the software security key and make sure that it is still properly attached to the system If not reattach it and the software should run normally If it is attached and still fails to respond the software security key may have failed Use one of the methods listed in the New In
294. ottoblanc Aftertreatment Vv v __ REA BZ XH Bezema Exhaust Isotherme Method E M ___ REA LEY PB Levafix Pad Batch E M __ REA REM PB Sil Remazol Pad Batch Silicate CM ___ RED CL Reduction Clear C M ___ RNS 50 Rinse 50 O Vv __ RNS 70 Rinse 70 Vv Vv __ RNS CLD Cold Rinse E M ___ RNS CLD OFL RANS CLD OFL M Vv RNS CNT Continous Rinse E M zi v Find in Value query 4 Functions of the Select menu Quick Search Opens the Quick Search dialog box used to search opera tions Quick Search Dialog Box on page 7 59 Default Query Selects all operations Custom Query Only for advanced database users Opens the Query Designer Refer to the Datacolor Process documentation Operations used by a given comb process Opens the ITM dialog box that is used for specifying a CombProcess_ID After clicking OK the operations found are listed Operations used by a given Dye lot Opens the ITM dialog box that is used for specifying a Dye Lot_ID After clicking OK the operations found are listed Functions of the View menu Find in Value Opens a search bar in the window footer Click a table col umn specify a search value and hit the tabulator key Reset Resets the search bar in the window footer Record Count Displays the number of records found Buttons New Opens the Operation window used to specify a new opera tion Refer to Specifying Modifying Deleting An Operation on page 5 64
295. ow E Calibration Samples Opening and closing structure levels FE Basic A sign indicates that there are hidden subordi nate folders Isolan P Click the sign to open the next structure level Sa Telon M PA Click the sign to close all subordinate structure Telon Pa levels Selection of object types Cenker Side ES EE i 1 Select the requested object type using the left El Datamatch mouse button gt Calibration If All Data is selected all object types can be displayed Sample e Substrate E Demo Data ie Batches bee Fibramix bees Greentile pm Import Context sensitive menu E SmartSort E3 System e white Samples ae Delete EI System New root Folder five Recipe Rename Data Types in this Folder New Folder Adds a new subfolder to the selected folder Type a meaning ful name Delete Deletes the selected folder only if the folder is empty New Root Folder Rename Data Type in this Folder Find in Folder Datacolor Adds a new root folder Type a meaningful name Is used to rename the selected folder Opens the Data in Folder dialog box used for searching data types and the corresponding data in the selected folder Refer to Data in Folder Dialog Box on page 7 13 Opens the Find lt data type gt in Folder dialog box used for searching data with a determined name or part of the name The lt data type gt of the opened list window is used Refer to Find in
296. ow 7 85 Color type property sheet dialog box 7 45 Colorant explanation 8 2 Colorant set calibration methods 2 5 comparing colorants 5 59 complete imported textile printing colorant sets 5 57 explanation 8 2 import 4 14 introduction 5 47 move colorants 5 51 overview 2 4 re measure delete or move calibration sample 5 51 remove dyestuff 5 54 specify auxiliary recipe 5 49 specify colorant and calibration sample 5 50 specify for an alternate substrate 5 55 specify newly 5 48 using the graphical display 5 52 window 7 77 Colorant set list window 7 76 Combined process explanation 8 3 introduction 5 61 overview 2 6 specify modify delete 5 62 window 7 61 Combined process list window 7 93 Combined processes window 7 58 Compare colorants colorant set 5 59 Complete imported textile printing colorant set 5 57 Configure instrument correlation 5 16 Context sensitive menu opening 5 8 Datacolor Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide Correct or approve your recipe dialog box 7 95 Correction BLEND fast correction 5 150 dialog box Datacolor BLEND 7 179 existing recipe for a new standard 5 103 explanation 8 3 8 4 fast correction 5 99 introduction 5 91 laboratory correction 5 92 laboratory correction dialog box 7 96 laboratory correction table 7 98 manual graphical correction 5 101 overview 2 9 production correction 5 96 production correction dialog box 7 101 production correction from Datacolor Process 5 98 production cor
297. own leading characters and the objects found are displayed or for unknown characters between A mouse double click in the requested known ones and click OK object opens a window dialog box or property sheet that is used to alter or delete the corresponding object data Zi ae You can reduce the result list using the Search in result set function and more specific search criteria Example Quick search E x Search Type Enter your search values _ Starts with gt Pant 14 Pant 19 Fi gt QuickSearch Columns QuickSearch Rows ju Iv Name V AusiD C Search in result set X Cancel 7 Help 5 4 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics Datacolor 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Default query Action Result Notes 1 Select Default Query In the corresponding browse window all objects are displayed A mouse double click in the requested object opens a window dialog box or property sheet that is used to alter or delete the corresponding object data Custom query For advanced ITM Process users only Refer to the ITM Process documentation Field specific functions 1 feyDstamatch Cotton blea blanc dyeing Lev 2 Switch between selection and input mode 1 Click to switch between selection and input mode I Selection mode Input mode ia The input mode is locked Data selection step by step 2
298. ox closes Substrate Delivery Effect Dialog HE xj SubstrateDelivery 017642 PES CO 70 30 1 IN RR RR RR 2 Levafix SPB Soda 1 Remazol SPB Silicate h Insert an new Effect for a Dyeset iR emazol SPB Silicate Insert Delete Close Cose Using SmartMatch Points for other Qualities Check Use Affinity SmartMatch if SmartMatch points of all the qualities linked with the same affinity should be used Caution When this method of SmartMatch matching it is imperative that only qualities with the same dye behavior are linked to an affinity Otherwise the results of matching are unusable February 2005 Overwriting Measurements of Substrate Deliveries Note Z Overwriting a measurement of a substrate delivery is only possible if the substrate delivery is not linked to other data such as recipes etc If a sample is linked to a recipe and the measurement is not correct you will have to delete the recipe correctly re measure the sample and calculate the recipe again Example Quality Style Creation Date 02 09 99 55PES 45CV Libero Automn Modification User ID DCI r SubstrateDelivery ai _ m a 5SPES 45CV Libero Automn Normal Substr B Sample Measure gl The total substrate is correct r Sample The measurement for viscose is not correct 1 Click the Measure button and confirm the question in the warning
299. page 7 10 Sample List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Name Unique name of the sample RGB Color Display of the color Sample Id Unique identification of the sample Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Color Type List Window Datacolor Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Color Type Name Unique name of the color type RGB Color Display of the color Color Type Id Unique identification of the sample Name Name of the color Type Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 February 2005 7 85 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Tolerance List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser
300. pears Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Customizing Graphs 4 Configuration and Administration Setting Line Style and Color Reset Graphic Options 2 Change Color Change Printer Color General Curves Points fee With Origin Grid Styles Color Font C Solid line C Text color Points p Eo Change every line Change every line visible Curves gt Line width fr Cancel Apply Help Action Result 1 On the context sensitive menu The Graphic Options dialog box select More appears 2 In the Curves tab set style color and line width 3 Click OK Datacolor February 2005 4 31 Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration 4 32 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor s Using Datacolor MATCH t e Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Basics Starting Datacolor MATCH tile 1 On the Windows start menu or the desktop click the Datacolor MATCH amp t e icon Dap Ri Mah The Datacolor MATCHT le explorer with the Over Textile view window appears Data Handling Browse and Selecting Using the object tree All objects are displayed in a structured list on the left of the Explorer window Opening and closing structure levels A sign indicates that there are hidden subordinate folders and or objects Click the sign to open the nex
301. ple Value Value of the selected property Datacolor February 2005 7 169 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Property Tab Property Property type Standard fe Batch C Difference System Name BAT_FabricLenath X Data type C Sting Float C Double C Long C Integer Calculation IV Store to database Length i Iv Required Precision f IV Datacolor Tools input field Default Description Batch fabric length Save Delete Cancel Help Parameters Property type Selection of the property type Name Selection or input of the name Data type Selection of the data type Store to database If checked the property is stored in the database Required If checked the value must be filled in mandatory field Database Tools input field If checked the field is defined as input field in Datacolor TOOLS Length Length of a field of type String Precision Defines the number of decimals Default Field for setting a default value Description Description of the property 7 170 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Sort Job Definition Options Dialog Box In the sort job definition options dialog box can be specified which dialog boxes of the Sort Job wizard and tabs of the Sort Job Maintenance dialog box are displayed for specifying and modifying sort jobs The invisible tabs are filled with
302. plicated When you insert an operation all items are grabbed from the operation and saved in the generated recipe Recipes are not adjusted if you change the operation Production recipes created with the Data color TICKET are stored with a flat structure All recipes must be adjusted manu ally All items are added to the end of the list Do not forget to move the products to the correct position in the recipe Use the Drag and Drop method to move items to a different position Delete Removes the currently selected table line s OK Saves the currently displayed data and the dialog box closes Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving 7 150 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor TICKET 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Dye Lots List Window Datacolor moree AE File Select Dyelot Fi D Generation needed 20 Active 1 129 3 990426 001 40 Dyeing finished 129 s 990426 002 0 Generation needed 661 DLCOW 990426 005 20 Active 11129 9 990427 003 40 Dyeing finished 64 1 990427 008 B 10 Scheduled 64 M amp S 1 990427 011 0 Generation needed 64 1 1 1 990427 012 G 10 Scheduled 64 990427 013 10 Scheduled 64 990427 014 10 Scheduled 1 390427 015 JEENE Jes EE 2 E 990428 002 40 Dyeing finished 3 990428 005 40 Dyeing finished 64 M amp S 1 990428 008 20 Active 64 1 990428 009 20 Active 1277 10 990429 001 10 Scheduled 64
303. r AuxID Additional identification of the parameter Creation Date Modification User ID Parameter Type Date of creation Date of last modification Identification of creating or modifying user Parameter type Value for numeric values String for a string value List box for a list box Unit Unit Only used for Parameter Type Value Text List Text input for a list box Note Field for additional notes February 2005 7 57 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Combined Processes Browse Window F Note Refer to the Datacolor Process documentation for more information Browse window for combined processes Refer to Specifying Combined Processes on page 5 61 EEE PIE Fie Select CombProcess View New Open if Delete Quick Search fi Close CombProcess_ID CombProcess_AuxID CombProcess_Name Process type gt DISP Disp Disperse Exhaust Dispersal s Discontinu __ DISP Ter Disperse Exhaust Terasil s Discontinu ___ DISP REA 28 Disperse Exhaust Terasil _Reactive exhaust e Discontinu __ REA BEZ Reactive Bezema Exhaust s Discontinu __ REA LEV PB Levafix Pad Batch a Continuous __ REA REM PB Sil Remazol Pad Batch Silicate a Continuous VAT Exh Vats Exhaust s Discontinu zi Find in CombProcess_ID Value query Z Functions of the Select menu Quick Search Opens a dialog box used to search combined processes Refer to Quick
304. r BLEND Option Datacolor 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Black fiber i iuli Product Supplier 10 Product Type Mata Actua Peace Creation Date Modification Date Specify name product supplier and actual price Click OK box appears February 2005 The Create Calibration Series dialog 5 137 Create calibration serie z B E ool white felt i New Modify g lada ZE III 7 Wool white felt 100 004 0 00 6 Fill in the concentration of the white fiber part Click then Complete mixture to The program completes the black fiber concentrations 5 138 Datacolor MATCH T tle Version 1 0 Datacolor Create calibration serie Dee m a 7 Select or measure the samples and The Fiber Set window appears with click Accept the specified fibers 8 Continue with Colored Fibers on page 5 140 Datacolor February 2005 5 139 Colored Fibers Action Result Notes 1 In the table column Product click The Create Calibration Series dialog New box appears 2 Click New The Product Definition dialog box appears Product Definition E xj Name Product Supplier ID Product Type Note Actual Price Creation Date Modification Date 3 Specify name product supplier and actual price 4 Click OK The Create Calibration Series dialog box appears 5 140 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 D
305. r C Ab Fi lt Back Cancel 3 Select the Sort Script containing For more information about selecting the sort conditions you need data from the database refer to Data Handling on page 5 2 The sort script defines the sort opera tion All parameters defined in the sort script are used as defaults Depending on your access rights you can modify these default values Refer to Specify ing a New SORT job on page 5 122 and Modifying a Sort Script on page 5 130 4 Select a standard from the database If you do not select a standard the pro or click the Measure button The gram calculates the average of all Measurement dialog box appears batches and uses this as the theoretical Refer to Calibration and Measure standard for the pass fail decision ment on page 5 10 5 You can set filters to reduce the number of batches that are dis played for selection A filter might be a specific folder or any user defined field you have created either with Datacolor TOOLS or with Datacolor SORT Notes If you check want to use a Datacolor TOOLS Standard only Datacolor TOOLS standards are displayed to select from The batches linked to this standard are listed on the next page They are already selected if Automatically include new batches is checked In this case it is not possible to remove batches from the list This is only possible if Automatically include new batches is not selected Click the Measure button
306. r to Address Dialog Box on page 7 44 The address is inserted and the Address dialog box closes Action Result Notes Open the Customer Property sheet Modifying Select the customer alter the data and click Save Deleting Select the customer click Delete and confirm the deletion Refer to Customer Property Sheet on page 7 43 for information about the parameters February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying Modifying or Deleting Parameters The parameter values e g fastness are defined in a colorant set for each dye and used to set limits for the recipe calculation Specifying A Parameter Action Result Notes 1 Open the Parameter Definition Dia Refer to Parameter Definition Dialog log box Box on page 7 57 for information about the parameters 2 Specify the parameter name the Refer to Browse and Selecting on page type and the values 5 2 and Specifying Modifying and Deleting Objects on page 5 8 3 Click Insert The data of the new Parameter is creat ed Z Note The Formula Setting button is used for production Datacolor MATCH tle uses only the Calculate without Print button to exclude the parameters from printing P Fields marked with a red are mandatory Modifying and Deleting A Parameter Action Result Notes 1 Open the Parameter Definition Dia Refer to Parameter Definition Dialog l
307. r to Using SmartMatch Style tab and click Insert Points for other Qualities on page 5 31 The quality style is created The Sub strate Blank Dyeing and the Sub strate Delivery are activated 7 If the Substrate Blank Dyeing The Substrate Delivery Dialog box button is activated you have not appears Refer to Substrate Delivery measured a substrate Click Sub Dialog Box on page 7 27 for information strate Blank Dyeing to measure about the parameters the first substrate delivery Refer to Substrate Delivery Example If you have to measure a new sub on page 5 30 for an example strate delivery click Substrate Delivery 8 Measure a sample of the delivered Refer to Calibrating Your Spectropho substrate tometer on page 5 10 and Measure ment on page 5 20 9 Click Save The new quality style is created Note Fields marked with a red are mandatory Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Basic Data _ 5 Using Datacolor MATCHT X 6 _ Excluding Including Colorant Sets from into An Affinity Quality Style PropertySheet x Quality Style Affinity Fiber Group Fiber Name a B asi Fii ID PES TEX Creation Date 4 8 99 Modification 2 9 00 AuslD User ID DCI Fiber Group Fibers Dyeset Total 1 Foon RD gt _ Include PES 108 Disperse Dispersol Disperse Terasil Foron E Foron RD Delete Clear Note Z T
308. raphic Settings Ee Batchsize Laborat Dyeset Reactive Exhaust Part 30 lt 1423 e Ir Amount input _baboratoy Production r Batch amp color difference for CieLab Default D65 _Brodueten N00D6 PISTACHE N a Match batch dE 0 79 dL 0 72 dC 0 30 dH 0 08 da 0 03 db 0 31 A Batch accepted Match standard 400 500 600 700 r Smartmatch s point EMMitheon to standard 883533 oy a dE Mi theory to batch 0 79 7 90 I Total batch ripen Selection I SM Insert esa Concentration Fa Shown 7 selected 3 Min 100 Max 100 Relation Bezaktiv Yellow S 3R 150 Bezaktiv Red S 38 150 Bezaktiv Blue S GN 150 ColorLools Colorant Set Part Buttons Batch Size Batch and Evaluate Print ASCII Information line SM Analysis Total batch SM Insert Note Cancel Protected A Colorant Set tab is displayed for each colo rant set The colorant set name and the part of the corre sponding fibre in are displayed on the top Selection of the colorant set to be displayed only used with multiple qualities If Amount Input is checked the absolute amount of concen tration is entered Selection of the measured sample dyed according to the recipe to be corrected Differences dE and dL between standard batch and Dif Formula On the left a graphical view of the differences is displayed If the differenc
309. ration and parameters can be defined The acceptance limit settings can be altered Caution STOP A production correction is not saved It must be printed before closing the Pro duction Correction dialog box Otherwise the recipe will be lost Datacolor February 2005 5 91 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide Laboratory Correction 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Action Result Notes 11 Select the recipe to be corrected in the Recipe List window On the context sensitive menu select Pass Fail and Laboratory Correction or press F6 Click Pass Fail and Correction In the Batch and Color Difference field measure or select the sample If necessary alter the data in the dyestuffs table Click Save to save a manual correc tion Click Laboratory In the Recipe Correction dialog box you can look at the result of the matching The color differences between Standard and Batch are displayed If finished close the recipe table Click Yes Select the recipe output s accord ing your needs and or close the Show Full Recipe dialog box The Correct or Approve Your Recipe dialog box appears Refer to Correct or Approve Your Recipe Dialog Box on page 7 95 for a detailed description of the parameters The Laboratory Correction dialog box appears Refer to Laboratory Correction Dialog Box on page 7 96 for a detailed description of the paramete
310. rches for the closest next batch The program calculates a regression line and tapers the batches along this line The program calculates the total distance of all batches of a taper path using next neighbor and linear path methods The method with the lower total distance is selected as the Minimum Path Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes View Options Tab Sort Job Maintenance i WL a j a a j Ubemehmen In the View Options tab you can define what you would like to see in the results win dow Datacolor February 2005 7 165 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Output Options Tab Sort Job Maintenance lt Group Taper Separator Ubemehmen The last wizard page is used to set up the output and to select the coding you would like to use for groups clusters and tapers The print output sort order is linked to individual print forms One is used to print the job ordered by Group Taper code and the second is sorted identically to the order you have displayed in the output screen You can change the order in the output screen by clicking in the table columns 7 166 Datacolor MATCH e tle Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Sort Script Maintenance Dialog Box Script Name Tab x Script Name General Settings Tapering Parameters View Options Output Opti
311. re LAV 3 Flashes 2 4 UV 71 3 6 Cut off NONE E Single EI Multiple BI Until Tol II Calibrate Instruments Setup g General Options EI UV 4 gt Instrument type sF600 DCI Spectraflash 600 gt Driver requested Unispef32 dil Communication port Com Bits per Seconds fis200 Advanced Data bits E Parity bit N Stop bit EEE Serial Number Save Setup Com1 19200 N 8 2 Mult 4 Tol Cmc F 0 10 l 2 0 c 1 0 Time left 4 54 Parameters Ze Caution STOP An alteration of these parameters can interrupt the communication between the PC and the spectrophotometer Refer to the manual of your spectrophotometer Datacolor February 2005 7 19 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes General Options Tab Measurement Main Window x Measurement conditions Specular INCL Son UV amp 100 A Single Multiple EI Until Tol Calibrate Instruments Setup 4 General Options r Options Aperture Normal oe Flasher 100 amp Cut off NONE Single Measurement Lai Multiple Measurement La Until Tolerance Lai Instrument Calibration Lai Correlation Lai Green Tile Test Single Measurement 51mM1000 COM1 19200 N 8 1 Mult 4 Tol CieLab F 1 00 DE 1 0 Time left 0 00 Parameters Definition of general parameters for single measurement multiple measurement until tolerance calibrat
312. re measure color types if they are linked to other tables Calibrating Your Spectrophotometer Your spectrophotometer must always be calibrated after switching on It is recommend ed to calibrate at least every eight hours Different types of spectrophotometers have different settings This section gives a general description of the calibration Action Result Notes 1 Check that your spectrophotometer is switched on Note Leave the spectrophotometer to warm up for a few minutes Datacolor recommends that for the greatest accuracy you should wait thirty minutes before calibrating 2 If you select the Measure Directly Refer to Measurement Main Window on page 7 15 a button missing calibrations are E requested automatically For an intentional calibration click the Measure E button and in the opened Measurement dialog box select the Calibrate tab After specifying the parameter val ues according to your spectropho tometer click Calibrate 3 Follow the advice on the screen Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics Datacolor 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile UV Calibration Calibration Methods Note There are several methods that can be used to calibrate the adjustable UV filter posi tion Please refer to the whiteness standard you are using to determine the method to be used Ganz Griesser This procedure uses the Ganz Griesser calibration method The light source is filtered
313. recalculating the recipe Opens the Recipe Correction dialog box Used for calculating the recipe to correct the dyed production Opens the Production Correction dialog box The application assumes that exactly the calculated recipe has been used to dye the batch A correction therefore only makes sense if the color difference is not too large dE lt 5 If the color difference is larger something has gone wrong during dyeing In this case the Match Batch calculates a new recipe using the dyestuffs of the original recipe The new recipe becomes the base for correction and a SmartMatch point is not saved Calculates a new recipe for the standard Opens the Datacolor Tools application for color quality con trol Standard and batch are transferred automatically from the Datacolor MATCH tile database to the Datacolor Tools database Print Displays the colorimetric data in a print preview ASCII Creates a text file using a specified form Refer to ASCII Output Option on page 4 20 Closes the dialog box without saving Data that not has been saved will be lost February 2005 7 105 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Process Data for Matching tab Fast correction for Y0006 PISTACHE 001 Standard Save Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Quality Style Laborat Bpan u etn Proce mese 017642 PES CO 70 30 _ Disperse Exhaust Terasill Reactive
314. rection table 7 103 recipe Datacolor BLEND 5 148 specify theoretical reflectance values 5 96 Correction recipe dialog box Datacolor BLEND 7 181 Create batch series dialog box Datacolor MONITOR 7 140 Create calibration series dialog box 7 82 Current population dialog box 7 125 Custom query basics 5 5 Customer data handling 5 39 deletion 5 39 overview 2 3 specify newly 5 39 updating 5 39 Customer list window 7 91 Customer property sheet dialog box 7 43 Customize browser 4 6 graphs 4 30 D Data export 4 12 import 4 13 Data handling basics 5 2 Data in Folder dialog box 7 13 February 2005 9 3 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Database backup using Datacolor Match Textile 4 16 backup using Sybase utilities 4 17 maintenance 6 2 Datacolor Match Textile removing 3 6 security system 3 4 setting up 3 2 starting 5 2 system requirements 3 2 updating 3 3 Datacolor Process access to production correction 5 98 Datacolor tolerance block dialog box 7 55 Default query basics 5 5 Delete calibration sample 5 51 color type 5 43 combined process 5 62 customer 5 39 Dye class 5 38 Dye process 5 38 object 5 9 objects 5 8 operation 5 64 parameter 5 40 print forms 4 28 product 5 35 quality Style 5 33 tolerance value 5 46 user s data 4 2 Dispenser connecting 4 11 Display existing BLEND recipes 5 151 existing recipes 5 104 Dye class data handling 5 38 deletion 5 38 explanation 8 3 specify newly 5 38 updating
315. ries The first column displays the color of each sample Sample Unique name of the sample The header contains the num ber of listed samples dE Delta E color difference dependent to the calibration method Strength Relative strength in percents Do not use If checked the sample is not used for the calculation Context sensitive menu Re measure Calibration Sample Refer to Calibration and Measurement on page 5 10 New Calibration Sample Refer to Specifying Colorants and Calibration Samples on page 5 50 Move Calibration Sample Refer to Moving Colorants on page 5 57 Delete Calibration Sample Removes a calibration sample from the colorant set New button Click to add a new calibration sample 7 80 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Colorant Set Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Components in One Calibration Series Table Datacolor Product Unique name of the product The header contains the num ber of listed products Type Product type Concentration Numeric value of the concentration Unit Unit used for the concentration New button Click to add a new product Context sensitive menu New Calibration Component Is used to add a product Move Calibration Component Is used to change the order of the products Delete Calibration Component Removes the selected product from the colorant set February 2005 7 81 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Create Calibrati
316. ription of the batch series 7 140 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor MONITOR 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Batch Series Script Name Dialog Box Refer to Specifying A Script on page 5 106 e Script Name Datacolor February 2005 7 141 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Batch Series Type Dialog Box Refer to Specifying A Script on page 5 106 Batch Series Type eftCenter 7 142 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor MONITOR 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Batch Series Relation Dialog Box Refer to Specifying A Script on page 5 106 Batch Serie Relation x Datacolor Releation with standard O Left Standard LeftCenter Standard 1 0 RightCenter Standard 1 0 Chawdard Relation with previous batch LeftCenter LeftCenter RightCenter RightCenter 1 0 Right Right Relation with batch on same line Left LeftCenter O LeftCenter RightCenter LI RightCenter Right ate esa Seer February 2005 7 143 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Select Current Illuminants Dialog Box Refer to UV Calibration on page 5 11 2l z Pi Select current illuminants xj Available illuminants Selected illuminants D65 10 7 144 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor TICKET 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor TICKET Recipe List Window
317. rs Refer to Matching on page 5 74 sec tion Selecting dyestuffs for matching on page 5 71 The correction recipe is saved The Recipe Correction table appears Refer to Laboratory Correction Table on page 7 98 The Laboratory Correction Table can be configured Refer to View Configura tion Dialog Box Laboratory Correction Table on page 7 100 A save request appears The Save Your Recipe dialog box appears The Show Full Recipe dialog box appears Refer to Matching on page 5 74 section Show Full Recipe Dialog Box Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Correction 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Example Labor Correction for 0005 ORANGE Standard tuner TT 0005 ORANGE 2 approve Save Laborat Dyeset Reactive Exhaust Part 100 __Laboratoy r Batch and color difference with formula Bee R 5 No Folder Reset batch fi n gt NOD0S ORANGE N i dE 303 dC 249 dH 1 71 dL 018 da 0 05 db 302 Dyeset Settings a Ww nr I SM Analyse Color differences standard batch according to the formula used for recipe calculation 400 500 600 700 en et et oe IS IEEE EEE RR RE PR 0 PE Bezaktiv Navy Blue S BL i i ColorTools Evaluate displays colorimetric data for standard and batch End Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Table
318. rties in Datacolor SORT This may affect your Datacolor TOOLS desktop data Properties may be used as input fields by screen forms in Datacolor TOOLS Make all modification with Data color TOOLS Form Editor instead Datacolor February 2005 5 131 Pre Selections of User Defined Fields The User fld file may contain many fields that cannot be used by Datacolor SORT This task is used to select only relevant user defined fields for Datacolor SORT User Field Pre Selection l xj m Batch Properties m Pre Selection Properties BAT_DCC_STATUS BAT_FABRIC_LENGTH BAT_IMAGE BAT_QUALITY_LEVEL BRAND_LABEL FABRIC_SUPPLIER BRAND_MANAGER BRAND_MNGER_EMAIL BUYER CHROMA_BRIGHT_EXTREME CHROMA4_BRIGHT_MODERATE CHROMA_BRIGHT_SLIGHT CHROMA_DULL_EXTREME CHROMA4_DULL_MODERATE CHROMA_DULL_SLIGHT COMMENTS_1 COUNTRY_ORIGIN DCC_CAL_1_1_04 DCC_CAL_1_1_05 DCC_CAL_1_10_04 DCC_CAL_1_10_05 DCC_CAL_1_11_04 DCC CAL 1011205 DEC CAL 11204 DEC CAL 121205 DECCAL 11304 DEC CAL 11305 DEC CAL 114 04 Add All gt gt lt Remove lt lt Remove Al Save Cancel Action Result Notes 1 Select the fields in the Batch Prop Datacolor SORT shows only the pre erties list box and click Add to selected fields to filter the sample list move them into the Pre Selection according your field settings or to input Properties list box the batch property field value when you measure new batches 5
319. rty that describes the absorp tion of light by a colorant or mixture of colorants A ratio of the Kubelka Munk constants K coefficient of Absorption and S coefficient of Scattering A theory that describes the optical behavior of materials which scatter and absorb radi ant energy Refer to Correction Two samples which match under one set of conditions but no longer match on changing one or more of the conditions A pair of colors that match under one or more sets of conditions but differ markedly in color if you change one or more of the conditions A metameric pair of samples have the same tristimulus values for a specific set of viewing conditions but have different reflec tance curves Reflectance data of a dyestuff is manipulated for a non linear build up of K S It is used when an error in making a sample or contamination causes the build up curve to dip and divert in the opposite direction to the general trend Monotone means keeping the same slope as the general trend Descriptive of a match that is commercially unacceptable February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Quality Style Operation Parameter Process Process factor Process type Product Production correction Recipe calculation S Sample Scattering Security key Settings SmartMatch point SmartMatch population Smoothed data Specular reflectance Specular reflectance coefficient Standard Stock solution
320. s Copy Refer to Maintain the Sample Property on page 5 131 If you open an existing sort job the program recalculates the job with the settings and batches saved in the job Executing the option Recalculate the program reads the Sort Script again and re builds the job with all modified set tings If want to use a Datacolor Tools Standard was acti vated in the job all new batches are added automatically This task is very important if you build the groups and tapers on the basis of fabric length For example if some of the fab ric rolls have been delivered and the remaining length has changed the job must be recalculated so that the new length is taken into account when new clusters and tapers are built You can select other data to be displayed in the Job Result window View Options F x m Table Options _ r Graph Options FR dE CMC C Lab Graph m P dLICMC Difference Graph gi I dCICMC J E P dH CMC J E M WIGG J TGG J WICIE S T CIE Cancel You can remove batches from a job e g if the sample fabric roll is delivered The sample is grayed out but it is not deleted from the job To re activate the sample remove the check from the option Refer to Modifying a SORT job on page 5 125 Saves the job You can specify a copy of an existing job using the function The copy of the job can be used to cluster and taper with new conditions without loosi
321. s a color recipe prediction software especially designed to assist users in the complex process of fiber blending Datacolor BLEND is a powerful tool for calculating the required amounts of pre dyed fiber material to be used in the fiber blending process for both laboratory and produc tion use Datacolor BLEND is designed with user friendliness in mind Each color can be calculated as a mixture of any fiber material and from any shade An important addi tional function is that dyeing recipes can be predicted with Datacolor MATCH TeXtlle jn order to calculate the dyestuff amounts for dyeing fibers not currently in stock The functions for recipe creation and correction help the user to calculate blends with maximum efficiently and where required at the lowest cost Datacolor BLEND is based on Datacolor MATCHIEXiile the most comprehensive color recipe software for textile processing The application of fiber blending melanges requires different mathematics in order to calculate the amounts of individual colored fibers required to specify a melange fabric felt garment etc Companies that are involved in this application either use dyed fiber skeins only and mix them in various percentages to obtain the desired mixture or have their own fiber dye house for producing the raw material themselves and are capable of carrying out supplementary dyeing if a mixture of existing colored fibers does not result in the target color In ad
322. s a measurement of a blank substrate or an optical brightened sample Datacolor February 2005 7 45 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Tolerance Block Program Dialog Box General parameters Name Unique name of the tolerance Modification Date of last tolerance User ID Identification of creating or modifying user Description Text field Buttons Delete Deletes the selected tolerance Default Sets the default values in the selected tab Save Saves the current tolerance Close Closes the dialog box Refer the following pages for information about the tabs 7 46 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Tolerance Block Program Dialog Box CieLab Tab 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Tolerance Block Program B x CieLab Default Creation Date Modification User ID System S 01 04 1999 04 04 2000 DCI j Description II CieLab CMC E Datacolor i FMC2 JPC79 2 Msea 8 Cie 94 W DIN 39 All Muminants 1 00 IV Symmetric tolerances Parameters Table Input values for minimum and maximum tolerances Symmetric Tolerances Minimum and maximum values are symmetric Refer to Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances on page 5 44 Datacolor February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes CMC Tab rolerance Block Program e Stem o E el ICMC 21 Creation Date 01 04 1999 Modification User ID DCI
323. s and Dialog Boxes Example 2 Printout sorted by name sort order depends on order on result screen 01 10 2003 11 10 DCI datacolor JobName Bordo 30 09 2003 11 43 07 SortType Group and Taper Tolerance Scaling 1 00 Standard Bordo ClusteredBy Color Distance Color 0 20 Tolerance CMC 2 1 D65 TaperingMethod Linear TaperedBy Color TaperDistance 0 30 MinPiecesInCluster 8 MaxPiecesInCluster Minimum Amount Maximum Amount OrderedBy Cluster BatchName ES a E g cin dE CMC dl CMC dC CMC dH CMC CiusterPathSeq 200204 C1440307 037 27 86 40 21 17 07 43 68 23 00 0 47 0 33 0 20 0 27 Pass 200205 D7460205 017 27 07 40 48 1816 44 37 2416 0 43 0 20 0 08 0 38 Pass 200205 D7460205 021 26 89 40 59 18 34 44 54 24 31 0 58 0 31 0 16 0 46 Pass 200205 D7460205 0244 26 88 40 57 18 31 44 52 24 29 0 57 0 32 0 14 0 45 Pass 200205 D7460505 069 27 25 40 89 18 37 44 83 2419 0 48 0 08 0 27 0 39 Pass 200205 E2070206 017 27 65 40 19 17 19 43 71 2315 0 32 0 18 0 19 019 Pass 200205 E2070306 037 27 70 39 95 17 10 43 45 2318 0 41 0 22 0 29 017 Pass 200205 E2070606 085 27 86 39 97 16 87 43 38 22 88 0 57 0 33 0 32 0 34 Pass 200205 E4180709 089 27 49 40 09 17 23 43 64 23 25 0 27 0 08 0 22 013 Pass AN 200206 F4500102 005 27 49 40 20 17 24 43 74 23 21 0 25 0 08 0 17 016 Pass ANZ 200206 G5650203 017 27 48 4015 17 18 43 67 2317 0 28 0 07 0 20 0 18 Pass ANIS 200206 F4500202 017 27 47 40 05 17 26 43 61 23 31 0 26 0 07 0 23 0 10 Pass ANIA 200205 E2070306 025
324. s are used in production software only Formula Setting for Persoftal L Default Unit Auxiliary calculation with supplier dyestuff strength B I Printi T Print onk with or Totalize quantities Print if zero tint only with price Chinn I Calculate without print I Use small fonts Folie pepe C Total Repeat value Minimum Value 0 000000 Max decimal places o Maximum Value Jo 000000 ErrorMessage Save Close Parameters Default Unit Unit for the formula Save button Saves the current settings Close button Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved All other parameters are only used for production Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Customer Property Sheet 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Customer Property Sheet Buttons Save Delete Clear Close Customer Tab Customer PropertySheet x Saves the displayed customer definition Deletes the displayed customer definition after confirmation Clears the fields of the currently displayed tab Closes the window If data is altered the program requests the data be saved Customer Name e All Datak 44 arks amp Spencer a ID M amp S Creation Date 14 04 1999 J Modification 16 11 1999 AuslD User ID DCI ToleranceName f bed eaMS89 a ToleranceF actor ft Address Delete Clear Close Parameters Name ID AuxID Creation Date Modific
325. s for different colorant sets The effects must be defined in the Effect Using column Refer to Substrate Delivery Example on page 5 30 Buttons Insert Adds the current colorant set to the table Save Saves the currently displayed effect Delete Deletes the currently displayed effect Close Closes the Substrate Delivery Effect Dialog box If data is altered the program requests the data be saved 7 28 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Dye Process Property Sheet 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Dye Process Property Sheet Dye Process Tab DyeProcess PropertySheet E x Dye Process Process Factors Name za Fa A eactive Cold Pad Batch Soda ji i eooo Creation Date 08 04 1999 z Modification 04 06 1999 SuslD User ID DCI RE All Data S E E T i Process Type es CT e Continuous Pickup zk 10 Unt e i V Dye Class Enter the Dyefibergroups Group of fiber s dyed in the same bath ie CO COVI Delete Clear Close Parameters Name Unique name of the fiber ID Unique identification of the fiber AuxID Additional identification of the fiber Creation Date Date of creation Modification Date of last modification User ID Identification of creating or modifying user Dye Class Selection box for the dye class Process Type Selection of process type liquor ratio pickup and unit Table Shows the dye fiber group fibers or fiber
326. s is selected in the call off Call offs must contain the dye class if the liquid ratio or pickup is not the same for all color reci pes of the operation Dye Class Mandatory Dyestuff specification place marker Opens a selection window for dye classes Product Opens a selection window for products Parameter Opens a selection win dow for parameters Note Inserts a row for additional notes Click OK 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Notes In the ID field other dye classes products and parame ters can be selected Click the corresponding table cell and open the pull down list In the value field click the browse button to specify formu lae Refer to Specifying Formulae on page 5 66 The Operation dialog box is closed and the data is saved February 2005 Specifying Formulae Formulae are specified in the Formula Edit window Refer to Formula Edit Window on page 7 71 Action Result Notes 1 Select dye class or product for the X axis and liquor ratio or pick up for the Y axis 2 Using the cursor keys you can add rows or columns Specify the limits of the ranges 3 Specify the absolute values into the corresponding table cells If you need intermediate values check the corresponding box es Example E Formula_Edit X Dye class C Product Disperse gt Interpolate onX Dye class Disperse 12 15 125 Liquor ratio C Pickup Int
327. sary 9 Index TOC 10 Datacolor MATCH tile version 1 0 Datacolor About Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 1 About About this Guide Who Should Use this Guide This is the Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide It is to be read by users of the Data color MATCH tile system who need to know how to begin using the programs Once you are familiar with Datacolor MATCH e tile this guide provides a reference to help you carry out specific tasks using the system This guide assumes you are familiar with Microsoft Windows How to Use This Guide This guide is divided into the following main chapters Preface Edition copyright and trademarks impor tant addresses Contents Table of contents About Information about this guide 2 Overview Overview of the relationships between the specifications needed for matching 3 Installation Installation description for Datacolor MATC H Textile 4 Configuration and Administration Configuration and administration of Datacolor MATCH Textile 5 Using Datacolor MATCH lextile This chapter provides you with the basic information you need to start and use the system A step by step description shows you the specification of the basic data and the calculation and correction of recipes 6 Maintenance and Error Handling Maintenance of the spectrophotometer the database and error handling 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Description of the windows and dialog boxes with their parameters In Chapter 3 Instal
328. se for linked data This may take some time All linked data will be listed when the search process is finished If you are sure that the colorant should be removed from the colorant set click Delete All to delete all linked data now Linked data could be current recipes matching tables correction tables and SmartMatch points Caution You cannot undo this action Datacolor MATCH tile version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Colorant Sets 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Specifying A Colorant Set for An Alternate Substrate Note Z This function can build a colorant set with information based on a few calibration dye ings made on the new substrate The colorant should cover the complete spectrum in order to generate enough information about the colorant build up on the new substrate The calculation of the correlated colorant set is based on an existing colorant set and on the information calculated from the calibration dyeings on the new substrate The quality of such a colorant set depends strongly on a similar dyeing behavior of all colorants to the colorant used to calculate the correlation parameters Action Result Notes 1 Open the Colorant Set List window 2 On the Colorant Set or the context The Alternate Substrate Information sensitive menu select dialog box appears New gt Refer to Alternate Substrate Information Textile Alternate Substrate Dialog Box on page 7 84 3 Select the reference c
329. sed on a theoretical calculated recipe of the standard or a recipe typed in manually This task is mainly used for production correction Action Result Notes 1 On the context sensitive menu select Fast Correction or press F8 2 In the Process Data for Fiber Matching tab select the Fiber Set accept or modify the Part for the selected fiber set and select the Standard 3 In the Colorant Set tab select the fibers used for the recipe and specify the concentration 4 Select the fibers and type the con centrations valid for the current batch 5 Measure or select the batch to be corrected 6 Click Correction Continue with chapter Recipe Cor rection on page 5 148 The Fast Correction Recipe Input dia log box appears Refer to BLEND Fast Correction Dialog Box for a detailed description of the parameters The Recipe Correction tab appears Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Displaying and Printing Existing BLEND Recipes 5 Using Datacolor MATCH tile Displaying and Printing Existing BLEND Recipes Action Result Notes 1 Select the recipe in the Recipe List window 2 On the context sensitive menu The Show Full Recipe Dialog Box dia select Lab Dyelot or press Enter log box appears Recipe Output New output features Colorimetric data is printed color difference and metamerism for standard batch and standard theoretical batch of corr
330. select are dynamic and depend to the selected tolerance formula 7 Click Next The following dialog box appears Group Limits E x Group Limits Define the limits for this sort operation Minimum Maximum Limit the number of batches in one group to 8 C Limit the total in one group to C Limit the number of Groups J 2 lt Back Cancel Help Parameters Limit the number of batches in one group to You can define a minimum and a maximum number of batches in a group If no maximum is given there is no limit Limit the total XXX in one group to Here you can limit the group to the value of a user defined field e g fabric length quality level etc Limit the number of groups This limits the number of groups to the range you type in 8 Select the group limits 9 Click Next The following dialog box appears 5 128 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Tapering Parameters xi Tapering Parameters You have decided to taper What type of tapering do you prefer m Tapering Method C Next Neighbour TO dLICMC C Linear Path Minimum Path J dCICMC I dHICMC Start a new taper sequence if distance CMC greater than fos lt Back Cancel 10 Select the tapering parameters The parameters can be different than selected for clustering In addition to the sort type you must select a tapering method Refer to Tapering Parameters Tab on page 7 163 11 Cl
331. sert a Theoretical Sample dialog box used for saving theoretical reflectance values E g for Datacolor Envision Datacolor Tools can send this data to a user with a Datacolor Envision system to check the color for example Refer to Specifying The oretical Reflectance Values on page 5 96 View Configuration Opens the View Configurations dialog box used to define the display of the calculated values and the number of decimal places for colorimetric and concen tration data Reset Sort Order Resets the sort order of the recipes Add Trial Up to five recipes can be marked After closing the table the selected recipes are saved for further use Remove Last Trial Removes the last trial mark Hide recipes not selected The recipe table only shows the selected recipes e Show all recipes Shows all recipes e Mail Table Opens the mail form with an attached screen shot of the recipe table JPEG format e Modify Refer to Manual Recipe Modification Recipe Table on page 5 81 Round Refer to Round the Dyestuff Concentration Recipe Table on page 5 81 e Manually Change Refer to Manual Graphical Correction on page 5 101 Pressing the Ctrl key and clicking in the recipe number field selects the recipes Clicking in a parameter name first column in the table with the calculated values sorts the recipe table according to the values of the corresponding row Alteration of weighting only possible for metamerism lf you have
332. splayed with a greater diameter Hides the selected curve Do not use this point Use this point not used for colorant set program Restore all points Colorant Table Datacolor Product Created Modified dE Min Conc Max Conc Interpol Monotony No_samples_Subs Strength New button The selected point is either used or not used for calibration The point is displayed in a red color if it is not used Resets all points Only used for Reflectance of Calibration Samples and Absorptions of Calibration Samples graphs Unique name of the product The header contains the number of listed products Date and time of creation Date and time of the last modification Delta E color difference between current samples and the theoretical values A red background indicates that there are no selected or measured calibration samples Specification of the minimum concentration Specification of the maximum concentration Calibration method Measured Smoothed Automatic Check to set the monotony interpolation Number of calibration samples plus substrate Product strength in percents Click to add a new product Functions of the context sensitive menu R vs Wavelength K vs Wavelength Displays the reflectance in relation to the wavelength Displays the absorption K S in relation to the wavelength K vs Concentration at Maximum Value Displays the absorption K S in relation to the co
333. st of dyestuffs used for the SmartMatch point Colorant Set Name Unique name of the colorant set Functions of the Smart and the context sensitive menu Open Population by SM ID Opens the Open population for given ID dialog box Type the ID and click OK to open the Current Population dialog box Refer to Current Population Dialog Box on page 7 125 Show Population of Marked SmartMatch Point Opens the Current Population dialog box Refer to Current Population Dialog Box on page 7 125 If a group is selected a message appears with the group ID You can open the group using the Open Population by SM ld function and this ID Release Points from Group The group of SmartMatch points is removed and the single points are saved Refer to Release SmartMatch Points from the Group on page 5 88 Automatic SmartMatch Housekeeping Refer to Automatic SmartMatch Maintenance on page 5 86 Save Batch as Sample Opens a dialog box to save a sample using a SmartMatch point or group Refer to Saving A Batch as A Sample on page 5 89 User s Browser Definition Opens the Browse Columns for Explorer dialog box Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Rename Used to rename a selected recipe Delete Deletes the selected recipe after confirmation Filter Refer to Browse Filters on page 4 8 Reset Filter Resets the selected filter 7 94 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Correct or Approve Your Recipe Dialog Box
334. stallations section to contact Datacolor for validating the software using the software security component What Happens if the User Changes Computers If the user needs to change computers the software will need to be re validated Simply follow one of the procedures listed in the New Installations section to contact Datacolor with an explanation of why you need to re validate your software The validations will be tracked in the Datacolor network to detect any abnormalities and protect the value of your software purchase Note Z In this case the website will not directly validating the user s software but an email will be generated for a validation request Upgrading Your Purchase Some software packages offer the ability to upgrade the user s purchase level Using the software security model it is now easier for users to upgrade their purchase if they want a higher level of software or a new feature module Simply contact your sales rep resentative to make the purchase You will be issued a new serial number and a new validation number for your computer That enables you to run the new features Datacolor February 2005 3 5 Datacolor MATCH ile User s Guide 3 Installation Removing Datacolor MATCH te Action Result On the Windows desktop double The My Computer dialog box appears click the My Computer icon Double click Control Panel The Add Remove Programs Proper ties are opened Double click Ad
335. stomer List Combined Process List 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Opens the Parameter List window Refer to Parameter List Window on page 7 86 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting Parameters on page 5 40 Opens the Fiber List window Refer to Fiber List Window on page 7 86 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Quality Style on page 5 26 Opens the Fiber Group List window Refer to Fiber Group List Window on page 7 87 Fiber Group Tab on page 7 25 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Quality Style on page 5 26 Opens the Substrate Delivery List window Refer to Sub strate Delivery List Window on page 7 87 Substrate Delivery Dialog Box on page 7 27 and Specifying Modifying or Delet ing a Quality Style on page 5 26 Opens the Quality Style List window Refer to Quality Style List Window on page 7 87 Quality Style Property Sheet on page 7 22 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Quality Style on page 5 26 Opens the Affinity List window Refer to Affinity List Window on page 7 88 Quality Style Property Sheet on page 7 22 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Quality Style on page 5 26 Opens the Dye Process List window Refer to Dye Process List Window on page 7 88 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Dye Process on page 5 37 Opens the Dyestuff Class List window Refer to Dyestuff Class List Window on page 7 88 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Dye C
336. styles and symbols 1 3 Manual input tolerance values dialog box 7 56 Match dialog box 7 116 introduction 5 67 multi color matching 5 70 recipe 5 74 Matching overview 2 7 February 2005 9 5 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Measure multiple measurement 5 21 samples 5 20 until tolerance measurement 5 22 Measurement main window dialog box 7 15 Menu functions basic data 7 10 explorer 7 4 Page View Designer 7 137 Messages error messages 6 2 Metameric match explanation 8 3 Metamerism explanation 8 3 Modify combined process 5 62 Datacolor SORT job 5 125 Datacolor SORT script 5 130 formula 5 66 maintain sample property Datacolor SORT 5 131 manual modification of recipes 5 81 modification of recipes using the editor 5 79 objects 5 8 operation 5 64 print forms 4 28 recipes 5 79 replace dyestuffs in recipes 5 82 user s data 4 2 MONITOR adding a graph panel 5 112 batch series relation dialog box 7 143 batch series script name dialog box 7 141 batch series type dialog box Window batch series type dialog box Data color MONITOR 7 142 batch series window 7 139 create batch series dialog box 7 140 option 5 106 printing a batch series 5 114 select current illuminations dialog box 7 144 specify a batch series 5 110 specify a script 5 106 Monitor calibrate with Spyder2 4 24 Monotone data explanation 8 3 Move calibration sample 5 51 colorants 5 51 9 6 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 9 Index N New dye lot d
337. sult 1 In the Tools menu select The assistant for monitor calibration Calibrate Monitor appears Monitor Calibration Please click on your monitor type 2 Follow the advises on the screen 4 24 Datacolor MATCH tle Version 1 0 Datacolor Sending E mails 4 Configuration and Administration Sending E mails All print files can be sent as an e mail if a mail program is installed that meets the MAPI standard e g MS Outlook Mailing Basic Data Lab Dye Lots Colorant Sets Action Result 1 In the corresponding list window select the objects that should be mailed 2 On the Basic data menu select The Print Preview appears Display 3 Click the e mail button The e mail form appears i The pages of the print preview are converted to the JPEG format and attached to the e mail 4 Fill in the form with e mail address and mail text and send the e mail Mailing Recipe Tables Action Result 1 On the context sensitive menu ofthe The e mail form appears recipe table click Mail Table The recipe table is converted to the JPEG format and attached to the e mail 2 Fill in the form with e mail address and mail text and send the e mail Datacolor February 2005 4 25 Datacolor MATCH tle User s Guide Specifying Print Forms Using the Pager 4 26 Starting the Pager 4 Configuration and Administration The pager is used to specify print forms A set of forms is deli
338. t Selected Samples Selection of the color samples to be exported File Name Path and name of the export file Browse button Displays the Windows standard Save as dialog box February 2005 7 135 Datacolor MATCH te User s Guide Form Maintenance Dialog Box 7 136 Quality List F rbesortiment Hilfsmittel CS QC No 1 Por Illuminant Tolerance List FiberGroup List Quality ColorantS et Auxiliary List Fiber List Affinity List Illuminant Jap Dyestuff List CMC Pass Fail CIFlah Pass Fail Lista de Afinidades Calibration Dyestuff 1 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Form maintenance x Form name pp Section English Version al DCIMatch Quality English Version 1 0 DCIMatch ColorantSet Deutsch Version 1 0 DCIMatch Auniliary Deutsch Version 1 0 DCIMatch Cs Qc Portuqu s Version 1 0 DCIMatch Illuminant English Version 1 0 DCIMatch Affinity Portuqu s Version 1 0 DCIMatch Tolerance English Version 1 0 DCIMatch FiberGroup English Version 1 0 DCIMatch Quality English Version 1 0 DCIMatch ColorantSet English Version 1 0 DCIMatch Calibration Dyestuff English Version 1 0 DCIMatch Pusiliary English Version 1 0 DCIMatch Fiber English Version 1 0 DCIMatch Affinity English Version 1 0 DCIMatch Illuminant ale Version 1 0 DCIMatch Dyestuff English Version 1 0 DCIMatch Qc Cme English Version 1 0 NCIMatch NOC Cielah Frolish Version 1 N Cancel Parameters Form name Application Section English Version B
339. t conditions the Specular INCL e Aperture LAY 3 Flashes 2 4 UV Z 71 9 6 Cut off NONE e eo gt DEL Refresh Color Brightness L Chromacity C Hue h Average 82 214 88 398 88 461 Deviation 0 136 0 182 0 101 450 500 550 600 650 700 Total Selected i Dev ae OO7B7E94 Ace TZ Com1 19200 N 8 amp 2 Mult 4 Tol CmcF 0 10 l 2 0 c 1 0 Time left 4 57 Parameters Used for multiple measurement until the color differences do no longer exceed the toler ance values The graph and the fields show the result of the measurement Averages and deviation are calculated according to the selected measurements Measurements can be selected or canceled in the table using the mouse Measurements can also be canceled using the measurement selection and the DEL buttons at the top of the graph Accept now Selects all measurements Measure Executes the measurement Close Closes the Measurement dialog box and saves the cur rently calculated values February 2005 7 17 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Calibrate Tab Opens the Calibration Conditions dialog box Calibration conditions Refer to the manual of your spectrophotometer 7 18 Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Version 1 0 Datacolor Measurement Main Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Instruments Setup Tab Measurement Main Window Measurement conditions EA Specular INCL ox Apertu
340. t margin Edit menu Remove all fields from current section Removes the fields from the selected section Hide current section Hides the selected section Sections menu List of the sections that are available for the current print form Checked sections are currently used for the form View menu Toolbar Switches the toolbar on check mark and off Status Bar Switches the status bar on check mark and off Datacolor February 2005 7 137 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Fields Properties Look Layout menu 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Opens the Fields information box with the database fields used for the selected section Opens the Properties of the selected field Opens the Look dialog box used for window settings Help functions for a correct alignments of fields Page View Designer specific Toolbar Functions Aca malaje Zoam 100 1234 56 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 About Page View Designer version info 2 Grid Zoom Ruler Opens the Look dialog box used for window settings 3 Toggle Fields Opens the Fields information box with the database fields used for the selected section 4 Toggle Properties Opens the Properties of the selected field 5 Left Alignment Active if more than one field is selected 6 Top Alignment Active if more than one field is selected 7 Right Alignment Active if more than one field is selected
341. t structure level Click the sign to close all subordinate structure levels Selection of objects Action Result Notes 1 Select the requested object folder The object folder data is displayed in using the left mouse button the corresponding view Context sensitive menu New Folder Adds a new subfolder to the selected folder Type a meaning ful name Delete Deletes the selected folder only if the folder is empty New Root Folder Adds a new root folder Type a meaningful name Rename Is used to rename the selected folder Data Type in this Folder Opens the Data in Folder dialog box used for searching data types and the corresponding data in the selected folder Refer to Data in Folder Dialog Box on page 7 13 Find in Folder Opens the Find lt data type gt in Folder dialog box used for searching data records with a determined name or part of the name The lt data type gt of the opened list window is used Refer to Find in Folder Dialog Box on page 7 14 Searching data types and the corresponding data in the selected folder Refer to Data in Folder Dialog Box on page 7 13 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics Datacolor 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Searching objects of a determined data type Action Result Notes 1 On the context sensitive menu The Find lt data type gt in Folder dialog select Find in Folder box is displayed The data type of the opened list window
342. tains Use Wildcards Enter your search values The values can be removed using the button on the left Quick Search Column Check to activate table columns for searching Note Z Refer to the Datacolor Process documentation for more information Datacolor February 2005 7 59 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 60 Table columns CombProcess_ID CombProcess_AuxID CombProcess_Name Context sensitive menu Refresh Grid Select All Unselect All Locate Filter Show Hide Columns Set Font 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Unique identification of the combined process Additional identification of the combined process Unique name of the combined process Refreshes the grid Selects all displayed combined processes Deselect all combined processes Opens the Locate dialog box Refer to Specifying Com bined Processes on page 5 67 Opens the Filter dialog box Refer to Specifying Combined Processes on page 5 61 and to the Datacolor Process docu mentation Opens the Selected Fields dialog box Using the move buttons you can move the field columns to be displayed to the Selected Fields and remove the field columns that are not to be displayed Opens the Font dialog box used to define the font for the table Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Combined Process Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Combined Process Window Z Note Refer to the Datacolor Process documenta
343. te 09 11 4999 11 44 05 ndustry pe ga d Substrate Delivery H PR H000 Seide LigRatioOrPickup i Colorant calibration Operation ColorantSet Values AuxID Type Continue Dye Class Acid dE Sigma 0 00 0 0 Unit akg Creation Date 09 11 1999 11 44 05 Modification Date 11 02 2002 15 17 48 tp Te nting Substrate Delivery PRSMS0000 Selde Extender Extender 1 X 3 Edit replace Product Ex z Al Data eee e my xtender 1 amp Cancel The Industry Type of a printing colorant set imported from Datamatch during database conversion has the value Textile You can now change the type to Tex Printing dyestuff O Donotforgetto select a process continuous processes are used for printing colo rant sets The program asks for an extender as soon as you select Tex Printing dyestuff as Industry Type Select or specify one February 2005 5 57 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile The program completes all the calibration components automatically and calculates the concentration of the extender If the unit is g kg this is the addition to 1000 Conc colorant 1000 Conc Extender Examples Components in one calibration serie Product 2 GL Turquoise Sirius Type oncentration Unit Colorant 0 750 g kg Extender 1 Extender 999 250 g kg New 1000 000 Product 2 Type oncentration Unit GL Turquo
344. test like uncalibrated E Folder for the green tile data Delete diagnostic tiles standards samples Diagnostic tile test performs Com1 9600 N 5 2 Mult 4 Tol CielabF 1 00 DE 1 0 Time left 5 5 Parameters Perform diagnostic tile Values ALWAYS The test is performed after each calibration OPTIONAL The test can be skipped NEVER The test is not performed Action Result Notes 1 In the General Options Tab of the Measurement Main Window select Green Tile Test 2 Set the parameter values and click Save Options 5 18 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics Datacolor 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Test results Diagnostic Test Result Instrument SIM1000 Reference diagnostic tile test IM2000123455 SCI NOR UVEXC OR 123455 Moyal Ltd Diagnostic Test Result eee i T Print Sample diagnostic tile Test SIM20001 23455 SCI NOR UVEXC 020815 15 08 Muminant D65 10 oR Formula CMC L 20 C 1 0 TF 0 50 Brightness L ChromacityC Hue h Reference 56 84 J 31 82 l 152 23 Sample 56 80 J 31 76 152 07 J Difference 0 04 J 0 06 l 0 16 CMC delE 0 06 oecson Pass 550 600 650 700 Note Only CMC 1 2 is used for the test If the test fails the traffic light is red If configured the status of the instrument is set to not calibrated The samples are
345. the dyestuff concentrations will be used as default values and can be altered A correction is possible If the Fixed parameter is used and the recipe is calculated without saving the specified dyestuff concentrations are constant values and cannot be changed A correction is restricted or impossible Process Data for Matching Tab Match Standard Process Data for matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Save Quality Style Calculat Bpom Cornes Pre zz polyester 2025 ac Disperse Exhaust Terasil x Affinity Polyester textured Substrate delivery 1 elements z New Possible dyeset s PES Blanc Dyeing x Fiber ESubstra Pure Substrate 100 PES Disperse Terasil 1 00 1 00 PES Blanc Dyeing Used dyeset s Disperse Dispersol 1 00 Dacroni 001 Standard Multicolor matching Sa Datamatch S ample ss Dyed substrate 3 IP Cancel Parameters Quality Style Field for quality style specification Combined Process Field for combined process specification Affinity Protected Display of the assigned affinity Substrate delivery Selection of a specific substrate delivery The latest substrate delivery is selected per default New Button Opens the Substrate Delivery Dialog box for Datacolor MATCHTextile Version 1 0 Datacolor Match Dialog Box Datacolor 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes measuring a new substrate delivery Refer to Substrate Deliv ery
346. thm standard conc original conc batch conc Multiply Recipe corrected using the multiplicative algorithm standard conc performance factor Performance Relation between batch and original data Batch Data of the measured sample dyed according to the recipe to be corrected Recalculated batch recipe Standard Data of the measured sample color type to be dyed target color Recalculated recipe for the standard Original Pass Fail Differences to the original recipe from the data base Note Z The re calculation of the recipe for the standard is always done without SmartMatch If the original recipe has been calculated using SmartMatch it is different to the standard recipe Refer to Matching on page 5 74 section Review recipe table on page 5 76 for more information about the parameters 7 98 Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Laboratory Correction Table 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Datacolor Functions of the Correct and the context sensitive menu Evaluate Print Displays the colorimetric data in a print preview Evaluate ASCII Creates a text file using a specified form Refer to ASCII Out put Option on page 4 20 Theoretical reflectance Opens the Insert a Theoretical Sample dialog box Insert a theoretical sample for Colorite E E d x B atamatch S ample a 2 Las ii Name 4K0002 ELEFANT K Match Th 013 E Cancel K0002 ELEFANT K Match Th 013 Ri a w oO po
347. tical recipe can be calculated Datacolor February 2005 5 99 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Caution STOP Only fast corrections of laboratory recipes can be saved Fast corrections of pro N duction recipes must be printed before closing the Production Correction dia log box Otherwise the recipe will be lost Action Result Notes 1 On the context sensitive menu The Fast Correction Recipe Input dia select Fast Correction or press F8 log box appears Refer to Fast Correc tion Recipe Input Dialog Box on page 7 105 for a detailed description of the parameters 2 In the Process Data for Matching tab select Quality Style Com bined Process Colorant Set and Standard 3 In the Colorant Set tab select the dyes the recipe is dyed with If you know the concentrations you can specify them either concentra tions or absolute amounts In case of amounts you must specify the dye lot weight and the weight unit 4 Measure or select the batch to be corrected 5 Click Laboratory for a laboratory The Recipe Correction tab appears correction Continue with chapter Laboratory Correction on page 5 92 Click Production for a production The Production Correction table correction appears Continue with chapter Production Correction on page 5 96 Note Z The Fast Correction function can be used for entering SmartMatch points manually
348. ting a Dye Class n s 5 38 Specifying A New Dye Class cccccccceeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeneee 5 38 Modifying and Deleting A Dye Class n 5 38 Specifying Modifying or Deleting Customers cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 5 39 Specifying A New Customer c ccccceeecessseeceeeeeeeteeseeneneeeeeeness 5 39 Modifying and Deleting A Customer ceee nenea 5 39 Specifying Modifying or Deleting Parameters n s 5 40 Specifying A Parameter si sea aa arat cat c bat dead bees ea aa 5 40 Modifying and Deleting A Parameter nenea 5 40 Parameter Examples mmmmnnne nenea nenea nn nana 5 41 Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Color Type sessen 5 43 Specifying A New Color Type c cceeesececeseeeeeeeeneseceneneteeenee 5 43 Modifying and Deleting A Color Type cce eee 5 43 Specifying Modifying or Deleting Tolerances s 5 44 Specifying A New Tolerance ccccceeeceeeseecceeeeeeeeeseeceeneneneneees 5 44 Displaying Datacolor Tolerance Values s 5 46 Modifying and Deleting Tolerance Values eee 5 46 Datacolor February 2005 TOC 3 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Contents Specifying Colorant Sets mmneeeeee eee neeeennneeeee nn nannaeeeee en nnnnanannnneeea 5 47 IntrodUctiOn stat straie Be annie te dau pacate atacata cl aduna aul tt chat 5 47 Specifying A Colorant Set icicle ace ceata sta scent pa ac e a 5 48 Auxi
349. tion for more information Only available for users with full access m CombProcess Levafix Pad Batch REA LE PB File Edit Treatments Products Parameters References Settings Name Levatix Pad Batch Process type Continuous CombProcessGroup Dyeing SS e process DyePracess_ID DyeProcess_Name C 22 Reactive Cold Pad Batch Soda D E Lab note Production note User DCI created 08 04 1999 modified 24 09 1999 by DCI Functions of the Edit menu New Prepares the window for specifying a new combined process Delete Deletes the currently displayed combined process Duplicate Duplicates the currently displayed combined process Datacolor February 2005 7 61 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide Buttons First l Previous gt Next a Last PI New _ Delete Appl EX Apply zii OK J OK Cancel X Cancel 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Jumps to the first combined process of the list Jumps to the previous combined process Jumps to the next combined process Jumps to the last combined process of the list Prepares the window for specifying a new combined process Deletes the currently displayed combined process Saves the currently displayed data The window is not closed Saves the currently displayed data and the window closes Closes the window without saving Parameters of the General tab ID
350. to Datacolor MATCH amp tle colorant sets you must specify fiber sets before you can calculate fiber recipes The colorant set preparation program Colibri contains therefore a new option to build such fiber sets Action Result Notes 1 Select the option General Calibra The Colorant Set List window with the tion on the File menu existing fiber sets appears Refer to Colorant Set List Window on page 7 76 2 On the Colorant set or the context The Fiber Set window appears sensitive menu select Refer to Blend Fiber Set Window on New Fiber Mixing page 7 173 3 Specify the fiber set name The ID is built using the 24 lead ing characters and can be modi fied Automatically the Industry Type is set to Fiber blending and the process is created The default Calibration Method is Rohner Function You can select Approximation 4 Continue with B ack and White Fibers on page 5 136 Datacolor February 2005 5 135 Black and White Fibers Action Result Notes 1 In the table column Product click The White Fiber dialog box appears New White fiber a Product Mane Product Suppliar 10 Product Types Maa Actual Preta Creation Date Modification Dake 2 Specify name product supplier and actual price 3 Click OK The Black Fiber dialog box appears 5 136 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolo
351. to Import Dialog Box on page 7 import file or use the browse func 134 tion Refer to Importing Colorant Sets on page 4 14 for importing colorant sets 3 Click OK If the corresponding options are set all or the existing samples are prompted You can Save Save with Prefix or Skip them Note Samples are not imported if either t he name or the spectral data is the same as data that already exits in the database The import function compares the s pectral data when the sample name already exists A new sample is only created if the spectral data is different E g if sam ple Blue 4711 is already in the database the imported sample which has the same name but different spectral data is imported as Blue 4711 001 Samples imported from EXP files are always stored in the database If the sam ple name already exists a new sample is created with an extension in the name e g sample Blue 4711 is saved as Blue 4711 0 February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 Configuration and Administration Importing Colorant Sets Note Z If you import a colorant set that already exists the program updates the new data Calibration data is always updated Dyestuff prices are not imported If the fiber of the colorant set does not exist in the database a dialog opens where you can select an equivalent from your database O This is to avoid creating the same fibers in different languages e g Co Bw etc
352. to batch E Dete EEA Selection Ln pate Concentration AISmM __ ________Shown 14selected 5_____ Compu Fixed Min 100 Max 100 ___ Relation III E i DE Cancel Parameters Fiber Set Protected Selected fiber set Batch and Color Difference Selection of the Batch Share Max of Share Shows the part in of the current fiber set and the current summary in of all selected fiber sets Group Selection or definition of dyestuff groups The Save button saves the group with all settings of the Selection table The Delete button deletes a group with all settings Refer to Calculation of A New Recipe Series on page 5 69 Table for fiber selection Refer to Recipe Calculation with several Fiber Sets on page 5 144 Datacolor February 2005 7 177 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Lab Graphic Tab Standard i Process Data for fiber matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Save Fiberset Wool Fek Calculate m Dyestuff s choice Take All x Nonef D Group Sf Je 13 FIB_KSP Rhein Cancel Graph XY Graph for the standard and all selected fibers A recipe can be calculated if the standard is inside of all possible triangles that can be drawn between each combination of three fibers Parameters Flber Set Protected Selected Fiber Set Take all Check the box if all fibers are
353. to measure more batches February 2005 5 123 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Set of Batches a xi Set of Batches Select the batches you want to sort _Measue_ ay patches 0 Selected Batches Name Date 200204 C1440107 001 200204 c1440107 005 B 200204 c1440207 009 B 200204 c1440207 013 200204 c1440207 017 200204 c1440207 021 NI 200204 c1440207 0234 NI 200204 c1440207 0248 D 200204 c1440207 0248 NI 200204 c1440307 025 B 200204 c1440307 029 NI 200204 c1440307 033 NI 200204 c1440307 037 NI 200204 c1440907 041 20N2N4 C144N4N7 N45 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2003 09 29 16 41 2NN3 N9 79 16 41 Fi Add gt dd all gt gt lt Remove coed Heo 6 The next pages of the SORT job wiz ard are the same as described in chapter Specifying A New Sort Script Depending on your access rights set Refer to Specifying A New Sort Script on page 5 126 Refer to SORT job Definition Options on page 5 133 in the sort job definition options You can now modify all grouping and tapering parameters Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor SORT Option Modifying a SORT job 5
354. to save the measure ment Click Close The results are displayed in the graph and in the table Average and deviation are calculated continually Refer to Multiple Tab on page 7 16 Measurement Dialog Box Average and deviation are calculated continually Inserts a substrate delivery measure ment into the substrate deliveries for example The Measurement dialog box is closed February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 5 Using Datacolor MATCHTEXtile Until tolerance measurement Action Result Notes 1 In the General Options tab select The Until Tolerance data box appears the Until Tolerance option Measurement Main Window Measurement conditions his Specular INCL ee Aperture LAV 3 Flashes 2 4 uv 71 9 6 Cut off NONE E Single R Multiple E Until Tol I Calibrate Instruments Setup ff General Options E uv gt Options Single Measurement Until Tolerance al Multiple Measurement i Tolerance Tolerance Factor 0 8 Lai Instrument Calibration at Correlation Lal Green Tile Test CMC ze Datacolor FMC2 Jpc79 M amp S83 CIE 94 Com1 19200 N 8 2 Mult 4 Tol Cmc F 0 80 2 0 c 1 0 Time left 6 18 2 Select the formula set the tolerance factor and click Save Options 3 Select the Until Tolerance tab Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Basics 5 Using Datacolor MATCH tile Me
355. tware to easily specify production recipes and Datacolor TICKETs to run on their production plant Datacolor TICKET is based on the Entry Level Datacolor PROCESS The big advan tage of the new module is that you can generate Datacolor TICKETs without a com bined process Datacolor Ticked consists of three major tasks dye lot production recipe and adminis tration Datacolor TICKET Production Recipe The Production Recipe task is used to specify production recipes from approved laboratory recipes Note Z The advantage of creating production recipes without combined process means that the recipe is completely unique There is no rule for adjusting the concentra tions of chemicals or for adding process dependent chemicals and or parame ters even if an operation is used to set up the production recipe The production recipe is a flat recipe built up from dyestuffs chemicals and parameters The generated recipe has no link to a combined process or operation Datacolor TICKET uses the combined process if it is used in Datacolor MATCH Textile jn this case it is not necessary to specify the generated recipe in the Pro duction Recipe task The program behaves as the normal Datacolor PROCESS Entry Level Datacolor February 2005 5 115 E Recipe MB1209 Old Gold Yellow 1630 9728 001 File Edit Recipe 3728 001 AuxlD Name MB1209 Old Gold Yellow 1630 Color type 7 42 00 MBq 209 Old Gold Yello
356. ty system replaces the old software protection pro vided by the green parallel port security key New Installations New purchases receive a sticker containing their serial number This is typically found on the corner of the jewel case The software can be installed normally After installation and if the software is running for the first time the following dialog box appears a datacolor Client Hardware Software Security Ae xi You are currently running a demonstration of this product data color E You have 30 days left in your demonstration period Inter r li icki is link Otherwise to validate your software please vist hitp pmweb datacolor com If you do not have access to the internet you can email the requested information from the enclosed form to SoftwareLicense Datacolor com or phone your focal sales office or dial 1 800 982 6496 for toll free service inthe U S and Canada Serial Number Computer Validation Number 230335218 1 752800 Unlock Response Number na It may take up to seven days to validate your software Please do so as soon as possible so that you wont be without the eS eee use ofthis software i Gontinue di From the date of the first use you have 30 days to validate the software Any attempt to change this system date will immediately end the demonstration period 1 During this period press the Continue button to start the software in demonstra tion mode It is possible that n
357. u Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Dyestuff Class List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Dyestuff Class Name Unique identification of the dye class Dyestuff Class Id Unique name of the dye class Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Datacolor MATCH amp tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Dyestuff List Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Dyestuff List Window Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the names of the table columns can be altered using the User s Browser Definition function of the Tools menu Refer to Browser Customizing on page 4 6 Product Name Unique name of the product Product Id Unique identification of the product Product Supplier Name Unique name of the product supplier ACTUAL_PRICE Current price ACTUAL_CONC Currently supplied concentration Modification Date Date of last modification Functions of the Basic Data and the context sensitive menu Refer to Functions of the Basic Data Menu on page 7 10 Auxiliary List Window Datacolor Table columns The data table columns to be displayed and the nam
358. u can optimize the result of the matching by adding dyestuffs and concentrations and by specifying tol erances 5 When finished you can display and print the recipe 6 Click Close to close the Production Correction dialog box The Production Correction dialog box appears Refer to Production Correction Dialog Box on page 7 101 for a detailed description of the parameters Refer to Production Correction Table on page 7 103 Note F using Datacolor MATCH Teile Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 After closing the production correction recipe can no longer be displayed or printed Datacolor Production correction examples continuous Result using the Production button Production correction for Rem Brillant Blue BB 133 Gran 2 0 Standard Rem Brillant Blue BB 133 Gran 2 0 Batch Rem Brillant Blue BB 133 Gran 1 0 Fibre Add new dyestuff s User selected v Best add Best positive add Reset RGB Dyestuff Recipe Amount _ Effect Rel Remazol Briliant Blue BB gran 133 20 000 10 190 g 0 50 50 95 Diluent 10 000 0 000 Batch to drop 0 000 Liquor fi 0 amp New liquor 10 E Pickup 60 Use Pickup E CMC Use as proposal RI Z Wumninant delEMI New delEMI delLML deic MC deIH MH B Show dE D65 3 26 0 65 0 14 0413 0 62 Met 4 1 07 049 008 0416 0 05 Print Met F11 0 79 0 08 0 04 0 07 0 01 ra E D ASCII Export Evaluate Computer add pora dE Limit
359. umber of SmartMatch points used in a recipe calculation are shown at the bottom of the dye concentration column in the recipe table Note You can still store SmartMatch points for later use if the SmartMatch facility is switched off Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Correction 2 Overview Correction Laboratory correction Production correction Settings Settings Print Dispense Approval for use in production Print Display Save Selection of correction type Laboratory The existing recipe is altered and saved again e Production An additional recipe is calculated that is used to change color of the dyed batch to the correct color Data input Recipe to be corrected Batch color of the dyed substrate to be corrected e Dyestuffs are pre selected by the recipe to be corrected Additional dyestuffs can be selected Concentration and parameters can be defined The acceptance limit settings can be altered E Caution STOP A production correction is not saved It must be printed before closing the Pro duction Correction dialog box Otherwise the recipe will be lost Datacolor February 2005 2 9 Datacolor MATCH E il User s Guide 2 Overview Fast Correction The Fast Correction function is used for production or laboratory corrections without an existing recipe It is based on a theoretical calculated recipe of the standard or a rec ipe typed in manually This tas
360. uttons Export Name of the print form Application Sub program Language of the print form Version of the print form Datacolor MATCH e tle Version 1 0 Exports the print form file to the selected location Datacolor Pager Window 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes a Pager Window 5 Pager Calibration Dyestuff 1 BEE File Edit Sections View Layout ASCI Export Window Help l x sajolola a A Z 0mft00 2 Bisley 2 e gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Header data intern Calibration Header Calibration Data 1 a Modification Date 27 03 2000 __ Creation Date 27 03 2000 liseriD o nS n Calibration Data nefa Used L strate Delivery Namel ___ jbratian Dvenrocess Name Calibration Serie Header alibration sample a No Name Conc Dyestrengthj dE Used Measure Conditions Calibration Serie Data li l ial PLL Calibration Graphic R Ready Position 19 5 0 1 No Application Page View Designer specific Menu Functions File menu Import Opens the Open dialog box used to import an exported print form Export Opens the Form Maintenance dialog box used to select and export print forms Delete Rename Opens the Form Maintenance dialog box used for renaming and deleting print forms Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box used for specifying the left and the righ
361. value 5 46 User access rights 4 3 administration 4 2 changing the password 4 2 specify modify delete 4 2 User field pre selection dialog box Datacolor SORT 7 172 W Window address 7 44 affinity list 7 88 alternate substrate information 7 84 auxiliary list 7 89 batch series Datacolor MONITOR 7 139 batch series relation dialog box Datacolor MONITOR 7 143 batch series script name dialog box Datacolor MONITOR 7 141 color type list 7 85 color type property sheet 7 45 colorant set 7 77 colorant set list 7 76 combined process 7 61 combined process list 7 93 combined processes browse 7 58 correct or approve your recipe dialog box 7 95 correction dialog box Datacolor BLEND 7 179 correction recipe dialog box Datacolor BLEND 7 181 create batch series dialog box Datacolor MON ITOR 7 140 create calibration series 7 82 current population dialog box 7 125 customer list 7 91 customer property sheet 7 43 data in folder 7 13 Datacolor tolerance block dialog box 7 55 dye lots list window Datacolor TICKET 7 151 dye process list 7 88 dye process property sheet 7 29 dyestuff class list 7 88 dyestuff list 7 89 explorer 7 2 export dialog box 7 135 fast correction dialog box Datacolor BLEND 7 182 fast correction recipe input dialog box 7 105 fiber group list 7 87 fiber set Datacolor BLEND 7 173 7 176 fibre list 7 86 form maintenance dialog box 7 136 formula edit 7 71 Formula setting
362. ve button saves the group with all settings of the Selection table The Delete button deletes a group with all settings Refer to Calculation of A New Recipe Series on page 5 69 Table for dye selection Refer to Selecting dyestuffs for matching on page 5 71 7 118 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Match Dialog Box Datacolor 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Lab Graph Tab F The Lab Graph tab is used to check that a recipe can be calculated with the selected dyestuffs Note The graphical view cannot check the quality of a recipe Standard K0002 ELEFANT K Save Dyeset Disperse Dispersol Calculate r Dyestuff s choice TakeAll x 2 None T m J c cow Fd Process Data for matching Dyeset Lab Graphic Settings Dispersol Yellow 02 _Dispersol Orange CRN G Dispersol Scarlet C2R 04 Dispersol Red C4G G 05 Dispersol Blue G Dispersol Green CEB Dispersol Navy C2G Cancel Graph The graph may be rotated by pressing down the left mouse button and can be zoomed using the right mouse button The standard is displayed as a sphere on the top of a line The dyestuff selection is OK if the standard sphere is completely inside the color space 1 Check the possible dyestuff selections by rotating the color space The standard sphere must not leave the color space at any position of the color space Note If a selection is not OK you can cha
363. vered by Datacolor The user can modify these forms or specify new ones 1 Onthe Windows start menu or the desktop click the Pager be icon Page View Designer Specifying A New Print Form The Pager window appears Refer to Pager Window on page 7 137 for more information about the parameters 2 Select Application Option object type Language and Version and click OK 3 Click the section to be specified Inactivate an unused section On the Edit menu select Hide Cur rent Section or select the requested section on the Sections menu Specifying a text field 1 Inthe toolbar select the text tool 2 Draw and place the requested text field 3 Inthe toolbar select Toggle Properties 4 Specify the text and change the other parameters if requested Specifying a database field 1 In the toolbar select Toggle Properties 2 Select and place the requested database field The parameters of the fields can be altered using the Properties box Action Result 1 In the toolbar or on the File menu The Template Identification dialog box select New appears An empty form appears containing all sections available for the selected option The check mark is removed and the section is not used in the current print form The Properties box appears The Fields list box opens displaying all available fields A te
364. w 1630 ry Quality fi v Cotton bleached gt Affinity Cotton bleached CombProcess X X Location Laboratory T 8 pe E DyeFiberGroup Colorent set 1 Reactive exhaust 1 10 Reactive Exhaust ORS Rtas Ren Eee Unit Actual Yellow S 3R 150 768 Bezaktiv Red S 3B 150 0 1128 0 0000 150 Bezaktiv Green S 4B 0 2301 0 0000 100 PassFail Modify Template D New dyelot created 03 10 2002 modified 03 10 2002 by DCI Action Result Notes 1 In the Overview window click Pro The Recipes list window appears duction Recipe Refer to Recipe List Window on page 7 145 2 Select the requested recipe and The Recipe window appears Refer to open it Recipe Window Datacolor PROCESS on page 7 147 3 Click Load and Modify Template to The Root Recipe dialog box appears add chemicals Refer to Root Recipe Dialog Box on page 7 149 for more information 4 Click New Dye Lot The New Dye Lot dialog box appears Continue with Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot on page 5 117 Note Z The Root Recipe contains all the dyeing steps with the related products and their rela tive amount ml l or g l 5 116 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Datacolor TICKET Dye Lot Action Result Notes 1 In the Recipe Selection tab of the The Recipes list window appears New Dye Lot dialog box type the Refer to Recipe List Window on page 7
365. ween different substrate deliveries may force corrections of the recipe A numerical value used to determine the acceptability of a sample A treatment consists of one or more operations describing the dyeing process for labo ratory and or production February 2005 8 5 Datacolor MATCH il User s Guide 8 Glossary 8 6 Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Index Datacolor MATCH User s Guide A Absorption explanation 8 2 Access rights specification 4 3 Address dialog box 7 44 Administration Datacolor TICKET 5 117 Affinity exclude colorant sets 5 29 explanation 8 2 include colorant sets 5 29 Affinity list window 7 88 Alternate Substrate Information dialog box 7 84 Approve approving a recipe for production 5 84 ASCII output 4 20 output of basic data 4 23 output of recipes 4 23 specifying forms 4 20 Auxiliary explanation 8 2 overview 2 3 Auxiliary list window 7 89 B Backup database using Datacolor Match Textile 4 16 database using Sybase utilities 4 17 Basic data ASCII output 4 23 color type 5 43 customers 5 39 dye class 5 38 dye process 5 37 menu functions 7 10 overview 2 2 5 25 parameters 5 40 product 5 34 quality style 5 26 recommended input sequence 5 25 tolerance 5 44 Basics browse and select 5 2 custom query 5 5 data handling 5 2 default query 5 5 field specific selection aids 5 6 quick search 5 4 selection using the list windows 5 3 5 4 9 2 Datacolor MATCHTextile Versio
366. ween two light sources To activate the calculation of the color inconstancy calculate a recipe open the context sensitive menu select the function View configuration and check the corresponding boxes CMCxxx Color display for two illuminants To activate the display of two Illuminants calculate a recipe open the context sensitive menu select the function View configuration and check the box 2 illuminants banks The selection becomes active after saving the recipe If you open the recipe table again or match a new recipe the colors for the first two illuminants are displayed Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Modifying Recipes Recipe Editor Recipe parameters can be altered using the Recipe Editor Z Modification Rules for adding and removing dyestuffs The dyestuff selection of a recipe can only be altered if the recipe is approved it is not in use by the laboratory and a modification may influence the laboratory correction Note Data that can be modified is displayed with a green background Recipe Editor ET Values Header Y0002 ELEFANT 040400 1105 Recipe Name V0002 ELEFANT 040400 1105 Recipe ID 275 2 Creation Date 04 04 2000 11 03 04 Modification Date 26 07 2002 09 38 52 Quality Name Cotton knitted not mercerised contnesrerez RenaedPadsaehsteate Batch BAT 15 L customer Nane EEE Color Recipe CO
367. window descriptions for window specific functions Toolbar Refer to Toolbar Functions on page 7 7 Status bar Display of messages Datacolor MATCH te Version 1 0 Datacolor Explorer Datacolor 7 Windows and Dialog Boxes Buttons in the overview window Fiber Quality Style Substrate Delivery Affinity Fiber Group Fiber Process Combined Process Operation Dye Process Auxiliary Parameter Recipe Color Type Recipe Colorant Set Dyestuff Sample Opens the Quality Style List window Refer to Quality Style List Window on page 7 87 Opens the Substrate Delivery List window Refer to Sub strate Delivery List Window on page 7 87 Opens the Affinity List window Refer to Affinity List Window on page 7 88 Opens the Fiber Group List window Refer to Fiber Group List Window on page 7 87 Opens the Fiber List window Refer to Fiber List Window on page 7 86 Opens the Combined Process List window Refer to Com bined Process List Window on page 7 93 Opens the Operation List window Refer to Operation List Window on page 7 93 Opens the Dye Process List window Refer to Dye Process List Window on page 7 88 Opens the Auxiliary List window Refer to Auxiliary List Win dow on page 7 89 and Specifying Modifying or Deleting a Product on page 5 34 Opens the Parameter List window Refer to Parameter List Window on page 7
368. xt field for the description and a field for the data is displayed Datacolor MATCH tile Version 1 0 Datacolor Specifying Print Forms Using the Pager Datacolor Draw rectangles and ellipses 1 Inthe toolbar select the rectan gles or ellipses tool 2 Draw and place the graph The parameters of the graph can be altered using the Properties box Enter a bitmap graph 1 Inthe toolbar select the Bit map tool and click the selected section 2 Search and select the graph supported are bmp pcx jpg graph and click Open 3 Place the graph The parame ters of the graph can be altered using the Properties box Specifying date time page num ber or form file name 1 In the toolbar select the re quested tool and place the field Remove all field from the current section 1 Inthe toolbar select the requested tool and place the field Deleting a field 1 Select the field and press Ctrl Del In the toolbar or on the File menu select Save As Specify a form name and click OK 4 Configuration and Administration The Open box appears The Form Name dialog box appears The new print form is created February 2005 Datacolor MATCH User s Guide 4 28 Modifying A Print Form 4 Configuration and Administration Refer to Pager Window for more information about the parameters Action Result In the toolbar or

Datacolor Match Textile User's Guide (Version 1.0)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents